Co Curriculum

C
O
M
P
U
T
E
R
E
N
G
I
N
E
E
R
I
N Curriculum Document 2017-18
G Diploma in Computer Engineering
6th Revision (Outcome Based Education)
PREFACE
Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad, is one of the oldest institute in Maharashtra was

established in the year 1995-96. Over the period of time the institute, through its untiring efforts
has created its own niche and has been functioning as a Lead Technical Institute in the State of
Maharashtra to serve the Industry and Society by producing excellent technical manpower.
Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad has expanded quantitatively from an intake of 180

in 1995 with three programmes to 720 Intake in eight programmes. The Institute has been
striving relentlessly for achievement of excellence in technical education. Government
Polytechnic, Aurangabad has been functioning with ‘the Autonomous Institute status’, since
1994.It is presently functioning in three shifts, by running Diploma Programmes in I Shift
(Regular), II shift and Part Time Diploma programmes in evening shift. I am proud to share that,
the Institute has been ably rewarded with three state level awards for its best performance in the
state of Maharashtra.
Institute has revised the curricula five times in the past and the sixth revision which was
due, was initiated in the year 2015 and finally , the revised( sixth) curricula which is the outcome
of, search conference under the guidance of NITTTR, Bhopal ,several workshops and
deliberations, has been implemented with effect from 2017-18 with the approval of Programme
wise Board of Studies (PBOS) Board of Studies ( BOS) and consent of Governing Body .
The hallmark of sixth revision is, adopting ‘Outcome Based Education Philosophy’ as the
basis for Curriculum Design and Development process. The ‘Vision & Mission’ of Institute and
programme offering Departments, and with programme Educational Objectives (PEOs),
Programme Outcomes as mandated by National Board of Accreditation (NBA) have been
considered as points of reference for curriculum revision. Taking into account the need/ demand
of industry and society, the courses such as ‘Vocational Training (Industrial/ In-plant Training),
Seminar and Development of Life Skills for all the programmes have been introduced as
compulsory. To accommodate these additional courses and other requirements, the credits of
each programme have been enhanced from 184 to 194.
‘Skill India’, ‘Digital India’ and ‘Make in India’ the flagship programmes/ initiatives of
Government of India and State of Maharashtra have been the basic considerations in the
curriculum revision process.
I deem this is as an opportune moment to recall the following proverb/quote which I view
as highly relevant, on the occasion of writing the preface.
"If you are planning for a year, sow rice; if you are planning for a decade, plant trees;
if you are planning for a lifetime, educate people." – A Chinese proverb &
As the Indian Education Commission of 1964-66, also known as the Kothari
Commission, it is stated that
“The destiny of our country is being shaped in our classrooms”.
I take great pride in appreciating the efforts of Faculty of all Departments. All Faculties
have taken determined efforts under the guidance of NITTTR Bhopal, Industry experts,
academicians and Curriculum Development & Implementation Cell (CDIC) in the revision of
curricula. I appreciate the contribution of alumni, students and faculty by making valuable
suggestions / feedback for the revision of curricula.
I wish to assure, that the curriculum of all programmes will be implemented in true spirit
to achieve the intended educational objectives of the programme.
(Prof. F.A.Khan)
Principal
Government Polytechnic,
Aurangabad
INDEX
Sr No. Content Page No.
1 Government Polytechnic Aurangabad i
1.1 Vision i
1.2 Mission i
2 Information Technology Department ii
2.1 Vision ii
2.2 Mission ii
3 Scope iii
4 Outcome Base Education viii
4.1 Introduction viii
4.2 Philosophy x
4.3 Approach x
4.4 Flowchart xi
5 Skill Identification/ Job Function xii
6 PEO xiii
7 PO & PSO xv
8 Mapping of Mission and Programme Educational xvi
Objectives (PEO'S)
9 Mapping of Programme Educational Objectives (PEO'S) xvii
and Programme Outcomes (PO'S)
10 Mapping of Programme Outcome and Courses xviii
11 Program Structure xx
12 Sample Path (10th Pass) xxvi
13 Award Winning Courses xxvii
14 Semester Wise Course List xxviii
Course Content
15 Semester I 1-50
Course Code Course Name
15.1. 6G101 Basic Mathematics 1-6
15.2. 6G103 Engineering Physics 7-13
15.3. 6S201 Fundamentals of Computer & Internet 14-20
Technology
15.4. 6G203 Basics Computer Systems 21-27
15.5. 6G301 English 28-33
15.6. 6G303 Development of Life Skill 34-41
15.7. 6G304 Environmental Science 42-50
16 Semester II 51-99
16.1. 6G102 Engineering Mathematics 51-55
16.2. 6G104 Engineering Chemistry 56-63
16.3. 6G202 Workshop Practice 64-71
16.4. 6S202 Elements of Electronics & Electrical 72-79
Engineering
16.5. 6S204 C Programming 80-87
16.6. 6S205 Static Web Page Designing Lab 88-93
16.7. 6G302 Communication Skill 94-99
17 Semester III 100-143
17.1. 6P201 Computer Hardware & Maintenance with 100-108
Troubleshooting
17.2. 6S203 Digital Electronics 109-116
17.3. 6S206 Multimedia Techniques 117-123
17.4. 6S208 Object Oriented Programming using C++ 124-131
17.5. 6S401 Relational DB Management Systems 132-138
17.6. 6S405 Software Engineering 139-143
18 Semester IV 144-207
18.1. 6S207 Data Structures 144-148
18.2. 6P301 Microprocessor & Programming 149-155
18.3. 6S402 Software Development Tool 156-162
18.4. 6S403 JAVA Programming 163-170
18.5. 6S404 Operating Systems 171-176
18.6. 6S406 PHP programming 177-186
18.7. 6S407 Ruby programming 187-193
18.8. 6S408 Python Programming 194-201
18.9. 6S409 Android Programming 202-207
19 Semester V 208-271
19.1. 6P403 Computer network 208-214
19.2. 6S305 Industrial Management 215-223
19.3. 6P401 Advanced microprocessors & Micro- 224-230
controllers
19.4. 6P402 Mobile Computing 231-237
19.5. 6P404 Linux Programming Lab 238-244
19.6. 6P405 Information Storage Mgmt System 245-251
19.7. 6P406/6T406 Data Warehousing & Mining 252-258
19.8. 6P407/6T407 Cloud Computing 259-264
19.9. 6S501 Android Programming 265-271
20 Semester VI 272-334
20.1. 6G306 Entrepreneurship Development 272-279
20.2. 6P501 Computer Security & Cyber Laws 280-286
20.3. 6S502 Project Work 287-294
20.4. 6S504 Advanced JAVA Programming 295-301
20.5. 6S505 Software Testing 302-307
20.6. 6P502/ 6T502 Advanced Database Management Systems 308-313
20.7. 6P503/ 6T503 Geographical Information System 314-319
20.8. 6P504 Object Technology & UML 320-326
20.9. 6S503 Implant(Vocational) Training 327-334
Government Polytechnic Aurangabad
(An Autonomous Institute of Government of Maharashtra)
Vision
“To become internationally accredited institute that
contributes in the development of competent
professionals and entrepreneurs on the platform of
technology based systems blended learning through
highly qualified & trained staff”.
Mission
"To educate & train globally competent individuals,
professionals, technicians & skilled human resources
through world class curriculum, student centric
academic systems, team of committed, trained
faculty & staff contributing to the students
successful employment & entrepreneurship with a
spirit of patriotism and concern for environment".
i
Diploma in Computer Engineering
Vision
“A center of excellence in the domain of
Computer Science & Engineering to cultivate
"digital artifacts" for society.
Mission
 To impart education in computer hardware and
software required for industry and business.
 Developing skills resembling problem solving,
interpersonal skill, high order thinking skill and
logical reasoning for entrepreneurship and
employment.
 Developing values and ethics for lifelong
learning in the system environment.
ii
SCOPE
DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING PROGRAMME
In this era of Information Technology revolution, the computer systems are playing an
important role in every aspect of human life for automation, from simple office
automation to decision support systems, production planning to e-commerce,
communication, online education etc. To ensure effective/ proper utilization of these
computer systems by the software professionals it is necessary that the electronic
components of the computer system and its associated peripheral devices and network,
work efficiently without breakdown. This demands technicians having good
knowledge and skills of computer engineering in maintaining computer hardware easily
and quickly. In addition, the continuous changing technologies in the field of
Microelectronics, Communication technology and Computer Technology have created
newer and changing demands for new knowledge and skills in Diploma pass-outs
implying a positive attitude towards self-learning and adaptability.
Therefore, this Diploma in Computer Engineering programme envisages in

developing competent technicians with a number of professional skills who can
perform their jobs in the industry or as an entrepreneur effectively and efficiently. In
the industry or in small business/ educational establishments the technician with
necessary skills will be able to plan, procure and install computer hardware and
software, test and certify them.
The programme will develop the competency required to assemble computer

system, maintain the computer resources in running condition and troubleshoot and
repair the computer hardware in the case of breakdown. The technicians will also be
able to install and manage computer networks. As an entrepreneur he will be to
manage his computer-related enterprise and market his products and services. At the
same time the skills related to software that are required to manage the computer
hardware and networks will also be developed. The basic competencies that are
required for designing and developing software systems will also be developed in the
technicians in case he wants to take it as a career. This programme apart from
developing the above mentioned professional skills would also develop some of the
soft skills like communication skills, social skills and life-long learning skills that are
required by the industry.
iii
AREA OF WORK:
S. No. Type of industries/ Capacity (Designation) in which employed

organizations
i) Computer Hardware H/W maintenance Engineer
ii) Computer Services Customer support Engineer, Supervisor
iii) Consultancy services Providing services to customer, organizations
iv) Software Development S/W Testing/Trainee/Customer Support
Programmer, Database Administrator
v) Electronics and communication Trainee Technician

organizations
vi) Desktop Support technician Network Analyst
vii) System Network administrator Network Administrator
viii) Self-Taught Computer H/W maintenance, assemble

Repairman
IX Technical Support Analyst Trainee Engineers
X Web developer Web Application developer
PROGRAMME AIM
To provide students with a balance of Computer engineering theory and practical skills
that will enable them to develop a sound knowledge and analytical ability allowing them
to develop professionally in pursuit of future employment at junior level in the computing
sector and higher studies.
COMPETENCIES REQUIRED BY COMPUTER ENGINEERING TECHNICIAN:
 Use and operate computers for data processing and communication.

 Efficient use of software packages.
 Diagnose the faults/viruses and remove it.
 Maintain the computer system and Network.
iv
 Project management Skills.
 Plan, estimate, procure and install Hardware and Software.
 Analyze and design systems.
 Administrate and Manage Networks.
 Programming Skills.
 Web based application skills.
 Web server administration skills.
 Entrepreneurial skills.
 Life long learning and ability to acquire new knowledge and skills on self-learning
basis.
 Ability to work in multidisciplinary and multinational teams.
 Positive attitude towards work and social responsibility.
 Develop S/W using open software Technology
 Develop S/W using .NET technology
CURRICULUM DESIGN & DEVELOPMENT
DIMENSIONS OF CURRICULUM:
This Curriculum has been designed on the systematic approach based on competency-
based curriculum of educational technology and theories of learning. The data is
collected in following ways
 Feedback of alumni
 Feedback of staff
 Past experience of 3 years.
 Through observational records
 By study of documents used in industries, expert reports, newspapers and trade
literatures etc., their views on different aspects of the curriculum.
 Through a series of discussions in programme committee.
Taking into account the knowledge, skills/competencies, attitudes etc. required to be

possessed by the diploma pass outs the content of different courses is designed.
While designing the curriculum emphasis is given on following points.
 New/emerging technologies being used in the world of work.
v
 Personal values and social skills required to be possessed.
 Skills related to life-long learning and independent study.
 Professional skills required for different jobs along a career path.
Describing roles/ functions of a technician

A technician, say for example in a medium size engineering enterprise, working at
middle level management position may have to carry out jobs in different departments.
These are identified as
 Installation, inspection, production & control

 Repair & maintenance
 Marketing and sales
 Purchase & Store
 Observation at Site
 Analysis, Design and Costing.
 Research & development
Designing content of each curriculum area

 Different courses are categorized as
 Foundation Level
 Basic Level
 Allied Level
 Applied Level
 Diversified Level
 Curriculum scheme of each course along with course code is given at the beginning
 Competencies to be developed are identified and written.
 Rationale of each course is highlighted.
 Objectives of each course are highlighted and written.
 Content outline in descriptive form was derived. Generally the content outline of a
subject was divided into chapters and then from chapters into topic outline.
 Having derived the total content outline i.e. Theory. At the end of the theory content
list of practical is added for each course, following were arrived at by consensus-
 Time required by a teacher to teach the prescribed theory and practical parts
 Number of courses per term to be taken.
 Total no. of hours required to teach the entire course.
 Total no. of lectures and practicals per week.
vi
 Approach to the assessment of student’s learning and types of assessment techniques
to be used were decided. An assessment scheme was designed, which is a suitable
mix of (a) continuous evaluation of term-work (b) progressive test (c) Term end
examination.
 Implementation strategies for each subject were identified.
 Learning resources for students were prescribed such as

 Teacher’s lecture notes
 Basic text-book covering most of the topics in the curriculum and other
books
 Monographs, handbooks, periodicals, articles, journals etc.
 Data-books, manuals, standards etc
In all these activities, views of senior teachers regarding relevance of course contents and
implementation strategies being presently followed are sought.
vii
OUTCOME BASED EDUCATION (OBE) PHILOSOPHY
Introduction:
After conferring academic autonomy to Government Polytechnics during

Second Technician World Bank Assisted Project (Tech Ed II) implemented from 1992 to
1999 the curriculum revision process is being carried out after every 4-5 years. Our
Institute, being Academically Autonomous since 1994, has been following the same practice
and hence this sixth revision of curriculum for all programmes.
Curriculum, as per Colombo Plan Staff College Manila (1984), means ‘an educational
programme designed, developed and implemented to attain predetermined educational
objectives.’ Therefore curriculum ought to be designed for achieving purpose, objectives,
outcomes that are decided well in advance. More over curriculum at any level, let it be at
unit, at course, at course category or at programme level at the top, comprises of (Ralph
Tylor 1949) rationale, objectives/ outcomes, content, Learning -Teaching strategies (LTS)
and finally student’s assessment and evaluation.
We are in the era where technical manpower in general and engineering
technicians in particular are required to solve or assist in solving engineering problems from
Nano – micro level to mega level (Jeff Lohmann 2009). It is expected from him/ her in that
case to use knowledge of not only technology but also natural sciences (animate, inanimate
and psycho socio sciences) and mathematics. Moreover he/ she is required to use advance IT
based tools and techniques in diagnosing faults and carry out maintenance. Further technical
manpower should have ability to work in team, communicate effectively, and remain
updated of technologies they are expected to deal with.
As per research on curriculum in engineering and technology, education carried out in
different parts of world it is concluded that philosophy, framework, approach and model that
is to be used for developing technical manpower with such profile should be
Interdisciplinary – integrated curriculum.
Therefore the philosophy of curriculum development used in revising sixth
curriculum has been integrated – interdisciplinary in nature to achieve outcome based
technical education.
Even though all prevailing & necessary apt theories of curriculum design are used in
the curriculum development process the existing curriculum has been questioned for its
ability to provide clearly stated learning outcomes and therefore it is right time that the
revised curricula requires that it should give enough clarity as regards intended learning
viii
outcomes to all concerned – first to the student, then to the teachers and the industry,
followed by all the other stakeholders. This meant that the curriculum should explicitly state
as to what are the observable and measurable ‘competencies’ expected by the industry. Such
‘competencies’ comprising of measurable ‘Course outcomes’ in the ‘cognitive domain’,
measureable associated practical outcomes in the form of practical exercises in the
‘psychomotor domain’ and measurable social skills related to the ‘affective domain’ will
help the students and teachers in knowing the ‘length, breadth and depth’ of the course
necessary to achieve the competency.
Therefore Curriculum needs to be outcome-based where competencies /

program outcomes and course outcomes are measurable. We are in the era of accords viz.
Washington, Sidney, Dublin Accords in which gradation of any engineering and technology
Programme is carried out using outcome based criteria in signatory countries. It was the
outcome based criteria, which was devised for the first time by Accreditation Board for
Engineering and Technology (ABET), that is being followed in USA for grading
programmes for their quality since 1998. It is the industry which made educational institutes
to go for outcome based criteria popularly known as EC 2000 where main emphasis is over
outcomes – what he/ she knows and what he/ she is able to do.
National Board of Accreditation (NBA) has been practicing outcome based

criteria in grading educational programmes of institutes awarding diploma and degree in
engineering and technology. In that case the board empowered to undertake exercise of
accrediting programmes has developed indigenous criteria for diploma programmes as
follows:
i. Vision, mission and programme educational objectives

ii. Programme outcomes
iii. Programme curriculum
iv. Students performance
v. Faculty
vi. Facilities and technical support
vii. Academic support unit and teaching learning process
viii. Governance
ix. Institutional support and finance resources
x. Continuous improvement
ix
As All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE) has made it mandatory to
institutions to follow curricular processes for extending Outcome Based Technical
Education and get programme accredited from NBA.
Philosophy for Sixth Revision of Curriculum adopted at Government Polytechnic

Aurangabad:
Sixth revision of Curriculum uses model, approach, philosophy evolved over
the years in other part of the world and accepted by our nation through National Board of
Accreditation (NBA) being signatory of Washington Accord. It is the curriculum
development philosophy that will enable institutes to impart Outcome based education
(OBE). It is essential in that case to design a programme curriculum, develop resources
for implementing it, implement it and undertake student’s assessment and evaluation to
impart OBE.
As regards, sixth revision of curriculum, which is based primarily on Outcome Based
Education philosophy, follows the following stages.
1. Occupation analysis.
2. Formulation of Vision & Mission of Institute/Department.
3. Formulation of Diploma graduate attributes and Programme Educational Objectives.
4. Evolve Program Structure.
5. Evolve Course structure, Course Competencies, Course Outcomes & Curriculum
detailing of each course.
6. Approval of Curriculum
7. Implementation of Curriculum.
Approach to Curriculum Design and Development for Sixth Revision of

Curriculum based upon above stages has been elaborated and depicted
schematically as below.
In line with above stages, the institute ,under the guidance of NITTTR Bhopal
organized the search conference/workshop involving industry personnel from several
industries in the region covering all sectors related to 8 programmes run in the institute .
This led to occupation analysis, knowing industry and society expectations as regards
diploma graduate / engineer to arrive at profile of diploma engineers.
x
Institute also carried meetings and deliberations with stake holders to
formulate the renewed Vision & Mission of Institute and departments as well. The
Vision & Mission so formulated have been considered as the terms of references in
curriculum revision process.
xi
Flowchart of Design & Development of OBE
POLICIES OF GOVT/AICTE/ VISION &

INDUSTRIAL &
MISSION OF
SOCIAL NEEDS
NBA/PROFESSIONAL BODIES INSTITUTE &
DEPARTMENTS
PROFESSINAL
BODIES /PBOS
PEOs, POs, & PSOs -

POLICIES, RESOURCES DIPLOMA GRADUATE
& GUIDELINES OF
PROFILE
INSTITUTE
RESOURCES&FAC PROGRAM
ULTY STRUCTURE
VALIDATION BY PBOS
COURSES STRUCTURE
CDIC GUIDELINES
&CURRICULUM
& SUPPORT
DETAILING
PROGRAMM
CDIC CURRICULUMAPPROVA
GUIDELINES L
CURRICULUM
IMPLEMENTATION
RESOURCES
&EVALUATION
MOBILIZATION
CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT APPROACH

SKILL
IDENTIFICATION / JOB FUNCTION
Skill identification has been done after analysing the feedbacks of alumni, students and
faculties, suggestions from search conference, PBOS members and industry persons.
xii
Sr. No. Type of skills List of skills
1. Technical Skills 1. Programming Skill
2. Webapplication development using
computer languages
3. Apply database management concept
4. Test the software using automated tools
5. Apply Software Engineering concept to
industry
6. Mobile application development.
7. Troubleshoot & Maintain network at
workplaces.
8. Design desktop application according to
requirements of users.
2. Soft Skills 1. Communication (Oral & Written)
2. Team work
3. Problem solving
4. Develop lifelong learning
5. Multidisciplinary Practices
6. Recourse management
7. Time management
8. Creativity
9. Presentation skills
10. Leadership
Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)

1. To provide the essential knowledge of science and engineering concepts fundamental
for a computer professional and equip the proficiency of mathematical foundations
and algorithmic principles for competent problem solving ability.
2. To design, model, program and test software systems and applications in varying
domains including networking, web related services and storage management.\
xiii
3. To inculcate professional and ethical attitude, communication skills, teamwork,
lifelong learning, multidisciplinary approach into student to relate computer
engineering issues with social awareness.
Programme Outcomes (POs)

A Diploma in Computer Engineering graduate must demonstrate
1. Basic Knowledge:An ability to apply basic knowledge of mathematics, science, and
engineering to develop logic for related programming technologies.
2. Discipline Knowledge:An ability to apply knowledge of networking with wireless
technologies, multimedia technology and distributed computing, software testing and
topics of current relevance to Software & IT industry.
3. Experiments & Practices:An ability to interpret the knowledge of best practices of
experiments in software development in industry.
4. Engineering Tools:An ability to design, develop and evaluate acreative solutions for
computer-based system, process, or program using techniques, skills and modern
software engineering tools necessary for IT practice.
5. The Engineer & Society: An ability to comprehend of professional, legal, security,
social issues and responsibilities.
6. Environment & Sustainability:An ability to analyse the impact of engineering
solutions in global, economic, environmental and societal context.
7. Ethics: An ability to inculcate professional and ethical responsibilities and marshal in
all situations.
8. Individual & Teamwork:An ability to function effectively in multi-disciplinary
environment as an individual and in team.
9. Communication:An ability to communicate technical topics in written and verbal
forms effectively.
10. Life Long Learning: An ability to apply knowledge & skills of computing discipline
in the competitive examinations, higher education and / or seek employment to
engage in life-long learning.
xiv
Programme Specific Outcomes (PSO)
1. Technical Support Analyst:Ability to use, analyse and develop computer programs
in the areas related to algorithms, System and application software,
multimediatechnologies, web design, networking, troubleshooting & maintenance for
efficient design of computer-based systems of varying complexity.
2. Software Developer:Ability to apply standard practices and strategies in software
project development using Free and open source software (FOSS) to deliver a quality
product for business application.
MAPPING OF MISSION AND PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES

(PEOs)
PEO Statement M1 M2 M3 Justification

PEO1 H H L (Mission 1) strongly support to achieve PEO1, as
objective is to provide the essential knowledge of
science and engineering concepts fundamental for a
computer professional and equip the proficiency of
mathematical foundations and algorithmic principles.
(Mission 2) strongly support PEO1 to develop skills
like resembling problem solving& logical reasoning
supports for overall development of graduates and to
strengthen their technical skills & interest.
(Mission 3) slightly support in achieving PEO1 as
social awareness.
Overall, a department mission reasonably supports
PEO1.
PEO2 H M M (Mission 1) strongly support to achieve PEO1, as
fulfilling needs of industries and society in various
domains.
Developing skillsresembling problem solving,
interpersonal skill, high order thinking skill and logical
reasoning (Mission 2) moderately supports helps to
make employable & entrepreneur.
(Mission 3) moderately supports in lifelong learning in
xv
system environment.
Overall, a department mission highly supports PEO2.
PEO3 M M H Mission 1 and 2 moderately support to achieve PEO3
with respect to communication skills, teamwork and
multidisciplinary approach.
Mission 3 highly support to achieve PEO3 w.r.t
professional and ethical attitude&lifelong learning.
Overall, a department mission highly supports PEO3.
MAPPING OF PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs) AND

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
Sr.No POS\PEOS PEO1 PEO2 PEO3

1 PO1 1 - -
2 PO2 3 2 2
3 PO3 3 2
4 PO4 3 3 -
5 PO5 3 2 2
6 PO6 2 1 -
7 PO7 2 1 3
8 PO8 3 2 -
9 PO9 - 3 3
10 PO10 3 2 3
xvi
MAPPING OF PROGRAMME OUTCOME AND COURSES
Sr. Lis of POs List of Couses

No.
1 PO1 1. Basic Mathematics
2. Engineering Mathematics
3. EEE
4. Fundamentals of Computer & Information
Technologies
5. Digital electronics
6. C programming
2 PO2 1. Static web Page Designing
2. Object oriented Programming Using C++
3. Software Engineering
4. Multimedia Techniques
5. Operating System
6. Java Programming
7. Software Development Tools
8. Elective-I
3 PO3 1. Java Programming
3. Elective-I
4. Advanced Java Programming
5. Software Testing
6. Object Oriented Technology using UML
7. Relational Database Management System
8. Advanced Microprocessor & Micro-Controllers
9. Computer Hardware and Maintenance with
Troubleshooting
xvii
10. Linux Programming
11. Computer Network
4 PO4 1. Java Programming
3. Elective-I
4. Advanced Java Programming
5. Software Testing
6. Object Oriented Technology using UML
7. Relational Database Management System
8. Advanced Microprocessor & Micro-Controllers
9. Computer Hardware and Maintenance with
Troubleshooting
11. Computer Network
5 PO5 1. Entrepreneurship Development
2. Environmental Science
3. Vocation Training
4. Project
6 PO6 1. Entrepreneurship Development
2. Environmental Science
3. Vocation Training
4. Project
7 PO7 1. IOM
2. ERP
3. Computer Security & Cyber Laws
8 PO8 1. Vocation Training
2. Project
3. EDP
4. ERP
9 PO9 1. Vocation Training
2. Project
3. EDP
4. ERP
5. Linux Prograaming
xviii
10 PO10 1. All Courses of level IV &V
2. Elective-II
3. Elective-III
5. Computer Network
xix
Curriculum: Computer Engineering
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE
SR COMPULSORY OPTIONAL
LEVELS CREDITS MARKING SCHEME
NO COURSES COURSES
COMPU OPTI COMPULSORY OPTIONAL
TOTAL TOTAL
LSORY ONAL COURSES COURSES
1 Foundation 04 Nil 18 -- 18 500 -- 500
2 Basic 11 Nil 54 -- 54 1300 -- 1300
3 Allied 07 02/15 25 04 29 625 -- 625
4 Applied 09 02/07 50 10 60 1300 275 1575
5 Diversified 07 01/03 28 05 33 775 150 925
TOTAL 38 05/25 175 19 194 4500 425 4925
Scheme at a glance:
Total number of courses offered : 63
Number of Compulsory courses : 38
Number of Optional courses : 05 out of 25
Total courses to be opted : 43
Total Marks : 4925
xx
LEVEL- I: (FOUNDATION LEVEL COURSES)
Sr COURS TEACHING SCHEME EXAMINATION SCHEME

COURSE TITLE
No E CODE TH TU PR CR TERM PT TH PR TW OR TOTAL
Basic Mathematics 01
01 6G101 03 04 I 20 80 -- -- -- 100
(BMT)
Engineering 01
02 6G102 03 04 II 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Mathematics (EMT)
Engineering Physics
03 6G103 03 02 05 I 20 80 @25 25 -- 150
(EPH)
Engineering
04 6G104 03 02 05 II 20 80 @25 25 -- 150
Chemistry (ECH)
80 320 50 50 --
TOTAL 12 02 04 18 400 100 -- 500
Note:
‘G’ Courses are common to all branches
‘P’ Courses are for Diploma in Computer Engineering
‘S’ Courses are common to Diploma in Computer Engineering & Information Technology
Scheme at a glance:
Number of compulsory courses : 04
Number of optional courses : Nil
Total Credits : 18
Total Marks : 500
xxi
LEVEL II: (BASIC TECHNOLOGY LEVEL COURSES)
Sr COURSE TEACHING SCHEME EXAMINATION SCHEME

COURSE TITLE
No CODE TH TU PR CR TERM PT TH PR TW OR TOTAL
01 6G202 Workshop Practice (WP) - - 03 03 II 50 50
Basics of Computer
02 6G203 - - 02 02 I -- -- @25 25 -- 50
System
Fundamentals of
03 6S201 Computer & Information 01 - 04 05 I -- -- @50 50 -- 100
Technology (FCIT)
Electronics & Electrical -
04 6S202 04 02 06 II 20 80 -- 25 @25 150
Engineering (EEE)
05 6S203 Digital Electronics (DE) 03 - 02 05 III 20 80 @25 25 -- 150
06 6S205 Static WPDL (SWPDL) - - 02 02 II -- -- @50 50 -- 100
07 6S204 C Programming (CP) 03 - 04 07 II 20 80 #25 25 -- 150
Multimedia Techniques -
08 6S206 01 04 05 III -- -- #50 50 -- 100
(MMT)
09 6S207 Data Structures (DS) 03 - 04 07 IV 20 80 @25 25 -- 150
Object Oriented -
10 6S208 Programming using C++ 03 04 07 III 20 80 #25 25 -- 150
(OOPS)
Computer Hardware &
11 6P201 Maintenance with 03 - 02 05 III 20 80 25 @25 150
Troubleshooting (CHMT)
48
120 275 375 50
0
TOTAL 21 00 33 54 600 700 1300
Note:
Scheme at a glance:
Number of optional courses : Nil
Total Credits : 54
Total Marks : 1300
xxii
LEVEL - III: (ALLIED LEVEL COURSES)
COURS TEACHING SCHEME EXAMINATION SCHEME

Sr
E COURSE TITLE TU TOT
No TH PR CR TERM PT TH PR TW OR
CODE AL
01 6G301 English (ENG) 02 - 02 04 I 20 80 -- 25 -- 125
02 Communication -
6G302 01 02 03 II -- -- -- 50 @25 75
Skills (CMS)
03 Development of - -- -- --
6G303 -- 02 02 I 25 @25 50
Life Skill(DLS)
04 Environmental -
6G304 -- 02 02 I -- -- -- 50 -- 50
Science (EVS)
05 Industrial -
Organization
6G305 03 02 05 V 20 ~80 -- 25 125
Management
(IOM)
06 Entrepreneurship -
6G306 Development 02 02 04 VI -- -- -- 50 50
(EDP)
07 Microprocessor & -
6P301 Programming 03 02 05 IV 20 80 25 @25 150
(MPP)
08 6G311
II &
To NON-EXAM -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- --
III
6G325
09 6G311
II &
To NON-EXAM -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- --
III
6G325
60 240 250 75
TOTAL 11 00 18 29 300 325 625
Note:
Scheme at a glance:
Number of optional courses : 02 out of 15
Total courses to be opted : 09 out of 22
Total Credits : 29
Total Marks : 625
xxiii
LEVEL-IV: (APPLIED LEVEL COURSES)
Sr COURSE EXAMINATION SCHEME

COURSE TITLE
Advanced microprocessors & V
01 6P401 04 02 06 20 80 -- 50 #25 175
Micro-controllers(AMM)
02 6P402 Mobile Computing(MOC) 03 02 05 V 20 80 @25 25 -- 150
03 6P403 Computer network (CN) 04 02 06 V 20 80 -- 25 #25 150
04 6P404 Linux Programming Lab(LP) 01 04 05 V -- -- #50 75 -- 125
Relational DB Management III
05 6S401 03 04 07 20 80 #25 25 -- 150
Systems (RDBMS)
Software Development
06 6S402 00 04 04 IV -- -- #50 75 -- 125
Tool(SDT)
07 6S403 JAVA Programming (JP) 03 04 07 IV 20 80 #25 25 -- 150
08 6S404 Operating Systems (OS) 04 02 06 IV 20 80 -- 25 @25 150
09 6S405 Software Engineering(SE) 03 01 -- 04 III 20 80 -- 25 -- 125
10 ELECTIVE –I (Any one from group I)
10.1 6S406 PHP programming(PHPP) 1 -- 04 05 IV -- -- #50 75 -- 125
10.2 6S407 Ruby programming (RP) 1 -- 04 05 IV -- -- #50 75 -- 125
10.3 Python IV #50 75 125
6S408 1 -- 04 05 -- -- --
Programming(PythonP)
10.4 6S409 Android Programming(AP) 1 -- 04 05 IV -- -- #50 75 -- 125
11 ELECTIVE –II (Any one from group II)
11.1 Information Storage Mgmt 03 02 V
6P405 05 20 80 25 @25 150
System(ISMS)
11.2 6P406/6T Data Warehousing & 03 02
05
V
20 80 25 @25 150
406 Mining(DWM)
11.3 6P407/6T Cloud Computing(CC) 03 02 V
05 20 80 25 @25 150
407
160 640 175 500 100
TOTAL 29 03 28 60 800 775 1575
Note:
Scheme at glance:
Total Credits : 60
Total Marks : 1575
xxiv
LEVEL-V: (DIVERSIFIED LEVEL COURSES)
Sr COURSE TEACHING SCHEME EXAMINATION SCHEME

COURSE TITLE
01 6S501 Seminar (SMR) -- 2 2 V -- -- -- 50 #25 75
02 6S502 Project Work (PW) -- 4 4 VI -- -- -- 100 #50 150
03 6S503 Implant Training (IT) -- -- 04 04 V -- -- -- 50 @50 100
05 Advanced JAVA
6S504 03 04 07 VI 20 80 #25 25 150
Programming(AJP)
06 6S505 Software Testing(ST) 03 02 05 VI 20 80 #25 25 150
07 6P501 Computer Security & 150
04 02 06 VI 20 80 @25 25
Cyber Laws(CSCL)
08 ELECTIVE –III (Any one from group III)
8.1 Advanced Database
6P502/
Management Systems 03 02 05 VI 20 80 -- 25 #25 150
6T502
(ADBMS)
8.2 Geographical
6P503/
Information 03 02 05 VI 20 80 -- 25 #25 150
6T503
System(GIS)
8.3 Object Technology &
6P504 03 02 05 VI 20 80 -- 25 #25 150
UML(OTU)
80 320 75 300 150
TOTAL 13 00 20 33 400 525 925
Note:
Scheme at glance:
Total Credits : 33
Total Marks : 925
xxv
Sample Path (After 10th Pass Students)
Year I Year II Year III
SEMESTER-1 SEMESTER-2 SEMESTER-3 SEMESTER-4 SEMESTER-5 SEMESTER-6
ODD EVEN ODD EVEN ODD EVEN
6G101 6G102 6P201 6S207 6G306
Basic Mathematics Engg Computer Data Structures 6P403 Entrepreneurship
(BMT) Mathematics Hardware and (DS) Computer Development (EDP)
(03+01+00) (EMT) Maintenance with (03+00+04) Networks (02+00+02)
(03+01+00) Troubleshooting (CN)
(CHMT) (04+00+02)
(03+00+02)
6G103 6G104 6S203 6P301 6G305 6P501
Engg Physics Engg Chemistry Digital Electronics Microprocessor Industrial Org Computer Security
(EPH) (ECH) (DE) & Programming Management & Cyber Laws
(03+00+02) (03+00+02) (03+00+02) (MPP) (IOM) (CSCL)
(03+00+02) (03+00+02) (04+00+02)
6S201 6G202 6S206 6S402 6P401 6S502
Fundamentals of Workshop Multimedia Software Advanced Project Work
Computer & Practice(WP) Techniques (MMT) Development Microprocessor & (PW)
Internet (00+00+03) (01+00+04) Tool Micro-Controllers (00+00+4)
Technology (FCIT) (SDT) (AMM)
(01+00+04) (00+00+04) (04+00+02)
6G203 6S202 6S208 6S403 6P402 6S504
Basics Computer Electronics & Object Oriented JAVA Mobile Computing Advanced JAVA
Systems Electrical Programming using Programming (MOC) Programming
(BCS) Engineering C++ (OOPS) (JP) (03+00+02) (AJP)
(00+00+02) (EEE) (03+00+04) (03+00+04) (03+00+04)
(04+00+02)
6G301 6S204 6S401 6S404 6P404 6S505
English C Programming Relational DBMS Operating Linux Programming Software Testing
(ENG) (CP) (RDBMS) Systems (OS) Lab (ST)
(02+00+02) (03+00+04) (03+00+04) (04+00+02) (LP L) (03+00+02)
(01+00+04)
6S405 Elective –I Elective –II
6G303 6S205 Software (01+00+04) (03+02+00) Elective –III
DLS() Static WPDL Engineering (SE) 6S406 6P407 (03+00+02)
(00+00+02) (SWPDL) (03+01+00) PHP with MY- Cloud 6P503
(00+00+02) SQL Computing(CC) Geographical
Information
6S407 System(GIS)
Ruby
6S408 6P405 6P502
Python Info. Storage Advanced Database
Management Management
System(ISMS) Systems(ADBMS)
6S409 6P406 6P504

Android Data Warehousing & Object Technology
Programming Mining(DWM) using UML(OTU)
6G304 6G302 Non exam credit
Environmental Communication course 6S501 6S503
Science Skills (00+00+02) (SMR) Implant Training
(EVS) (CMS) Seminar (IT)
(00+00+02) (01+00+02) (0+0+2) (00+00+04)
Non exam credit

course
(00+00++02)
Total Credits:190+4=194
24 32 35 34 34 35
xxvi
Following is the list of courses for the award of diploma programme in Computer
Engineering
Sr. Course Code Course Name Credit Marks

No.
1 6P403 Computer Network(CN) 06 150
2 6S404 Operating Systems (OS) 06 150
3 Advanced microprocessors & Micro- 06 175
6P401
controllers(AMM)
4 6P404 Linux Programming Lab 05 125
5 6S502 Project (PRJ) 04 150
6 6S501 Seminar (SMR) 02 75
7 6S406-409 Elective-I 05 125
8 6P405-407 Elective-II 05 150
9 Computer Security & Cyber 06 150
6P501
Laws(CSCL)
10 6S505 Software Testing (ST) 05 150
11 6S504 Advanced java Programming 05 150
12 6P502-504 Elective-III 05 150
Total 61 1700
xxvii
Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad.
(An autonomous Institute of Govt. of Maharashtra)
Programme Curriculum Strucutre (6th Revision : Outcome Based Education - 2017-18)
Name of Programme : DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING
First Semester Courses
Examination Scheme (Maximum
sr. semi course Teaching Scheme/Credits Marks)
course Name PA Theory
no. ster code
Total (T Exam 5th curr 4th curr 1,2,3 rd Compulsury
Theory Practical Tu Credit PT TH PR OR W) Total Hours equi equi equival /Optional
Basic Mathematics
I 6G101 3 0 1 4 20 80 -- -- -- 100 3 Compulsory
1 (BMT) 5G101 4G101 GE152
Engineering Physics
I 6G103 3 2 -- 5 20 80 25 25 -- 150 3 Compulsory
2 (EPH) 5G103 4G103 IT152
Basics of computer
I -- 2 -- 2 -- -- 25 25 -- 50 -- Compulsory
3 6G203 System 5G107 4G107 GE158
Environmental
I -- 2 -- 2 -- -- -- 50 -- 50 -- -- Compulsory
4 6G304 Science (EVS) 5G304 4G304
Fundamental
I Computer and 1 4 -- 5 -- -- 50 50 -- 100 -- Compulsory
Internet Technology
5 6S201 5S206 4T206 IT153
6 I 6G301 English (ENG) 2 2 -- 4 20 80 -- 25 -- 125 3 5G301 4G301 Compulsory
Development of
I -- 2 -- 2 -- -- -- 25 25 50 -- -- -- -- Compulsory
7 6G303 Life skills (DLS)
Legends : L-Lecture; T-Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice ; P- Practical; C- Credits; ESE- End Semester Examination; PT – Progressive
Test, PA- Progressive Assessment, PR- Practical Examination, OR – Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal examination ,
Programme Curriculum Strucutre (6th Revision : Outcome Based Education - 2017-18)
Name of Programme : DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING
Second Semester Courses
Teaching Scheme/Credits Examination Scheme (Maximum
sr. semi course Tut PA Theory
Course Name
no. ster code ori Total (T Exam 5th curr 4th curr 1,2,3 rd Compulsury
Theory Practical al Credit PT TH PR OR W) Total Hours equi equi equival /Optional
Engineering
1 II 6G102 Mathematics (EMT) 3 -- 1 4 20 80 -- -- -- 100 3 5G102 4G102 GE153 Compulsory
2 II 6G104 Engg. Chem 3 2 -- 5 20 80 25 25 -- 150 3 5G104 4G104 -- Compulsory
Static Web Page
II Designing Lab -- 2 -- 2 -- -- 50 50 -- 100 -- -- Compulsory
3 6S205 (SWPDL) 5S208 4T208
5T201
II C Programming 3 4 -- 7 20 80 *25 25 -- 150 3 & Compulsory
4 6S204 5T202 4T201 IT256
Elements of Electronic 5S203 4T203 IT151
II & Electrical 4 2 -- 6 20 80 -- 25 25 150 3 & & & Compulsory
5 6S202 Engineering (EEE) 5S204 4T204 IT253
Communication Skills
6 II 6G302 (CMS) 1 2 -- 3 -- -- -- 50 25 75 -- 5G302 4G302 GE151 Compulsory
7 II 6G202 Workshop Practice -- 3 -- 3 -- -- -- 50 50 -- 5G105 4G105 GE156 Compulsory
6G311 5G311 4G311
II on NON-EXAM -- 2 -- 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- on ON
8 words words words Optional
Legends : L-Lecture; T-Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice ; P- Practical; C- Credits; ESE- End Semester Examination; PT – Progressive
Test, PA- Progressive Assessment, PR- Practical Examination, OR – Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal examination ,
HOD/Chairman PBOS
Computer Engg.Dept
Govt. polytechnic Abad
DATE: 25/06/2018
Curriculum Strucutre of Third semester courses.
Name of Programme : Computer Engineering
Third Semester Courses
Teaching Scheme/Credits Examination Scheme (Maximum Marks)
Sr. Course Total Theory Practical
Semester Course Name Theory Practical Tutoria PA
No. code Credit PT TH PR OR Total Exam Exam
(TH) (PR) l (TU) (TW)
(C) Hours Hours
1 III 6S203 Digital Electronics 03 02 0 05 20 80 @25 -- 25 150 03 02
Multi Media Techniques
III 6S206 01 04 -- 05 -- -- #50 50 100 00 02
2 (MMT)
Object oriented
III 6S208 programming using C++ 03 04 0 07 20 80 #25 -- 25 150 03 02
3 (OOP)
Computer Hadrware
4 III 6P201 Maintenance and 03 02 0 05 20 80 @25 25 150 03 02
Troubleshooting (CHMT)
Relational Database
III 6S401 Management Systems 03 04 0 07 20 80 #25 -- 25 150 03 02
5 (RDBMS)
III 6S405 Software Engineering (SE) 03 -- 01 04 20 80 -- -- 25 100 03 00
6
6G311 - Non-Exam 00 02 00 02 -- -- -- -- -- -- NIL NIL
onwords
7 III
Legends : TH-Lecture; TU-Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice ; PR- Practical; C- Credits; ESE- End Semester Examination;
PT – Progressive Test, PA- Progressive Assessment, OR – Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal
HOD Computer Engg.

Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad.
DATE: 26/12/2018
Curriculum Strucutre of Fourth Semester Courses.
Fourth Semester Courses
Theory Practical Tutorial Total PT TH PR OR PA Total Theory Practical Remarks Comp/ Degree Equivalent course
sr. Course
Sem course Name (TH) (PR) (TU) Credit (TW) Exam Exam Opt Award to 5th Curriculum
no. code
(C) Hours Hours Course
Common
Data Structures Data Structures
1 IV 6S207 3 4 - 7 20 80 @25 - 25 150 3 2 for CO & Comp No
(DS) IT
(DS) 5S401
Microprocessor Microprocessor
IV 6P301 & Programming 3 2 - 5 20 80 - @25 25 150 3 2 - Comp No & Prog (MPP)
2 (MPP) 5S301
Software
Software
Common Development
IV 6S402 Development 0 4 - 4 -- -- #50 75 125 - 2 Comp No
for CO & Tool(SDT)
Tool(SDT)
3 IT 5S207
Common
JAVA JAVA Prog
4 IV 6S403 3 4 - 7 20 80 #25 25 150 3 2 for CO & Comp No
Programming (JP) (JP)5P406
IT
Common Operating
Operating
IV 6S404 4 2 - 6 20 80 -- @25 25 150 2 for CO & Comp Yes Systems (OS)
Systems (OS)
5 3 IT 5P407
Optional Courses (Any One from Group I)
Common
PHP prog Newly Added
IV 6S406 1 4 - 5 -- -- #50 - 75 125 - 2 for CO & Opt Yes
(PHPP) IT
Course
6
Common
Ruby prog Newly Added
IV 6S407 1 4 - 5 -- -- #50 - 75 125 - 2 for CO & Opt Yes
(RP) IT
Course
7
Common
Python Prog Newly Added
IV 6S408 1 4 - 5 -- -- #50 - 75 125 - 2 for CO & Opt Yes
(PythonP) IT
Course
8
Common
Android Prog Newly Added
IV 6S409 1 4 - 5 -- -- #50 - 75 125 - 2 for CO & Opt Yes
(AP) IT
Course
9
TOTAL 14 20 34 80 320 150 50 250 850
Legends : TH-Lecture; TU-Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice ; PR- Practical; C- Credits; ESE- End Semester Examination,Comp-compulsary,Opt-Optional;
PT – Progressive Test, PA- Progressive Assessment, OR – Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal
HOD ----------------------
DATE: 24/6/2019
Curriculum Strucutre of FIFTH Semester Courses.
Fifth Semester Courses
Theory Practical Tutorial Total PT TH PR OR PA Total Theory Practical Remarks Compulsury/ Degree Equivalent to 5th
Course
sr. no. semister course Name (TH) (PR) (TU) Credit (TW) Exam Exam Optional Award Curriculum
code
Industrial Common Industrial

1 V 6S305 Management 3 2 5 20 ~80 -- 25 125 3 2 for CO & Compulsory No Management
(INM) IT (INM) 5G305
Advanced Microprocessor
Microprocessor & &
V 6P401 4 2 6 20 80 #25 50 175 3 2 - Compulsory Yes
Micro-Controllers Programming
(AMM) (MPP) 5S301
2
(ES) 5P501
Mobile Computing
V 6P402 3 2 5 20 80 @25 25 150 3 2 Compulsory No (MOC)
(MOC)
3 5P414
Computer Computer
4 V 6P403 Networks 4 2 6 20 80 #25 25 150 3 2 Compulsory Yes Networks
(CN) (CN) 5S403
Linux operating
Linux Prog Lab
V 6P404 1 4 5 -- #50 75 125 2 Compulsory Yes System (LOS)
(LPL)
5 5P508
Seminar (SMR)
V 6S501 Seminar (SMR) -- 2 -- 2 -- -- #25 50 75 - 2 Common for Compulsory Yes
5S401
6 CO & IT
Optional Courses (Any One from Group II)
Info. Storage
Newly Added
V 6P405 Management 3 2 5 20 80 @25 25 150 3 2 Optional Yes
Course
7 System(ISMS)
6T406/6P Data Warehousing Newly Added
V 3 2 5 20 80 @25 25 150 3 2 Common for Optional Yes
406 & Mining(DWM) Course
8 CO & IT
6T407/6P Cloud Common for Newly Added
V 3 2 5 20 80 @25 25 150 3 2 Optional Yes
9 407 Computing(CC) CO & IT Course
TOTAL 18 14 2 34 100 400 75 100 225 900 15 18
Legends : TH-Lecture; TU-Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice ; PR- Practical; C- Credits; ESE- End Semester Examination;
PT – Progressive Test, PA- Progressive Assessment, OR – Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal, ~ Online Exam
HOD ---------------------- Engineering

DATE: 24/6/2019
Curriculum Strucutre of SIX Semester Courses.
Six Semester Courses
Theory Practical Tutorial Total PT TH PR OR PA Total Theory Practical Remarks Compulsury/ Degree Equivalent to 5th
Course
sr. no. semister course Name (TH) (PR) (TU) Credit (TW) Exam Exam Optional Award Curriculum
code
Entrepreneurshi
Entrepreneurship
Common p Development
1 V 6G306 Development 2 2 -- 4 -- -- -- 50 50 Compulsory No
for CO & (EDP)
(EDP)
IT 5G303
Computer Security
CS 5P502 &
V 6P501 & Cyber 4 2 -- 6 20 80 @25 25 150 - Compulsory Yes
PECSL 5P412
2 Laws(CSCL)
Project Work Common for Project Work
V 6S502 -- 4 -- 4 -- -- -- #50 100 150 Compulsory Yes
3 (PW) CO & IT (PW) 5S410
Advanced JAVA Newly Added
4 V 6S504 3 4 -- 7 20 80 #25 25 150 Common for Compulsory Yes
Programming(AJP) Course
CO & IT
Software
Software
V 6S505 3 2 -- 5 20 80 #25 25 150 Common for Compulsory Yes Testing(ST)
Testing(ST)
5 CO & IT 5P408
Implant Training Common for Seminar (SMR)
V 6S503 -- 4 -- 4 -- -- -- @50 50 100 Compulsory No
6 (IT) CO & IT 5S401
Optional Courses (Any One from Group III)
Advanced
Advanced
Database
Database
6P502/ Management
V Management 3 2 -- 5 20 80 -- #25 25 150 Optional Yes
6T502 Systems
Systems
(ADBMS)
(ADBMS)
7 5P416
Geographical
6P503/ Newly Added
V Information 3 2 -- 5 20 80 -- #25 25 150 Optional Yes
6T503 Course
8 System(GIS)
Object
Newly Added
V 6P504 Technology & 3 2 -- 5 20 80 -- #25 25 150 Optional Yes
Course
9 UML(OTU)
15 20 35 80 320 75 125 300 900
TOTALTU-Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice ; PR- Practical; C- Credits; ESE- End Semester Examination;
Legends : TH-Lecture;
PT – Progressive Test, PA- Progressive Assessment, OR – Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal, ~ Online Exam
HOD ---------------------- Engineering

6G101 GPA BASIC MATHEMATICS
COURSE TITLE BASIC MATHEMATICS
COURSE CODE 6G101
Diploma Programme in which this course is

Semester in which offered
offered
CE/ME/EE/ET/IT/CO/AE First Semester
1 RATIONALE
This course is classified under foundation level courses and intends to teach students
basic facts, concepts and principles of mathematics, as a tool to analise engineering
problems. Diploma engineers have to solve the problems in engineering.
Basic mathematics is an attempt to initiate the multi-dimensional logical thinking and
reasoning capabilities of the students.
2 COMPETENCY
At the end of studying this course students will be able to
“Solve engineering problems by using analytical and systematic approach.”
3 COURSE OUTCOMES
Students will be able to apply rules of Logarithms in solving simple engineering
Problems
1. Solve simultaneous equations using concepts of Determinants and Matrices

2. Solve simple engineering problems using concepts of Partial Fractions
3. Solve simple engineering problems by applying formulae of trigonometry.
4. Solve simple engineering problem of function using the different definition of
Function
5. Solve simple engineering problem of function using the rules of Limits.
4 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME

Teaching Total Examination Scheme
Scheme Credits Theory Marks Practical Marks Total
(In Hours) (L+T+P) Marks
L T P C ESE PT ESE PA
03 01 -- 04 80 20 -- -- 100
Exam Duration 03 Hrs. 01 Hr.
Legends: L-Lecture; T – Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice(batch-wise);

P - Practical; C – Credit, ESE - End Semester Examination; PT - Progressive Test;
OR-Oral examination
1
5 COURSE DETAILS:-
Unit Major Learning Outcomes Topics and Sub-topics

(in cognitive domain)
Unit I 1a.To recall/know the 1.1 Logarithms

Revision basic concept of 1.2 Definition natural and common
Logarithms and logarithms.
Determinant of order 1.3 Laws of logarithm .
2and3 1.4 Definition of Determinant, Order
of Determinant.
1.5 Expansion of Determinant of
order 2 and 3.
1.6 Properties of Determinant.
Unit II 2a.Students will be able to 2.1 Cramer’s Rule.
Solve simultaneous (solution of simultaneous
Determinant
equations using concepts equations in two and three
And of Determinants and unknowns)
Matrices 2.1 Definition of matrix: Type of
Matrices
matrix: viz.- null, row, column,
Square, diagonal, scalar, unit,
Triangular.
2.2 Algebra of matrices –addition,
subtraction and multiplication .
2.3 Transpose of a matrix.
2.4 adjoint of a matrix Relation.
2.5 Inverse of matrix by adjoint
method.
2.6 Solution of simultaneous
equations in two and three
Unknowns using Inverse of
matrix method .
Unit III 3a.Students will be able to 3.1 Definition of Partial fraction,
solve simple problems proper and improper fractions,
Partial
Using concepts of Partial rational fractions.
Fractions
Fractions 3.2 To resolve given rational fraction
into partial fractions.
3.3 Denominator containing non
repeated linear factors.
3.4 Denominator containing repeated
linear factors.
3.5 Denominator containing
irreducible non-repeated
quadratic factors.
2
3.6 Different types of examples.

Unit IV 4a.Students will be able to 4.1 Trigonometric ratios of allied,
Trigonometry Solve simple problems by compound and multiple
applying using concepts of angles.
trigonometry. 4.2 Trigonometric Ratios of allied
angles.
4.3 Trigonometric Ratios of
compound angles.
4.4 Trigonometric Ratios of multiple
angle Product, sum and
difference formulae.
4.5 Sub-multiple angles.
4.6 Definition of inverse
trigonometric, ratios.
4.7 Principal value of inverse
trigonometric ratios. Relation
between inverse trigonometric
ratios.
4.8 Examples on inverse circular
functions.
Unit V 5a.Students will be able to 5.1 Cartesian products of sets.
Function Solve the problem of 5.2 Definition of relation,
definition of function, real value.
function using the concept
Function, domain, co-domain of a
of Function
function.
5.3 Types of Functions.
5.4 Value of the function at given
point .
5.5 Composite function.
5.6 Different types of examples on
functions .
Unit VI 6a. Students will be able to 6.1Definition and concept of limit,
Solve the problem of limits of algebraic functions.
Limits
function using the concept 6.2 Limits of trigonometric
of Limit functions.
6.3 Limits of exponential functions.
6.4 Limits of logarithmic functions.
3
6. SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH HOURS AND MARKS

(THEORY)
Unit Unit Title Teaching Distribution of Theory Marks

No. Hours
R U A Total
Level Level Level Marks
1 Revision 02 0 0 0 0
2 Determinants and 12 04 08 12 24
Matrices
3 Partial Fractions 06 04 04 08
4 Trigonometry 14 04 08 12 24
5 Function 04 02 02 04 08
6 Limits 10 04 04 08 16
TOTAL 48 14 26 40 80
Legends: R = Remembrance; U = Understanding; A = Application and above levels
(Revised Bloom’s taxonomy)
Note: This specification table shall be treated as a general guideline for students and
teachers. The actual distribution of marks in the question paper may vary
slightly from above table.
7 SUGGESTED EXERCISES/PRACTICAL/TUTORIAL
1) The tutorial/practical/exercises should be properly designed and implemented

with an attempt to develop different types of cognitive and practical skills so
that students are able to acquire the competencies.
2) Form a batch of 20 students and at least 10 problems should be given to get

necessary exercise.
Sr. Title/Topic Exercises/Tutorial Approx.

No. hours
1 Determinants and Solving problems on cramer’s rule 02

Matrices Examples on Matrix
02
Addition/Subtraction and Product Co-
factors, Ad joint and Inverse of Matrix
Solution of Simultaneous Equation using
02
3X3 Matrix and its Applications
4
2 Partial Fractions Examples related Definition and cases 02
3 Trigonometry Practice Examples: Allied & Compound

Angles. Examples related inverse
04
trigonometric ratios
4 Function Examples related Definition and Rules. 02
5 Limits Examples related to different types of 02

function.
8. SUGGESTED STUDENT ACTIVITIES
--------N.A.-----
9. SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (if any)
1 Chalk-board method.
2 Projector method.
3 Tutorial method.
10. SUGGESTED LEARNING RESOURCES
Sr. Title of Book Author Publication

No.
1 Mathematics for polytechnic S.P.Deshpande Pune vidhyarti

students for first year gruh prakshan
Pune
2 Mathematics for polytechnic G.V.Kumbhojkar Phadke

students for first year prakashan
Kholapur
3 Mathematics for polytechnics TTTI Bhopal TTTI Bhopal
11 Major Equipment/ Instrument with Broad Specifications
Sr.NO. Name of the Equipment Specification

NA
12. Software/Learning Websites

-----
5
POs and PSOs assignment and its strength of assignment with each CO of the Course
CO. Course Outcome
PO10
PS01
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
PSO2
PSO3
NO.
To able the basic concept of 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - -
CO1 Logarithms and Determinant of
order 2 and 3
Students will be able to Solve 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 simultaneous equations using
concepts of Determinants and
Matrices
Students will be able to solve 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
CO3 simple problems Using concepts
of Partial Fractions
Students will be able to Solve 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - -
CO4 simple problems by applying using
concepts of trigonometry.
Students will be able to Solve the 1 1 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 problem of function using the
concept of Function
Students will be able to Solve the 1 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO6 problem of function using the
concept of Limits
13. COURSE CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT COMMITTEE
Sr. Name of the Designation and Institute

faculty member
No
1 Mr. M.A. Ali Lecturer in Mathematics, Government Polytechnic Aurangabad
2 Mr. R.B. Borulkar Lecturer in Mathematics, Government Polytechnic Aurangabad
3 Mrs. H.H. Bhumkar Lecturer in Mathematics, Government Polytechnic Aurangabad
Member Secretary PBOS Chairman PBOS Co-coordinator

science and Humanities
6
6G103 GPA ENGINEERING PHYSICS
COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING PHYSICS

COURSE CODE 6G103
Diploma Programmes in which this course is offered Semester in which offered

ME/CE/ET/EE/CO/IT/AE
First/Second Semester
1. RATIONALE
Engineering Physics represents foundation level of courses. It is considered as the mother
of all engineering programmes. The principles, laws, hypothesis, concepts, ideas which are
acquired by students through this course help in reinforcing the knowledge of technology and
solving engineering problems.
2. COMPETENCIES
The course content should be taught and implemented with the aim to develop different types
of skills leading to the achievement of the following competencies…
I. Apply facts, concepts and principles of Physics for solving various Engineering
Problems
II. Observe, describe, interpret and interact with physical and engineering world through
concepts and principles of physics.
3. TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME

Teaching Scheme Total Examination Scheme
Theory
(In Hours) Credits Marks Practical Marks Total
(L+T+P) Marks
150
3 0 2 5 80~ 20~ 25@ 25
Exam Duration 2 Hrs. 1 Hr. 2 Hrs.

Legends: L-Lecture; T – Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice; P - Practical;
C – credit; ESE - End Semester Examination; PA - Progressive Assessment;
PT- Progressive Test; ~ - Multiple choice Online Examination
@ Internal Examination
4. COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will able to
1. Determine relevant physical properties of a given material.
2. Analyze thermal, optical and acoustical system using properties of heat, light and
sound.
7
3. Apply fundamentals electrical laws.

4. Select different type of semiconductors, x-ray and optical fibre application.
5. COURSE DETAILS:-
Unit Major Learning Topics and Sub-topics
Outcomes
UNIT-I Genral 1a. Measure Strength Elasticity:
Propertis of parameter. 1.1 Definitions of deforming force, restoring force,
Matter 1b. Measure elasticity, plasticity, Factors affecting elasticity.·
automization and 1.2 Stress Tensile, Compressive, Volumetric and
lubricity of given Shear stress, Strain: Tensile, Volumetric and
liquid. Shear strain.
1.3 Elastic limit, Hooke’s law.
Elastic co-efficient- Young’s modulus, bulk
modulus, modulus of rigidity and relation
between them
Viscosity
1.4 Viscous force, definition of viscosity, velocity
gradient, Newton’s law of viscosity, coefficient
of viscosity and its SI unit.
1.5 Streamline and turbulent flow with examples,
critical velocity, Reynold’s number and its
significance.
Surface tension
1.6 Cohesive and adhesive force, Laplace’s
molecular theory of surface tension, Surface
Tension: definition and unit,
1.7 effect of temperature and impurity on surface
tension. Angle of contact, Capillarity and
examples of capillary action
1.8 derivation of expression for surface tension by
capillary rise method, applications of surface
tension.
8
UNIT-II 2a. Analyze thermal Heat :

Heat Light And system. 2.1 Three modes of transistor of heat ,
Sound 2b. Analyze optical conduction convection Radiation , law of
system. thermal conductivity
2c. Analyze acoustic 2.2 Coefficient of thermal conductivity , ,
system. expansion of solid and coefficient of linear ,
aerial and cubical expansion & relation
between them
LIGHT :
2.3 Introduction to reflection and refraction of
light, Snell’s Law,
2.4 Dispersion. Total internal reflection of light.
Critical angle, Simple problems.
Properties of sound :
2.5 Wave motion transverse & longitudinal
wave
2.6 Free & forced vibration , Resonance formula
calculate velocity of sound by resonance tube
method
UNIT-III 3a.Analyze electrical 3.1 Electric charge, Coulomb’s Law of Charges, Unit
Electrostatics system. charge, field, intensity of electric field, electric lines
And Current of forces (Properties) Electric Flux, Flux Density.
Electricity 3.2 Concept of resistance, Specific resistance,
Whetstone’s network, meter bridge, balancing
condition of meter bridge, measurement of unknown
resistance using meter bridge. Problems.
3.3 Potential , Potential drop along the length of
wire, Principle of Potentiometer, Potential gradient,
E.M.F. Unit, Comparison of EMF using
potentiometer
9
UNIT-IV 4a. Use modern Semiconductor –

Modern Physics materials 4.1 Classification of solids on the basis of band
4b. Use X-ray theory: forbidden energy gap, conductor,
insulator semiconductor
4.2 intrinsic, extrinsic, semiconductor doping , P
and n type semiconductor electrical
conduction through p and n semiconductor
.P-N junction diode semiconductor metal and
insulator.
4.3 Optical fibre: principle, structure of optical
fibre, propagation of light wave through
optical fibre, derivation of numerical aperture
and acceptance angle
X-rays:
4.4 Origin of X-rays, production of X-rays using
Coolidge’s X-ray tube
4.5. Minimum wavelength of X-ray derivation,
properties of X-rays, applications of
X- rays: engineering, medical and scientific
6. SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH HOURS & MARKS (THEORY)

Distribution of Theory
Teaching Marks
Unit
Unit Title Hours R U A Total
No.
Level Level Level
1 GENERAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER 12 6 7 7 20
2 HEAT LIGHT AND SOUND 12 6 7 7 20
3 ELECTRICITY 12 6 7 7 20
4 MODERN PHYSICS 12 6 7 7 20
TOTAL 48 24 28 28 80
Legends:
R = Remembrance; U = Understanding; A = Application and above levels (Revised Bloom’s
taxonomy)
7. SUGGESTED LIST OF EXERCISES/PRACTICAL/EXPERIMENTS

The exercises/practical/experiments should be properly designed and implemented with an
attempt to develop different types of skills leading to the achievement of the competency.
Following is the list of exercises/practical/experiments for guidance.
Appro
Sr. Unit
Experiment /Practical Exercises ximate
No. No.
Hours
Know your Physics Laboratory and use of scientific calculator &
1 1 2
interpretation of graph.
2 2 Measure the dimensions of given objects using vernier caliper. 2
10
. Determine Young’s modulus of elasticity of metal wire by using

3 3 2
Searle’s apparatus
Measurement of unknown temperature using platinum resistance
4 4 2
thermometer.
5 5 To determine critical angle using glass block 2
. Determine coefficient of viscosity of given liquid using Stoke’s
6 6 2
Method
7 7 To determine specific resistance of given wire using Ohm’s Law 2
8 8 To verify the Law of Resistance in series by Meter bridge. 2
9 9 To study the forward characteristics of P-N junction diode 2
To understand the concept of resonance and determine the velocity
10 10 2
of sound in air.
11 11 Comparison of EMF of two cells using Potentiometer 2
Micro Project ( Any one of following will be opted by a group of 5-6 students)
1 Survey of different diodes, resistances and capacitance
2 Prepare current and voltage rating of home appliances
3 To make the telescope using lenses
4 Analyse the different toys and watch on the basis of property of Elasticity
5 Analyse the different liquidator on the basis of property of surface tension
To collect the information from internet regarding distribution of sound at
6 Gowalkonda fort
To collect the information from internet regarding distribution of sound at
7
Golghumut at Vaijapur
8. SUGGESTED LIST OF PROPOSED STUDENT ACTIVITIES
Following is the list of proposed student activities

a. Calculate acoustics of given class room.
b. Prepare a chart of applications of optical fibre in different fields.
c. Demonstrate different types of capacitors.
d. Seminar by student on any relevant topic.
9. SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES
a. Search various sites to teach various topics/sub topics.

b. Instead of the traditional lecture method, use different types of teaching methods such
as improved lecture method, question answer method, laboratory method to attained
specific outcome.
c. Some topics are relatively simpler in nature is to be given to the students for self-
learning by seminar or by classroom presentations
d. Teachers provide theme to create multiple choice questions.
e. Provide super visionary assistance for completion of micro-projects.
11
10. Hours distribution for Physics Experiments :
Sr.
Description Hours
No.
An introduction to Physics laboratory and its experiments (for the set of 02
1
first four experiments)
2 Set of first four experiments 08
3 An introduction to experiments (for the set of next four experiments) 02
4 Set of next four experiments 08
5 An introduction to experiments (for the set of next three experiments) 02
6 Set of next three experiments 06
11. SUGGESTED LEARNING RESOURCES LIST OF BOOKS
Sr Title of Books Author Publication

No.
1 Basic Science Physics Pawar and Sutar Nirali Publication
2 Applied Physics B.G. Bhandarkar Vrunda Publication
3 Engineering Physics R.K. Gupta and S.L Gupta Dhanpat Rai Publication
4 Applied Physics Pawar, Umrani and Joshi Nirali Publication
5 Basic Physics B.G. Bhandarkar, S.N. Vrunda Publication
Jumde
6 Physics Text Book Part -1 NCERT NCERT; 2014 edition
for Class - 12 ISBN-13: 978-
8174506313
7 Physics Text Book Part -2 NCERT NCERT; 2014 edition
for Class - 12 ISBN-13: 978-
8174506719
8 A text book of applied S Chand Publication
physics
12. List of Major Equipment/ Instrument

1. Platinum resistance thermometer
2. Thermocouple
3. Meter bridge
4. Potentiometer
13. E-learning resources
1. www.physicsclassroom.com for unit II and unit III
2. www.fearofphysics.com for unit III
3. www.sciencejoywagon.com/physicszone for unit III and IV
4. www.science.howstuffworks.com
5. https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulations/category/physics for unit I, II, III and IV
12
POs and PSOs assignment and its strength of assignment with each CO of the
Course
CO. Course Outcome
PO10
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
NO.
Student will able to calculate young’s 3 3 3 2 - 1 - - - 2 - - -

CO1 modulus ,surface tension and
viscosity of different material
Student will able to demonstrate 3 3 2 2 - 2 - - - 1 - - -
CO2 different properties of heat ,light and
sound
Student will able to demonstrate 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - - 1 - - -
CO3 different laws of electric field, charge
resistance and capacitance
Student will able to demonstrate 3 3 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - -
CO4 different type of semiconductors, x-
ray and optical fiber knowledge and
application
14. Name and Designation of Course Designer

No faculty member
1 Mr. V.S Deshmukh Lecturer in Physics, Government Polytechnic Aurangabad
2 Mrs. S.B.Kale Lecturer in Physics, Government Polytechnic Aurangabad
3 Mrs. Z.F.Siddiqui Lecturer in Physics, Government Polytechnic Aurangabad

13
6G203 GPA BASICS OF COMPUTER SYSTEM
COURSE TITLE- BASICS OF COMPUTER SYSTEM

COURSE CODE 6G203
PROGRAMME & SEMESTER

Diploma Programme in which this course is offered Semester in which offered
Common to all branches
FIRST SEMESTER
(CE/ME/EE/ET/CO/IT/AE/DDGM)
1. RATIONALE
This course pertains to basic technology level. It aims to developing fundamentals of Computer and its
Applications in students of various programs. This will enable students in using application software’s
such as word processor, spreadsheets, and power point presentations in their professional fields. Further it
will enable students to be lifelong learner.
2. COMPETENCY
“Use of computer and software application proficiently”.
3. TEACHING AND EXAMNATION SCHEME
Total Examination Scheme (Marks)

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
(L+T+P) Theory Practical Total
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR) (TW)
50
- - 2 2 -- -- 25@ 25
Duration of the Examination (Hrs) -- -- -- --
Legends : L-Lecture; T-Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice ; P- Practical; C- Credits;

ESE- End Semester Examination; PT – Progressive Test, PA- Progressive Assessment, OR
– Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Connect and operationalize computer system with its peripheral devices.

2. Create and Format documents in Microsoft Word.
3. Create spreadsheets in Microsoft Excel by using formulae.
21
4. Create and edit basic power point presentations in Microsoft PowerPoint.

5. Use internet for creating email-id, receive and send email with attachment &
search information on internet.
5. DETAILED COURSE CONTENTS
Unit Major Learning Outcomes Topics And Sub-Topics

(Cognitive Domain Only)
Unit- 1 1a.Describe computer hardware 1.1 Concept of Hardware and Software
Basics of and software 1.2 Computer block diagram and its
Computer 1b.Identify & use of I/O devices component like CPU, Control Unit,
System 1c. Describe functioning of CU Arithmetic logic Unit (ALU) & Memory
ALU and memory unit Unit
1d Differentiate various types of 1.3 Input Output Devices: Keyboard,
printers Mouse, Scanner, Monitor, Printers: Dot
1e. Explain use of OS matrix, Laser, Inkjet, Plotters.
1f. Demonstrate various file 1.4 System software and Application
handling operations Software
1.5 Operating system concepts, purpose and
functions
1.6 Operations of Windows OS.
1.7 Creating and naming of file and folders
1.8 Copying file, renaming and deleting of
files and folders,
1.9 Searching files and folders, installation
application, creating shortcut of application
on the desktop
1.10 Overview of control Panel, Taskbar.
Unit-2 2a. Create, edit and save word 2.1 Overview of Word processor
Word document using basic text 2.2 Basics of Font type, size, colour
Processor formatting features, page setup 2.3 Effects like Bold, italic , underline,
options & print options. Subscript and superscript,
2b.Apply spell check & 2.4 Case changing options,
grammatical check in the 2.5 Inserting, deleting, undo and redo, Copy
created document. and Moving (cutting) text within a
2c. Insert graphics/clipart/ smart document,
art/shapes/charts in the 2.6 Formatting Paragraphs and Lists
document. 2.7 Setting line spacing; single, multiple
2d. Create tables, insert, delete 2.8 Page settings and margins including
rows and columns and apply header and footer
different table properties. 2.9 Spelling and Grammatical checks
2.10 Table and its options, Inserting rows or
columns, merging and splitting cells.
2.11 Insert Picture, Clipart, shapes, smart art
& charts.
22
2.12 Working with pictures, Inserting

Pictures from Files, Wrapping it with image.
2.13 Finding & replacing text.
2.14 Using Drawings and WordArt; Lines
and Shapes, Modifying Drawn Objects.
2.15 Printing: print preview, select printer &
appropriate print options.
Unit- 3 3a. Create, open, save and print 3.1 Introduction to Excel,
Excel worksheet with page setup and 3.2 Introduction to data, Cell address, Excel
(Spreadsheets) print options. Data Types, Concept of hyperlink
3b. Enter data and insert, delete 3.3 Introduction to formatting number, text
and format cells, rows and and date.
columns. 3.4 Concept of worksheet and workbook.
Use formula and functions 3.5 Understanding formulas, Operators in
3c. Insert formulas, functions Excel, Operators Precedence, Understanding
and named ranges in worksheet. Functions, Common Excel Functions such
3d. Create chart of different as sum, average, min, max, date, sqrt,
types. power, upper, lower, count, countif,
roundup, sin, cos.
3.6 Introduction to charts, overview of
different types of charts available with
Excel.
3.7 Hide, unhide rows and columns.
3.8 Concept of print area, margins, header,
footer and other page setup options.
Unit- 4 4a. Create a simple text slide 4.1 Outline of an effective presentations
Power Point using formatting, selecting a 4.2 Starting a New Presentation Files,
Presentation slide layout and insert pictures Saving work,
& backgrounds. 4.3 Creating new Slides, Working with
4b.Use different design textboxes.
templates for creating slides. 4.4 Changing a slides Layout, Applying a
4c. Apply slide transitions and theme, Changing Colours, fonts and effects,
slide timings and animation Creating and managing custom Colour &
effect for slide show. font theme, Changing the background.
4d. Insert hyperlink in the 4.5 Use of design template and auto content
created slides. wizard.
4.6 Apply animation and transition to slides
with timing effect.
4.7 Slideshow: from beginning slideshow,
from current slideshow, custom slideshow.
4.8 Creating hyperlinks, Using action
buttons
Unit- 5 5a. Know different terms related 5.1 What is the Internet?
Introduction to internet and browsers. 5.2 Web pages, Home Pages.
to 5b. Understand need & duty of 5.3 Use of web sites
Internet ISP & List out different ISP in 5.4 ISP: need & duties of ISP, different ISP
23
city. in city
5c. Use internet for searching 5.5 Browsers
information and create, receive 5.6 Universal resource locators (URL)
& send email with attachment. 5.7 Browsing or surfing the web
5.8 Search engines
5.9 E-mail and Creation of E-mail ID.
Sending & Receiving email with attachment.
5.10 Chatting & Video Conferencing tools:
Skype and GTalk
5.11 Applications of the Internet
6. SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE FOR QUESTION PAPER DESIGN
Distribution Of Theory Marks
Unit Practical
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
1 Basics of Computer System 08 NA

2 Word Processing 08 NA
3 Spreadsheet 06 NA
4 Presentation 06 NA
5 Introduction to Internet 04 NA
6 NA
Legends: R – Remember, U – Understand, A – Apply and above (Bloom’s revised Taxonomy)
7. LIST OF PRACTICAL / LABORATORY EXPERIENCES/ TUTORIALS
Sr.
Unit Title Practical/ Lab. Work/ Assignments/ Tutorials Hours
No.
Connect the peripherals to a computer system. Get the 2
1 1 information about the manufacturers and prices of various
components of a PC and laptop.
Start and shutdown of windows, starting different 4
2 1
applications. Use of accessories like calculator, paint, notepad
24
& WordPad, Use of system tools like Disk Cleaner, Disk

defragmenter, System Information, System Restore & Control
panel.
Perform file management operations such as copying, 2
deleting, renaming, creating folders, renaming folders using
3 1
My computer, Windows Explorer, searching files and folders.
Change windows format such as wall paper, date &time, 2

4 1 installing printer, installing and removing programs by using
add/remove programs.
Prepare a sample doc files such as resume, application, time 6
5 2
table etc. using all word processor tools from menu bar.
Prepare sample spreadsheets such as sample result sheet, 6
6 3 salary sheet of employees using all MS-Excel tools from
menu bar. (applying excel formulae/functions)
Prepare sample power point presentation by applying MS- 6
7 4 Power Point tools such as design template, background,
transition and animation effect to slides.
Search information on internet .Use Internet to create email 2
account, send email with attachment, receive email and
8 5
management of email account.
Use of E-commerce sites, Mobile apps for various online 2

9 5
transactions.
32
8. SUGGESTED STUDENTS ACTIVITIES
Following is the list of proposed student activities like: assignments based on MS-Office, teacher
guided self-learning activities and lab based mini-projects on MS-Word, MS-Excel and MS-
PowerPoint. These could be individual or group-based.
a. Visit institute website.
b. Manage files and folder using Windows.
c. Prepare letter and project report using word processor
d. Create result sheet by inserting student marks and show it in chart form on the
same worksheet using Excel spreadsheet.
e. Develop effective presentation of project report using PowerPoint Presentation.
f. Use open source software like openoffice.org (latest version).
9. SUGGESTED SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL STRATERGIES
25
These are sample strategies, which a teacher can use to facilitate the attainment of course
outcomes.
a. Group based.
b. Q & A technique.
c. Individual based.
d. Activity based learning
e. Self Line learning.
10. SUGGESTED LEARNING RESOURCE
S.No. Name of Book Author Publication

1. Fundamentals of computers P.K.Sinha BPB Publication
2. Computer course R.Taxali TMGH Publication
3. MS-Office for Dummies Wallace Wang Wiley India, New
Delhi
4. Basic Computer Engineering Dr. Shailendra Singh, Satya Prakashan,
Pawan Thakur, Anurag New Delhi, India.
Jain
5. Microsoft Office Ron Mansfield BPB Publication
6. Fundamentals of computers P.K.Sinha BPB Publication
11. LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENTS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED :
S.
Name of equipment Brief specification
No.
Computer System with latest Desktop Computer/Personal Computer
configuration along with Windows (Windows OS Prof. Edition/Academic
1.
Operating System and latest MS-Office. edition) with preloaded operating systems
windows 7/windows 8 (academic Lic)
PROJECTOR Multimedia Projector with wireless
2.
connectivity between PC and Projector
3. PRINTER HP 1022n laser printer
SCANNER HP scanner ,Color Scan Method: Color,
Flatbed, Mirror Moving Scanner Optical
4. Resolution: 800 x 1600 dpi Maximum
Scanning Area 304.8 x 431.8 mm ( 12x17
inch)
Computer System with latest Desktop Computer/Personal Computer
configuration along with Windows (Windows OS Prof. Edition/Academic
5.
Operating System and latest MS-Office. edition) with preloaded operating systems
windows 7/windows 8 (academic Lic)
PROJECTOR Multimedia Projector with wireless
6.
connectivity between PC and Projector
26
12. LEARNING WEBSITE & SOFTWARE

(Please mention complete URL of the E- resource CO wise)
a. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cXBVMyKQ3ZY
b. http://www.gcflearnfree.org/computerbasics/
c. http://www.homeandlearn.co.uk/word2007_2010/Word-2007-2010.html
d. http://www.homeandlearn.co.uk/excel2007/Excel2007.html
e. https://support.office.com/
13. MAPPING OF PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs) AND PROGRAMME SPECIFIC
OUTCOMES (PSOs) WITH COURSE OUTCOMES (COs)
SNo Course Outcome POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Connect and
operationalize
2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 - -
computer system with
its peripheral devices.
2 Create and Format
documents in 3 - 3 3 - - - - - 3 - -
Microsoft Word.
3 Create spreadsheets in
Microsoft Excel by 3 - 3 3 - - - - - 3 - -
using formulae.
4 Create and edit basic
power point
3 - 3 3 - - - - - 3 - -
presentations in
Microsoft PowerPoint.
5 Use internet for
creating email-id,
receive and send email
1 1 1 1 - - - - - 1 - -
with attachment &
search information on
internet.
Course Curriculum Design Committee

Sr Name of the Designation and Institute
No faculty members
1 R.T.Aghao Sr.Lecturer in APM Dept. , Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
2 O.R.Varma Lecturer in IT Dept., Govt. Polytechnic,Aurangabad
(Member Secretary PBOS) (Chairman PBOS)
27
6S201 GPA FUNDA. OF COMPUTER & INTERNET TECHN.
COURSE TITLE- FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER & INTERNET

TECHNOLOGY
COURSE CODE 6S201

offered
Computer Engg and Information Technology First
1. RATIONALE
This is a basic technology level course. Computers are very useful in day to day life. This Course intends
to develop basic hardware skills of computer system and internet in students, being laboratory course.
2. COMPETENCY
“Configure Computing device and peripherals on network.”

“Use Internet for its application.”

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE @ PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR) (TW)
- 4 05 -- -- @50 50 100
1
Duration of the Examination (Hrs) -- -- 2 --

ESE- End Semester Examination; PT – Progressive Test, PA- Progressive Assessment, PR-
Practical Examination, OR – Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of studying this course students will be able to: -
1. Select computer system as per requirements.
14
2. Select the application softwares and operating systems as per requirements.

3. Select the network topologies.
4. Change the network protocols as per requirements.
5. Use Information technology

UNIT I 1a. Identify various parts and 1.1 Anatomy of computers:
Anatomy of devices of computer system. 1.2 Motherboard, CPU,SMPS,
Computer Expansion slots, Drives, Storage
System devices. Input devices: Keyboard,
Mouse, Pen, Touch
1.3 Screen, Scanners Output devices:
Monitors, LCD, LED,
1.4 Printers, tablets. Memory: RAM,
ROM, Cache, Auxiliary Memory,
HDD, CD, DVD, Blue ray and USB
Drives
1.5 IT Infrastructure Components:
Computer Hardware, Operating
System, Software,
1.6 Network components
2a. Select appropriate operating 2.1 Types of software: Overview of
UNIT II system and software. System software and application
Types of software, Operating system, Utility
Software software, drivers, compilers and
interpreters.
2.2 Operating system: Windows :Desktop,
2.3 Control Panel, Driver installation,
2.4 create users, rename computer,
manipulate
2.5 taskbar, power management,
screensaver,
2.6 Install new peripheral
UNIT III 3a. Identify suitable network with 3.1 Network advantages like resource
Basics of various devices. sharing, file sharing, common Storage.
Computer 3.2 LAN, MAN, WAN, Internet,
Networking 3.3 Networking infrastructure: Repeater,
Bridge,
3.4 Hub, Switch, Router, Firewall,
Gateway, NIC, Cables, MODEM
15
UNIT IV 4a. select appropriate web 4.1 Internet basics: Dial up

connections and browsers. Connection, DSL, Leased line
Basics of connectivity, Wi-Fi Connection,
Internet, Its 4.2 Browsers: IE, Firefox, Chrome.
Applications & 4.3 Protocols : http, https, www, IP,
Security setting up
4.4 Internet connection on DSL, setting
up
4.5 Internet on local network.
4.6 DNS: types with examples
4.7 Search engines : Google, yahoo,
bing: search
4.8 images, maps, news, search content
using
4.9 Different criteria.
4.10 Applications of Internet : www,
mail, news,
4.11 Chat, social networking.
4.12 Threats to IT infrastructure :
Physical,
4.13 Access level : password breaks,
hacking, web based threats like
weak passwords,
4.14 social engineering, pirated
software,
4.15 unethical websites, Malicious
programs,
4.16 infrequent updates, protecting and
mitigating
4.17 threats : Use of Anti Virus
software,
4.18 scanning computer regularly,
updating antiV
UNIT V 5a. use of ethics in Information 5.1 Information Technology:
Introduction to technology Understanding the
Information need of Information, Data,
Technology Knowledge, Difference between Data,
Information and Knowledge.
5.2 Benefits of IT infrastructure, Ethical
issues :
Plagiarism, Use of License Software,
copyright infringement, Intellectual
property
5.3Rights, its impact on IT.
Downloading and installation of skype.
16
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
I Anatomy of Computer
System
2
II Types of Software
2
III Basics of Computer Not Applicable
Networking
3
IV Basics of Internet, Its
Applications & Security
3
V Introduction to Information
Technology
6
Total 16
Sr. No. Unit Title Practical/ Lab. Work/ Assignments/ Tutorials Hours
1. I Install new application software using control panel. 02
2. I Shrink the hard disk partition for more partitions 04
3. I Create users with full control, limited control. 02
4. I Set screen savers and energy management in Windows. 04
5. II Set window resolution 02
6. II Perform configuration using CMOS setup. 04
7. II Dissemble and Identify Motherboard, CPU, SMPS, 04

Expansion
slots, Drives, storage devices.
8. III Identify IP address, Network mask, Computer Name in 04
local Network.
17
9. III Study of different ports such as PS/2,NIC,Serial & parallel. 02
10. III Burn/Copy data on CD. 02
11. IV Perform Printer Installation and self test. 02
12 IV Perform connection of speakers and microphones. 02
13 IV Maintain keyboard and mouse. 02
14 IV Perform scanner Installation and scanning procedure of 02

scanning a document.
15 IV Select network devices for given application. 04
16 V Use E-mail. 04
17 V Perform Download and install on skype. 04
18 V Create a group mail, add class mates to group mail and 04

send them
‘Welcome e-mail’.
19 V Use Google maps and find out location of your institute. 04
20 V Apply passwords of your computer system. 02
21 V Change the size of scanned images. 02
TOTAL 64
Other than class room and laboratory activities following are the suggested guided co-
curricular students activities which need to be undertaken to facilitate the attainment of
various course outcomes of this course. The students are required to maintain portfolio of
their experiences which he/ she will submit at the end of the term.
Following is the list of proposed student activities like:

1. Students will prepare file for the above mentioned Practicals.
2. Students will prepare the tutorial book for tutorial sessions.The questions and assignments
will be solved in that and progressive assessment will be done by the teacher.
3. Tutorials are to be conducted batchwise for better understanding of subject.
4. Study of different ports such as PS/2,NIC,Serial & parallel
18
outcomes.
1. Guide students in preparing charts and display boards.

2. Guide students in searching information regarding datasheets and electronic components.
3. Demonstrate practical thoroughly before the students perform.
4. Show Flash/Video/Animation clippings for functioning of instruments.
5. Observe continuously and monitor the performance of students in lab.
6. Assign different types of Mini-projects
7. Guide students in preparing Micro-projects.
1. Mr.David strone and Troubleshooting your Prentice Hall

Alfred Poor PC.
2. David Groth A+ complete PBP Publication
3. Dennis P. Curtin, Kim Foley Information Technology Tata Mcgraw Hill
S.
No.
1. Computer System with latest configuration As per Computer industry

and memory specification
2. Network devices and cables. As per Computer industry

specification
1 www.nptel.com
2.Weleys computing Resources
3.Fundamentals of computer: http://www.w3schools.in
19
Software’s:
1. Any antivirus software .

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Select computer system

as per requirements. - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
2 Select the application

softwares and - 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
operating systems as
per requirements.
3 Select the network - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
topologies.
4 Change the network
protocols as per - 3 3 3 - - - - - - - -
requirements.
5 Use Information
- 3 - - - - - - - 3 - -
technology

No faculty members
1 Nilophar Masuldar Lecturer in Computer Engineering, Govt Polytechnic, Aurangabad
2 Prajakta Sadafule Lecturer in Computer Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
20
6G301 GPA ENGLISH
COURSE TITLE ENGLISH

COURSE CODE 6G301
Diploma Programme in which this course is offered Semester in which

offered
Common to all programmes First
1. RATIONALE
English language has become a supreme necessity to pick up a solid core of
knowledge. It has a power of linking us with the outside world. Competency in
English is also important in business matters like transactions including e-mails,
memos, reports and contracts in writingnot only for Indian industry, but also
worldwide. Students having proficiency in reading, writing and speaking English
has become a prospect of employment in the industry. Hence, this course is
designed to help the students to communicate in English effectively.
2. COMPETENCY
“Communicate in English language in spoken and written form.”

(In Hours) Credits Theory Marks Practical Total
(L+T+P) Marks Marks
2 - 2 4 80 20 - 25@ 125
Exam Duration 3 Hrs 1 Hr - - -
(*): Out of 25 marks, 05 marks -micro-project assessment; 20 marks-progressive
assessment.
Legends: L-Lecture; T – Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice; P -Practical; C
– Credit, ESE -End Semester Examination; PT- Progressive Test; OR-Oral
Examination; PA- Progressive Assessment
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Interpret the meaning of new words from the text.
2. Formulate grammatically correct sentences using new words.
3. Prepare resume in proper format.
4. Use relevant vocabulary to construct sentences.
28
6G301 GPA ENGLISH
5. COURSE DETAILS
Outcomes
UNIT-I 1a. Understanding Text from the book &
Comprehension meaning of new words Vocabulary Building
from the text. 1.1.Man Versus Machine—
1b.Write summary of M..K..Gandhi
the text 1.2. Say No to Plastic Bags
1c. Responding to the 1.3. Interview of
questions from the text Dr.A.P.J.AbdulKalam
1d. Express ideas and 1.4. Dare to Dream- N.R.Narayan
views on learned Murthy
topics 1.5. The History Maker—
MaltiHola
UNIT-II 2a. Apply correct Functional Grammar
Functional Grammar verbs in given 2.1.Tenses & Time
sentences 2.2. Sentence Patterns
2b. Use of correct 2.3. Types of Sentences
structures in writing 2.4. Modal Auxiliaries
2c. Identify different 1.2.5. Connectors
types of sentences 2. 6. Prepositions
2d. Apply correct 2.7. Voice, Degree and Reported
auxiliaries Speech
2e. Use appropriate 2.8. Punctuation Marks
connectors in the given
sentences
2f. Use appropriate
prepositions in the
given sentences
2g. Apply correct and
exact rules and
structures to transform
the sentences
2h. Use of correct
punctuations in writing
UNIT-III 3a. Writing a 3.1.Paragraph Writing
Craft of writing paragraph effectively 3.2.E-mail writing
3b. Writing e-mail in 3.3. Resume Writing
proper formats
3c. Prepare resume in
suitable format
UNIT-IV 4a. Formulate 4.1. Importance of effective
Listening & Speaking sentences using new listening
Skills words 4.2.Barriers in listening and how
29
6G301 GPA ENGLISH
4b. Enrich vocabulary to overcome them

through reading and 4.3Problems in speaking English
listening faced by Indian Students
4c. Follow correct
pronunciations,
intonations & accents
in communication
6. SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH HOURS AND

MARKS (THEORY)
No. Hours R U A Total
I Text from the book & 12 08 12 10 30
Vocabulary Building
II Functional Grammar 12 05 08 13 26
III Craft of Writing 06 04 04 08 16

IV Listening & Speaking 02 02 02 04 08
Skills
Total 32 19 26 35 80
teachers. The actual distribution of marks in the question paper may vary slightly
from the above table.
7. SUGGESTED EXERCISES/PRACTICALS
The tutorial/practical/exercises should be properly designed and implemented with
an attempt to develop different types of cognitive and practical skills (Outcomes in
cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain) so that students are able to acquire
the competencies.
Sr. Unit Practical Exercises Approx. Hrs.
No. No. (Outcomes in Psychomotor Domain) required
1. I Make Sentences Using Correct Collocations 04

2. II Frame Sentences Using Appropriate 04
Preposition/Conjunction
3. III Make Sentences Using Correct Tenses 04
4. IV Make Sentences Using Seven Basic Sentence 04
Patterns
5. V Transform Sentences in Reported Speech 04
6. VI Prepare an Effective Resume in a Proper Format 04
7. VII Draft Formal E-mails 04
8. VIII Listen a Paragraph/Speech/Story and Make a 04
30
6G301 GPA ENGLISH
Summary
Total 32

a. Read newspapers daily.
b. Solve exercises on lexical items.
c. Use apps for practice.
d. Use pocket dictionary to increase vocabulary.
e. Listen the news bulletin on radio.
f. Play different word games to improve vocabulary.
g. Write different articles & posts.
h. Practice role-playing.
i. Write a story of own experiences.
j. Practice listening comprehension.
k. Collect articles from newspapers & make a collection.
l. Practice paragraph writing.
m. Collect different business letters.
a. Arrange different competitions to solve various grammatical items.

b. Motivate students to listen, speak, read and write English in their day-to-day
life.
c. Student centered methods and techniques of teaching and learning e.g. group
discussion, role-play, individual and group assignments should be used so as
to make the students actively participate in the teaching-learning process.
10. SUGGESTED TITLES FOR MICRO-PROJECTS

A micro-project is planned to be undertaken by a student. He/she ought to submit it
by the end of the semester to develop the industry oriented COs. The micro-project
could be industry application-based, internet-based, workshop-based, laboratory-
based or field-based. Each student will have to maintain dated work diary consisting
of individual contribution in the project work and give a seminar presentation of it
before submission. A suggestive list is given here. Similar micro-projects could be
added by the concerned faculty:
a. The use of English language in the user manual of electronic appliances used
at home.
b. Prepare an advertisement for five daily used products using contextual
vocabulary.
c. Observe environmental problems in your locality and frame at least ten
slogans to createan awareness.
31
6G301 GPA ENGLISH
d. Take an interview of any successful person in your locality in context with

his life journey, inspiration, social contribution, role model and keys to
success.
e. Prepare a leaflet giving information about your institute.
f. Write a review of your favourite movie/drama/novel.
g. Find out the difficulties in speaking English faced by the students from rural
areas.

Sr. Title of Book Author Publication
No.
1 English Grammar & R. C. Jain Macmillan
Composition
2 Business Letters & E-mails JyotiNandedkar Saket Pub.
3 Business Correspondence and R. C. Sharma & Tata McGraw Hill
Report writing Krishna Mohan
4 Contemporary English Grammar David Green Macmillan
5 A Communicative Grammar of Geofray Leech Pearson Education
English &Jansvartvik
6 *Spectrum- A Text Book on - MSBTE
English
7 * A Text Book on English - MSBTE
12. Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications

Sr.No. Name of the Equipment Specification
1 Digital English Language Laboratory
2 Computers and Headphones
3 Magazines,Articles,Journals in Lab.
13. E-learning resourses
(Please mention complete URL of the E- resourses CO wise)
1 https://www.nptel.ac.in/courses
2 https://www.k12reader.com
3 https://www.eduaction.com
4 https://www.k5learning.com
5 https://www.english4u.com
32
6G301 GPA ENGLISH
Course
CO. Course Outcome
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
PO10
NO.
Interpret the meaning of 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 - - -

CO1 new words from the text.
Formulate grammatically 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 - - -
CO2 correct sentences using
new words.
Prepare resume in proper 1 1 2 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
CO3 format.
Use relevant vocabulary 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 - - -
CO4 to construct sentences.

faculty member
No
1 Mrs. P.Y. Kamble Lecturer in English, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
2 Mrs. M.S. Ban Lecturer in English, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
3 Mr. P.V. Deshmukh Lecturer in English, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
4 Mr. R.L. Korde Lecturer in English, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
5 Mr. D.D. Gangthade Lecturer in English, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
6 Mr. A.P. Jagtap Lecturer in English, Government Polytechnic, Osmanabad

33
6G303 GPA DEVELOPMENT OF LIFE SKILLS
COURSE TITLE: DEVELOPMENT OF LIFE SKILLS
COURSE CODE: 6G303
Diploma Programme in which this course is offered Semester in which course is

offered
CE/ME/ETX/EE/AE/DDGM/CO/IT FIRST / SECOND
1 RATIONALE
The generic skills are lifelong skills which need to be developed continuously. These skills are
necessary for diploma engineers for their professional career.
This course aims to develop interpersonal skills, problem solving, decision making,
Professionalism with etiquettes, ethics and value system.
This course also aims at developing an engineer as a team leader, effective member of the team
and to become sound personality. It will develop the abilities and skills to perform at highest
degree of quality as an individual.
2 COMPETENCY
“Develop life skills to enhance personal effectiveness, professionalism and optimal use of
resources.”
Teaching Scheme Total Credits Examination Scheme

(L+T+P) Theory Marks
(In Hours) Practical Total Marks
Marks
(OR)
-- -- 2 2 -- -- 25@ 25 50
Legends: L-Lecture; T – Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice; P -Practical; C – Credit,

ESE -End Semester Examination; PA - Progressive Assessment
4. COURSE OUTCOMES (COs)

1. Develop interpersonal skills.
2. Exhibit corporate etiquettes and professionalism.
3. Enhance personal effectiveness and body language
4. Practice time management and goal setting technique
5. Develop presentation skills.
6. Manage Stress at workplaces
34
5 COURSE DETAILS

Unit –I Self Analysis 1a. Identify Strengths and Self-Analysis
weaknesses of an individual 1.1 Strength, weaknesses,
1b.Identify opportunities, opportunities and threats
threats in different situations. 1.2 Techniques of self-control
1c. Describe principle 1.3 Understanding Need
of Need Base Theory base Theory — Attitude,
aptitude, assertiveness, self-
esteem, Confidence
1.4 Understanding Self
Unit– II 2a. Identify techniques of Communication Skills&

Communication communications. Presentation Skills
Skills& Presentation 2b. Describe Body language 2.1 Techniques of
Skills techniques communication skills,
2c. Understand the principle 2.2 Body language, Dress
Eye contact and facial like the audience,
expression. Posture, Gestures, Eye
2d. Develop appropriate contact and facial
presentation Skills. expression.
2e. Use multimedia tools and 2.3 Presentation Skill –Stage
technology for effective fright, Voice and language
presentation. – Volume, Pitch,
2f. Conduct Group discussion Inflection, Speed, Pause
and Interviews. Pronunciation,
Articulation, Language,
Practice of speech.
2.4 Group discussion and
Interview technique, Use
of aids –OHP, LCD
projector, white board
Unit III 3a. exhibit/apply inter personal Interpersonal
Interpersonal skills in different situations. communication and
communication and Corporate and Etiquettes
Corporate and 3b. Practice manners and
Etiquettes Etiquettes.
3.1 Interpersonal
communication. Through
Self Development and
35
change.
3.2 Polished personal habits
3.3 Ethics & Etiquettes: a
way of life, what are
ethics, how ethics help
to ensure positive
interpersonal relations,
3.4 Personal value system,
Personal Attire & Grooming
3.5 Cell phone manners
Unit IV 4a. Understand importance of Time management and Goal

time management. Setting
Time Management
and goal setting. 4b. Apply time management
skills. 4.1 Time management skills in
groups for completion of
4c. Set the goals for career
project
growth.
4.2 Factors that lead to time loss
and how they can be avoided
4.3 Time matrix & urgent

versus, Important jobs
4.4 Importance of goal
setting
4.5 How to set SMART goals.
Unit V Health and Stress Management

4a. Manage health for personal
efficiency.
Health and Stress 5.1 Importance of health
Management 4b. Describe Stress management,
Management,
5.2 Relevance of it,
4c. Use strategies to overcome 5.3 Tips to maintain good
stress health
4d Understand emotions 5.4 Strategies to overcome
stress, understanding
importance of good
health to avoid stress. 5.5 Stresses
in groups,
36
understand and identify

emotions, how to control
emotions, emotional
intelligence.
Unit VI 6a. participate in technical Problem Solving Techniques

and Creativity
Problem Solving Quizzes and puzzles. 6.1 definition of problem,
Techniques and types
Creativity 6.2 solving Puzzles and
6b.Use problem technical quizzes.
solving techniques 6.3 Reducing conflict by
preventing problems in
the classroom.
6c. Describe factors
enhancing creativity 6.4 Creativity concept, Tips
and ways to increase
creativity, importance of
creativity.
6 SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH HOURS AND MARKS (THEORY)

No. Hours
R U A Total
Marks
Level Level Level
Self-Analysis 4 NA NA NA NA
I
Communication Skills & 6 NA NA NA NA

II Presentation Skills
III Interpersonal communication and 6 NA NA NA NA

Corporate and Etiquettes
Time management and Goal Setting 6 NA NA NA NA
IV
V Health and Stress Management 6 NA NA NA NA
VI Problem Solving Techniques and 4 NA NA NA NA
37

No. Hours
R U A Total
Marks
Level Level Level
Creativity
Legends: R = Remembrance; U= Understanding; A= Application and above levels (Revised

Bloom’s taxonomy)
Note: This specification table shall be treated as a general guideline for students and teachers.
The actual distribution of marks in the question paper may vary slightly from above table.
The tutorial/practical/exercises should be properly designed and implemented with an attempt to
develop different types of cognitive and practical skills (Outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor
and affective domain) so that students are able to acquire the competencies.
Note: Here only outcomes in psychomotor domain are listed as practical/exercises. However, if
these practical/exercises are completed appropriately, they would also lead to development of
Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes in affective domain as given in a common list at the
beginning of curriculum document for this programme. Faculty should refer to that common list
and should ensure that students also acquire those Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes
related to affective domain.
Approx.
S. Unit Practical Exercises
Hrs.
No. No. (Outcomes in Psychomotor Domain)
required
1 I 1) Analyze self with SWOT techniques. 04
2 II 2) Present a topic (related to technical advancement should be 04

given to a group of five to six students. Group should search the
necessary information from various sources and prepare a
systematic power point presentation. All such presentations
should be delivered in front of class by groups. Presentations
are to be evaluated by teacher).
3 II 3) Deliver extempore (Topic will be given to the individual for a 04

speech of 5 to 8 minutes. Here the individual speeches of
students will be conducted and evaluated by group of students.)
38
Approx.
Hrs.
required
4 II 4) Participate in Group Discussion (Teacher should form group of 04

six to eight students and give topics for group discussion. Group
discussions should be carried out and evaluated by teacher)
5 III 5) Exhibit Etiquettes in different situations (Visit to any one place 04

like office/firm/development sites etc. and observe the
communication and etiquettes.)
6 IV 6) Prepare your individual time table for a week - 04
a) List down your daily activities.
b) Decide priorities to be given according to the urgency
and importance of the activities.
c) Find out your time wasters and mention the corrective
measures.
d) Set short term and long term goal for
PT/TEE/Gymkhana -sport/gathering event etc.
7 V 7) Demonstrate simple Yoga postures and other stress relieving 04

techniques by professional persons and narrate his/her
experiences.
8 VI 8) Participate in Quizzes, puzzle- solving and educational games 04
and narrate his/her experiences.
Total 32

 Following activities will be undertaken as per their convenience. students are advice to
submit their report about participation in activities.
 1. Case studies to be discussed in a group and presentation of the same by group /group
leader.
 Carry out Field exercises and prepare reports. (e.g. interact with supplier/trader and
discuss about techno commercial specifications of product)
 Role play by individual/group leader.
 Sharing of self -experiences in a group.
 Brain storming sessions in a group
 Questionnaire -filling & discussing results of the same in a group.
39

i. Motivate students to use internet and collect information about various generic skills
ii. Arrange expert lecture on various topics on (two/three) SWOT analysis/Time
management/Etiquettes / stress management/health management.etc.

A) Books
S.
Title of Book Author Publication
No.
1 Pearson Education Asia Organizational Behavior Tata McGraw Hill
2 Marshall Cooks Adams Time Viva Books

management
3 Bishop , Sue Develop Your Kogan Page India

Assertiveness
4 Allen Pease Body Language Sudha Publications Pvt. Ltd.
5 Lowe and Phil Creativity and problem Kogan Page (I) P Ltd
solving
6 You can win Mr. Shiv Khera Macmillan ,India Ltd.
7 Wings of Fire Mr .Abdul Kalam Universities Press
8 Prabhavi Vyaktimatwa SEEMA GUPTA SAKET PUBLICATION
9 Yoga Dipika Mr. Iyyengar Rohan prakashan
10 Tan Tanavache Niyojan

Dr. Anand Nadkarni Majestic Publishing House
(Marathi)
11 Tandrust Raha ,Mast

Dr. Rajiv Sharangpani Continental Prakashan
Jaga.(Marathi)
40
B) Software/Learning Websites:
Websites related to soft skills.
POs and PSOs assignment and its strength of assignment with each CO of the Course
CO. Course Outcome PO P P P P P P P P P P P

NO. 1 O O O O O O O O O S S
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 O O
0 1 2
Develop interpersonal - - - 2 - - - 2 3 - - -
CO1 communication
Display corporate etiquettes and - 2 - - 2 - - 2 - - - -
CO2 professionalism
Improve personality and body - - 2 - - - - - - 2 - -
CO3 language
Practice time management and 2 - 2 - - - - 2 2 - - -
CO4 goal setting technique
Develop presentation and group - 2 - 2 - - 2 - - - - -
CO5 discussion technique
Acquire Stress removing and - 2 - - 2 - - - - 2 - -
CO6 Problem solving technique

No faculty members
1 Dr.Uday V. Pise Head of Department , Mechanical Engg. Govt. Polytechnic,
Aurangabad
2 Prof. R. T. Aghao Lecturer in Applied Mechanics., Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
41
6G304 GPA ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
COURSE TITLE: ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
COURSE CODE: 6G304
DIPLOMA PROGRAMME IN WHICH THIS COURSE IS

SEMESTER
OFFERED
ME, CE, EE, E&TC, CO, IT, AE FIRST
1 RATIONALE:-
The present plight of the world as a victim to a number of environmental setbacks ranging from
global warming, ozone layer depletion, acid rains led to alarmingly increase in world pollution
levels. This has led to the dangerous situation threatening existence of biosphere on the earth.
Diploma engineers also get confronted with this issue in their professional life.. Diploma
engineers need to be aware of environment and associated issues so that he can help in
protection and preservation of environment.
2 COMPETENCY: -
“Contribute in overall preservation of eco system of organization.”
3 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME

(In Hours) Credits Theory Marks Practical Total
(L+T+P) Marks Marks
L T P C ESE PT ESE (PR) PA
-- 2 2 -- -- 50@ 50
0
Exam duration -- -- -- -- --
Legends: L-Lecture; T – Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice; P -Practical; C – Credit,

ESE -End Semester Examination; PA - Progressive Test; OR-Oral examination
4 COURSE OUTCOMES:-
At the end of this course, students would be able to -
1. Identify elements of biodiversity.

2. Assess the impact of biodiversity
3. Apply provisions of various environmental protection acts in practice.
4. Undertake survey on environmental concerns and remedial measures
42
5 COURSE DETAILS:-

Unit –I 1a. Write genesis of 1.1 Definition , Scope and
environmental concerns importance of Environmental
Environment and 1b. Identify the various types of studies
studies environmental issues.
1.2 Meaning of environment, ,
Environment and its
components, Segments of
environment, scientific aspects
1.3 Global environment crisis

and factors affecting it.
Deforestation. aquatic life and
tsunami effects ,Population,
Carbon dioxide emissions,
pollution, Extinction of
species etc. Ecological Foot
print
Unit– II 2a. Classify different resources 2.1. Renewable and

2b. Outline issues associated Nonrenewable natural
Environmental with different resources. resources and associated issues
2c. Develop strategies to
Natural Resources as under,
conserve of natural
resources. a. Forest resources
b. Water resources
c. Energy resources
d. Land resources
e. Food resources
f. Energy resources
2.2. Role of individual in
conservation of natural
resources
Unit– III 3a. Outline ecosystem. 3.1 Concept of Ecosystem
3b. Categorize various 3.2 Structure and function of
Ecosystems ecosystems . ecosystem
3.3 Structure and functions of
following ecosystems,
a. Forest Ecosystem
b. Grassland Ecosystem
43
c. Desert Ecosystem
d. Aquatic ecosystem
Unit– IV 4a. Outline Biographical 4.1 Introduction, Values of the

classification of India Biodiversity, Biographical
Biodiversity and 4b. Assess Biodiversity loss classification of India
Conservation and its impact. 4.2 Biodiversity loss and its
impact
4.3 Conservation of Biodiversity,
Efforts made in India.
Unit - V 5a. Describe pollution and its 5.1 Definition of pollution and its
typs types
Environmental 5b. Describe cause, effect 5.2 Causes, effects and control
Pollution relationship. measures of following types
5c. Conduct Survey on of pollutions
Environmental Pollution a. Air Pollution
b. Water Pollution
c. Soil Pollution
d. Marine Pollution
e. Thermal Pollution
f. Nuclear hazards and pollution
5.3 Pollution norms, rules and bye
laws
5.4 Solid waste management:
Causes, Effects and control
measures of urban and
industrial waste.
Unit – VI 6a. Identify social issues related 6.1 Urban problems related to Energy,
to environment Measures of water conservation
Social Issues 6b. Suggest control measures to including Rain water harvesting,
and counter the issues,
Watershed Management
Environment .
6.2 Climatic changes, Global
Warming, Acid rain, Ozone layer
depletion issue, Nuclear accidents and
holocaust. Kyoto Protocol, Climate
justice
6.3 Introduction to Environment

(protection) act(prevention and control
of pollution),Wildlife protection act,
Forest protection act Air ( Prevention
and control of pollution) Act, Water
related Environment laws ,issues in
44
enforcement of environmental
legislation, public awareness.
Unit – VII 7a. Use of ICT in 7.1Concepts of Population Growth,

environment and human Environment and human health, Role
Human population health areas. of information technology in
and environment environment and human health
6. SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH HOURS AND MARKS (THEORY)
Unit Unit Title Teaching Distribution of practical

Hours examination marks
R U A Total
I Environment and studies 6 NA NA NA NA
II Environmental Natural 6 NA NA NA NA
resources
III Ecosystems 6 NA NA NA NA
IV Biodiversity and conservation 6 NA NA NA NA
V Environmental Pollution 12 NA NA NA NA
VI Social issues and 6 NA NA NA NA

environment
VII Human population and 6 NA NA NA NA

environment
Total 48 NA NA NA NA
Legends: R = Remembrance; U = Understanding; A = Application and above levels (Revised

Bloom’s taxonomy)
45
Here all the practical exercises are to be completed by students in a group. The group size should
be 10 to 12. The groups should be formed by concerned teacher in consultation with students
Every group should be assigned a group leader. All groups will complete the practical
assignments in spare time and during Sundays and holidays. No separate time slots will be
allotted to these practical exercises. Teacher will guide and give necessary inputs for modus
operand of exercises.
S. Unit Practical Exercises Approx.

No. No. (Outcomes in Psychomotor Domain) Hrs.
required
1 I Prepare report on environmental issues of your institute / 04
Selected Premises
2 II Collect information related to natural resources of India and 02
methods adopted for conservation of these resources
3 I, II Prepare “Energy Audit Report” of a small home. And give 02
suggestions for conservation of energy.
4 III, IV Examine water usage of a small community/locality in 02
city/Apartment /Your Institute and prepare a Report on actions
that could be taken to conserve the water fron following point
of view:
How much water is consumed
How much wastage of water occurs
How can demand of water be reduced
How can ecological footprint of water they get can be reduced
What other environment friendly ways of getting water can
one implement
What is the quality of water and how can it be improved
How reuse and recycling of water can be done
How users can be educated for proper use of water
5 I,II,III, Visit, “Roof water harvesting” system installed in nearby area 02
VI and prepare a detailed report. Include local bodies legislation
as regards roof water harvesting
6 I,II,III Undertake “Tree plantation project” and plant at least 03 trees 02
per student in your Institute. Prepare detailed report on tree
plantation.
7 I,II,III Visit ,study and analyze a “Solar systems” installed in nearby 02
area and prepare a detailed report. Include following types of
systems,
a.Household Solar water heating systems
b. Solar P-V Systems
c.Solar roof top Net metering systems
8 IV Preparation of Biodiversity Report: 03
Select a small park or garden in your area.Prepare a
Biodiversity register: list all the species found in place ,find
their scientific names with the help of a botanist. Interview
long term users of the place and find out about loss of
46
biodiversity. Write a report describing your observations and

your recommendations for conservation of biodiversity.
9 V Prepare a report on water pollution scenario in your institute 06
and make a detailed report. Following activities can be
undertaken with permission,
Locating and studying water consumption locations in
institute like Water coolers , R.O units, Filters, taps.
Taking and checking drinking water samples periodically
from testing authorities and keeping records.
Preparing and executing schedule for cleaning water tanks,
water filters, RO units etc.
10 V Prepare report Vehicular pollution checking in your institute: 02
Here sample check the two wheelers, four wheeler vehicles of
employees, students with the help of Exhaust gas analyzer /
Smokemeter periodically and check the levels of pollution.
11 V Prepare report of Noise and Air pollution levels at a crowded 02
square of city using Deciblemeter and Air sampling device
12 VI Collect information on Global Warming,Acid rain, Ozone 02
layer depletion issue,Nuclear accidents and holocaust. Kyoto
Protocol, Climate justice, Environment protection laws and
regulations.
Total 32

1 Search different journals on Environment
2 Collect info of Environmental laws and regulations from websites.
3 Collect various news paper cuttings on the issues of environment
4 Observe and celebrate following important days on environment,
• 22 April- Earth Day
• 1 – 7 July – Vanamahotsava Week
• 11 International Mountain day
• 2 February –Worlds wetland day
• 5 April – National Maritime day
• 8 June – World Oceans day
• 22 May – international Day of Biological diversity
• 22 March – World Water day.
• 21 March – World Forestry Day
• 16 October –Worlds food day
• 22 September –Car free day
• 29 October-National disaster reduction day
• 21 July – Worlds Population day
• 8 March – Womans day
47
5 Prepare charts, banners, posters on environment and its protection and display in
class, notice boards.
6 Participate in social campaigns concerning environment and its preservation.
7
9. SUGGESTED SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES
1. Q & A Techniques.
2. Field Visits
3. Expert Lectures.
S. Title of Book Author Publication

No.
1 Environmental Studies R.Rajgopalan OXFORD university press
2 Environmental Studies Anindata Basak Pearson education
3 Air Pollution M.N. Rao Tata Macgrawhill
4 Elements of P. Meenakshi Prentice Hall

Environmental
Science and
Engineering
5 Introduction to P.AarneVesilind Thomson
Environmental and Susan
Engineering Morgan
11. Major Equipment/ Instrument with Broad Specifications

Sr. No. Major equipment/ Instrument with Broad Specification Quantity
1 Biological Microscope 01
2 Air sample testing setup 01
3 Water sample testing setup 01
4 Exhaust gas Analyzer 01
5 Smoke meter 01
6 PC with Net connectivity 01
7 LCD Projector 01 et
12.. E-learning resources
( Please mention complete URL of the E- recourse CO wise)

1. www.unep.org
2. www.ipcc.ch
3. www.grida.no
4. www.wildlifeinindia.com
5. www.fsi.nic.in/sfr_2009.htm
48
6. www.unesco.org
7. www.chilika.com
8. www.foodfirst.org/media/opeds/2000/4-greenrev.html
9. www.cites.org
10. http://projecttiger.nic.in/
11. www.iwmi.cgiar.org/
12. www.worldwater.org
13. www.indiaenergyportal.org
14. http://www.lifeaftertheoilcrash.net/
15. www.mmpindia.org/
16. www.pcri.com
17. http://www.unwater.org/statistics_pollu.html
List of Films
1. The 11th hour
2. The many faces of madness
3. Planet Earth-BBC documentary
4. The childrens of Amazon
5. The Blue Planet-BBC documentary
6. End of Line
7. The State of planet – BBC Documentary
8. The truth about Tigers
9. Bringing home rain- A film by SushamaVeerappa.
10. Drinking the sky – BBC documentary
11. A Crude Awakening :The OIL Crash – A documentary by Basil Gelpke
12. Poison on a platter – Documentary by Mahesh Bhatt
13. The story of bottled water – A documentary by Annie Leonard on packaged water
industry.(Download from www.storyofstuff.org )
13. POs and PSOs assignment and its strength of assignment with each CO of the Course
CO. Course Outcome P P P P P P P P P P P P

NO. O O O O O O O O O O S S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 O O
0 1 2
Analyze and assess the impact of

CO1 biodiversity and its loss on 2 - - - 2 2 - - - - -
-
environment.
Identify causes of pollution in
CO2 working system and apply control - - - - 2 2 - - - - -
-
measures for prevention.
49
Apply provisions of various

CO3 environmental protection acts in 2 - - - 3 3 - - 3 - -
-
practice.
Appreciate correlation between
CO4 Human population and its effect on 2 - - - 2 2 - - 3 - -
-
environment.
CO5 Read, analyze and apply various
laws and regulations concerning 2 - - - 3 3 - - - - -
-
environmental issues.

No faculty members
1 Prof.S.P.Shiralkar Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering Department
2 Prof. A.B. Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering Department
Deshpande
50
6G102 GPA ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
COURSE CODE 6G102
Diploma program in which course is offered Semester in which course is

offered
CE/ME/EE/ET/IT/CO/AE Second Semester
1. RATIONALE:
Engineering Mathematics forms foundation to understand basic principles of

Engineering Mathematics to solve engineering problems. This subject is an extension of
Basic Mathematics which deals with calculus, differentiation, integration, differential
equations etc. which have applications in several engineering courses of various programmes.
This course aims at multi-dimensional logical thinking and reasoning capabilities of the
students.
2.COMPETENCY STATEMENT:
“Solve engineering problems using the principles of applied mathematics.“
3. COURSE OUTCOMES
Students will be able to
1. Differentiate the various function using different rules

2. Apply rules of derivatives to solve engineering problems.
3. Apply rules of integration to solve engineering problems.
4. Solve the various types of differential equations.
5. Apply principles of central tendencies for quality assurance in engineering field
Teaching Total credits Examination scheme

scheme
(L+T+P) Theory Marks Practical Total Marks
(In hours) marks
03 01 00 04 80 20 -- -- 100
Exam Duration 3 Hrs 1 Hr.
Legends:
L-Lecture; T – Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice(batch-wise); P Practical;
C – Credit; ESE -End Semester Examination; PT - Progressive Test.
51
5. CORSE DETAIL.

Outcomes
UNIT I 1a.Differentiate various 1.1 Definition of derivative, notation.
Derivatives engineering functions 1.2 Derivative of standard functions.
1.3 Rules of Differentiation (without proof) such
as sum, difference, product and quotient.
1.4 Derivative of composite functions.
1.5 Derivative of inverse trigonometric functions.
1.6 Derivative of implicit functions.
1.7 Derivative of parametric functions.
1.8 Logarithmic differentiation.
1.9 Second order derivatives.
UNIT II 2a.Apply derivatives to 2.1 Tangent & normal.

find Velocity, 2.2 Maxima & minima.
Applications Acceleration and 2.3 Radius of curvature.
of derivative Maxima & Minima
UNIT III 3a.Integrate various 3.1 Definition of integration.

Integration Functions using 3.2 Integration of standard function.
appropriate methods. 3.3 Rules of Integration: sum, difference &
multiplication.
3.4 Methods of Integration
3.4.1 Integration by substitution.
3.4.2 Integration by partial fraction.
3.4.3 Integration by parts.
3.5 Definition of Definite integral.
3.6 Simple problems on definite integral
UNIT IV 4a.Solve various types 4.1 Definition of differential equation, order

Differential of differential equations. &degree.
Equations 4.2 Formation of differential equation.
4.3 Solution of Diff. equation.
4.4.1 variable separable.
4.4.2 Homogeneous equation.
4.4.3 Exact diff. equation.
4.4.4 Linear diff. equation.
UNIT V 5a.Measure Central 5.1 Graphical representation: Histogram & o-give

Tendencies curve to find Mode and median.
Statistics 5b. Measure Dispersion 5.2 Measures of dispersion : Range, mean
for given data. deviation and Standard deviation.
52
6. SUGGESTED SPRCIFICATION TABLE WITH HOURS AND MARKS (THEORY)
Teaching Distribution of Theory Marks

Title/Topic Hours
Sr,no
Remembrance Understanding Application
Total
levels levels levels
1 Derivative 12 2 08 08 18
Applications
2 04 00 04 08 12
of derivative
3 Integration 16 06 08 12 26
Differential
4 10 04 04 08 16
Equations
5 Statistics 06 02 02 04 08
TOTAL 48 14 26 36 80
7. SUGGESTED LIST OF TUTORIAL

1) The exercises should be properly designed and implemented with an attempt to
develop different types of skills leading to the achievement of the competency
2) Form a batch of 20 students and at least ten problems should be given to get
necessary exercise.
3) Course faculty will provide programme related problems.
Sr. Title/Topic Exercises/Tutorial Approx.

No. hours
1 Derivative Solve problems related to various 03
methods/techniques of differentiations
2 Applications of derivative Calculate Engineering Applications of 03
Tangent, normal, maxima, minima and Radius
of curvature from respective programmes.
3 Integration Solve problems Related to Various 04
Methods/Techniques of integration
4 Differential Equations Solve problems Related to Various 04
Methods/Techniques of Differential equation.
5 Statistics Solve examples of Comparative data. Plot 02
different types of graph.

Other than the classroom learning, following are the suggested student-related co-curricular
activities which can be undertaken to accelerate the attainment of the various outcomes in this
course:
a. Collect the mathematical derivation based on curriculum from respective programme.
b. Identify mathematical problems related to respective programme and get them solved.
c. Find graphical software using internet and list them.
53
d. Identify problems based on applications of differential equations and solve these problems.
e. Prepare a seminar on any relevant topic based on curriculum.

These are sample strategies, which the teacher can use to accelerate the attainment of the
various outcomes in this course
a. Use open resources available on internet to teach Engineering Mathematics.
b. Apply the mathematical concepts learnt in this course to branch specific problems.
c. Use different instructional strategies in classroom teaching.

Sr. Title Author Publication
No.
Mathematics for polytechnic students for S. P. Deshpande Pune vidhyarti gruh
1.
second Year prakshan Pune
Applied Mathematics By Patel & Rawal Nirali prakashan
2.
Mumbai
Mathematics for polytechnic students for Phadke prakashan
G.V.Kumbhojkar Kholapur
3 second year

Sr. No. Name of the Equipment Specification
1 NA
12. Software/Learning Websites
------
13. POs and PSOs assignment and its strength of assignment with each CO of the
Course
CO. Course Outcome

PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
Po1
No.
Students will be able to differentiate 2 3 1 - - - - - - - - - -

CO1 the various function using different
rules
Students will be able to apply the - - 1 - 1 - - - - - - - -
CO2 differentiation to Velocity,
Acceleration and Maxima & Minima
Students will be able to so Integrate 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - -

CO3 the various Function using different
methods
Students will be able to solve the 1 1 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO4 various types of differential equation
using different methods.
Students will be able to Measure - 1 1 - 1 - - - - - - - -
CO5 Central tendency and Measure
Dispersion in given data
54
13. COURSE CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT COMMITTEE
Sr. Name of the faculty Designation and Institute

No. member
1 Mr. M.A. Ali Lecturer in Mathematics, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
2 Mr. R.B. Borulkar Lecturer in Mathematics, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
3 Mrs. H.H. Bhumkar Lecturer in Mathematics, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
Member Secretary PBOS Chairman PBOS Co-ordinator science and

Humanities
55
6G104 GPA ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY

COURSE CODE 6G104
Diploma Programme in which this course is Semester in which offered
offered
ME/CE/EE//ET/CO/IT/AE First/ Second Semester
1 RATIONALE:
Chemistry is a basic science subject which is essential to all engineering courses. It
gives knowledge of engineering materials, their properties, related applications and
selection of materials for specific engineering applications/work/job.
Due to technological progress, there are hazardous effects of chemicals, waste
water and sewage water on environment & human life. The core knowledge of
environmental effects will bring awareness; generate curiosity in students about the
precautions & preventions to be taken to carry out further development resultantly to
reduce the ill effects.
2. COMPETENCY:
“Apply basic knowledge and principles of chemistry to solve different
industrial problems.”
Scheme Credits
Practical Term
(In Hours) (L+T+P) Theory Marks Total Marks
Marks work
L T P C ESE PT ESE PA ESE TOTAL MARKS

3 0 2 5 80~20~ 25@ 00 25 150
1/2Hr 2Hrs -- -- --
Examination Duration 2Hrs
. .
Legends: L-Lecture; T – Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice; P - Practical;
C – Credit, ESE - End Semester Examination; PT - Progressive Test; OR-Oral
examination; PA - Progressive Assessment(PR); ~Online Multiple choice
examination. @ Internal Examination
3. COURSE OUTCOMES:
After providing classroom teaching and laboratory experiences related to this

course, students will be able to
1. Draw the orbital configuration of different elements.
2. Represent the formation of molecules schematically.
3. Compare and use different types of cells.
4. Identify the properties of metals & alloys related to engineering
applications.
5. Identify the properties of nonmetallic materials, related to engineering
applications.
56
6. Select a proper material for specific purpose.

7. Select and use the lubricants at proper/ specific conditions of machines.
4. COURSE DETAILS:

Outcomes
UNIT-I 1a.Identification of 1.1 Atomic no, atomic mass no. numerical
Electronic Theory structure and nature of problems on it , orbit & orbitals.
atom, element and 1.2 Electronic configuration, electronic
Of Valency &
molecule. configuration of first 30 elements.
Molecule 1.3 Molecule formation: Valency, types of
Formation valency, electrovalency and covalency
with suitable examples. Study of
Formation of Electrovalent compounds
e.g. NaCl, CaCl2 & MgCl2 and
formation of Covalent Compounds
examples H2O, Cl2, CO2, N2
UNIT-II 2a.Verify Principle, 2.1 Arrhenius Theory of Ionization, Degree
Electrochemistry construction, working of ionization.
and applications of 2.2 Basic concepts of Conductors,
different cells. Insulators, Dielectrics, Electrolyte, Non
Electrolyte
2.3 Electrolysis, Electrolytic Cell,
Electrodes.
2.4 Electrolysis of CuSO4 Solution by using
Cu Electrode & Platinum Electrode
2.5 Faraday’s first law of Electrolysis &
numerical problems on it
Application of Electrolysis such as
Electroplating.
2.6 Electrochemical Cells & Batteries
Types of cell Primary & secondary cell
construction And Working of Dry
cell & Lead – Acid Storage.
57
UNIT III 3a.Identify different 3.1 Definition of Metallurgy, Mineral, Ore,

Metals and Alloys mechanical properties Gangue, Flux & Slag, Occurrence of
and extraction methods Metals.
of pure metal, 3.2 Mechanical Properties of metals such as
Correlate properties, hardness, Toughness, ductility,
composition and malleability, tensile strength.
applications of alloys 3.3 Stages of Extraction of Metals
with metal. from its Ores in detail i.e. its flow sheet
Crushing, Concentration, methods of
concentration (physical and chemical).
3.4 Reduction of iron in blast furnace with
chemical reactions, Reactions in zone of
reduction.
Alloys
3.5 Definition of Alloy, Purposes of Making
alloy.
3.6 Methods of Preparation of alloy such as
fusion method & compression method
3.7 Classification of Alloys, Ferrous alloys &
Non Ferrous alloys, their examples.
3.8 Composition, Properties & Applications
of some common alloys such as Alnico,
Duralumin, Wood’s Metal
UNIT-IV 4a. Classify corrosion 4.1 Definition of corrosion
Corrosion of from action of 4.2 Atmospheric corrosion or dry Corrosion,
surrounding corrosion due to oxygen , different types
Metals And its
environment and its of film formation.
Application protection methods. 4.3 Electrochemical Corrosion Hydrogen
evolution mechanism.
4.4 Appling protective Coatings like metal
coating by galvanising, tinning
UNIT-V 5a. Recognize ill 5.1 Hard water & soft water, types of
Water effect of hard water hardness, causes of hardness
and methods for 5.2 Effects of hard water in different
purification of water. industries (such as paper , sugar , dying
and textile industries) and domestic
purposes.
5.3 Softening of hard water by Permutit
process and ion exchange process,.
5.4 Potable water & its condition for pot-
ability. Different methods of
purification of water for drinking
purposes chlorination and ozonation
5.5 pH – value of water its applications
Numericals on pH values.
58
UNIT-VI 6a. Identification of 6.1 Plastics Definition of Plastic,

Non Metallic types , preparation, Formation of Plastic by Addition
properties and Polymerisation with examples
Materials
applications of plastic, Polyethylene & PVC.
rubber and thermal 6.2 Formation of Plastic by Condensation
insulating material. Polymerisation with suitable example as
Nylon 6, 6; Bakelite plastic.
6.3 Types of Plastics,
Thermo softening & Thermosetting Plastic
& difference between them.
6.4. Engineering properties of plastic and its
related uses.
RUBBER
6.5 Natural rubber its extraction from latex,
drawbacks of natural rubber. Synthetic
Rubber its examples
6.6 Vulcanisation of rubber with chemical
reaction.
6.7 Properties of rubber such as elasticity,
tack, resistant to abrasion, rebound
capacity.
6.8 Engineering Applications of rubber
based on its properties.
6.9 Thermal insulating materials
Definition & characteristics of ideal
thermal insulator.
Glass wool preparation, properties &
applications.
Thermocole properties and its
applications.
Unit-VII 7a. Select proper 7.1 Definition of lubricant and
Lubricants lubricant for different Lubrication.
types of machineries. 7.2 Functions of lubricants.
7.3 Classification of lubricants with
examples,
7.4 Mechanism of Lubrication by Fluid
Film, Boundary & Extreme Pressure,
7.5 Physical Characteristics of Lubricants
Such as Viscosity, Viscosity Index, Oiliness,
Volatility, Flash & Fire Point, Cloud & Pour
Point.
7.6 Selection of proper Lubricants for
Various types of machines.
59

(THEORY)
I Electronic Theory of Valency 8 2 6 4 12

and Molecular Formatin
II Electrochemistry 6 2 8 2 12
III Metals and Alloys 8 2 8 4 14

IV Corrosion of Metals and it’s 6 2 4 2 8
Applications
V Water 7 2 2 6 10
VI Non Metallic Materials 7 4 8 4 16
VII Lubricants 6 2 4 2 8
Total 48 16 40 24 80
teachers. The actual distribution of marks in the question paper may vary slightly
from above table.
The tutorial/practical/exercises should be properly designed and implemented with
an attempt to develop different types of cognitive and psychomotor skills (Outcomes
in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain) so that students are able to acquire
the competencies.
( Any TEN from following )
Sr. Unit Approx.
No. No. Practical Exercises Hrs.
required
1 1 Write Orbital electronic configuration of different elements (First 30 2
elements)
2 2 Verify Faraday’s first Law of electrolysis. 2
3 7 Find the normality & strength in grams per liter of the given solution 2
(NaOH) with the help of standard hydrochloric acid.
4 5 Determine pH value of given solutions, water samples, by using, 2
universal indicator and pH meter.
5 7 Determine the normality & strength of given hydrochloric acid solution 2
by titrating it against standard potassium hydroxide solution.
6 3 Determine percentage of iron from steel by titration method. 2
7 5 Determine the hardness of potable water and boiler feeding water. 2
8 5 Determine the chloride content potable water and boiler feeding water. 2
9 6 Prepare phenol formaldehyde resin. 2
10 7 Determine the acid value of oil sample by neutralization method. 2
60
11 2 Qualitative analysis of given salt solutions, i.e. to determine one acidic For each
and one basic radical from given salt solution. (At least 05 salt salt
solutions.) solution 2
Micro Project ( Any one of following will be opted by a group of 5-6 students)
Sr. Unit
No. No. Practical Exercises
1 1 Prepare power point presentation to show/demonstrate covalent bond, ionic

bond.
2 4 Effect of acid or alkali on rate of corrosion for different metals.
3 5 Study of hard and soft water of different samples of water
4 2 Study of mechanism and working of different batteries.
5 2 Preparation of small scale batteries/ Galvanic cells. Collect chemicals and
material from lab and household and prepare working model of cell.
6 6 Collect different polymers and prepare the chart on the basis of its type,
properties and uses.

a. Verify the properties of different types of compounds used in day to day life.
b. Differentiate properties and uses of different metals.
c. Differentiate composition, properties and application of different alloys.
d. Co-relate the effect of acidic environment with neutral environment.
e. Library survey regarding engineering chemistry topics regarding curriculum.
f. Animated Power point presentation containing current research development
related to topics mentioned in curriculum.
a. Search various sites to teach various topics/sub topics.
b. Instead of the traditional lecture method, use different types of teaching methods
such as improved lecture method, question answer method, laboratory method to
attained specific outcome.
c. Some topics are relatively simpler in nature is to be given to the students for self-
learning by seminar or by classroom presentations
d. Teachers provide theme to create multiple choice questions.
e. Provide super visionary assistance for completion of micro-projects.
Sr.No. Title of Book Author Publication

1 Engineering Chemistry Jain & Jain Dhanpat Rai and Sons Co.
ISBN 9789352160006
2 Engineering Chemistry S. S. Dara S. Chand Publication
ISBN 8121903599
04
3 E Chemistry of Engineering S.N. Narkhede Nirali Prakashan
Materials
61
10. MAJOR EQUIPMENTS/ INSTRUMENTS WITH BROAD

SPECIFICATIONS
Sr. Name of the Equipment Specification
No.
1 pH meter Digital ,Range 0 to 14 with Sensitive Glass electrode
2 Distilled water plant S.S. plant with 15 lit capacity with 2Kv heating coil
3 Kipps’s Apparatus Airtight three section apparatus

4 Electrolytic cell for Battery 24V and 5 Ampere , Rheostat 1000 Ohm,
verification of Faraday’s Wire, Ammeter 0 to 5 Ampere, Copper plate 3” x 6
first law “ inch
11. E-LEARNING RESOURCES

(Please mention complete URL of the E- resourse CO wise)
Sr. Web Address
No.
1 http://www.webelements.com
2 http://www.chemtutor.com
3 http://www.chem1.com
4 https://phet.colorado.edu
5 www.visionlearning.com
6 www.onlinelibrary.wiley.com
7 www.rsc.org
8 www.chemcollective.org
12. POs and PSOs assignment and its strength of assignment with each CO of the
Course
CO. Course Outcome
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
PO10
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
No.
CO1 Draw the orbital configuration

of different elements. 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 Represent the formation of
molecules schematically. 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
CO3 Compare and use different
3 3 - 1 - - - - - - - - -
types of cells.
CO4 Identify the properties of metals
& alloys related to engineering 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
applications.
CO5 Identify the properties of
nonmetallic materials, related
3 3 1 2 - 2 - - - - - - -
to engineering applications.
CO6 Select a proper material for

2 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - -
specific purpose.
62
CO7 Select and use the lubricants at

proper/ specific conditions of 2 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - -
machines.
13. Name and Designation of Course Designer:

faculty member
No
1 Dr. H.R. Shaikh Lecturer in Chemistry, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
2 Dr. Devdatta V. Saraf Lecturer in Chemistry, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
3 Mrs. R.A. Nemade Lecturer in Chemistry, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
4 Mr. P.K. Shewalkar Lecturer in Chemistry, Government Polytechnic, Jalna

63
6G202 GPA WORKSHOP PRACTICE
COURSE TITLE- WORKSHOP PRACTICE

COURSE CODE:-6G202

offered
First/Second
CE/ME/AE/EE/ET/IT/CO
1. RATIONALE
Workshop Practice is a basic engineering course. Diploma Engineers while working at

worksites / in industries, supervises various skilled man power during industrial / site
related process. He is required to be conversant with various skills. These basic skills are
imparted in basic shops like wood working, fitting, welding, plumbing and sheet metal
shop is essential for technician to perform his/her duties in industries. Students are able to
perform various operations using hand tool equipment and machineries in various shops.
Working in workshop develops the attitude of group working and safety awareness. This
course provides industrial environment in the educational institute.
2. COMPETENCY
“Prepare simple jobs on the shop floor of the engineering workshop.”

Scheme Credits
Theory Practical Marks Total Marks
(In Hours) (L+T+P) Marks
T P C ESE PT ESE PA
(OR)
-- 03 03 -- -- -- 50@ 50

64
4. COURSE OUTCOMES-
At the end of this course, students would be able to –
1. Select tools and machinery according to job.

2. Use hand tools in different shops for performing different operation.
3. Operate equipment and machinery in different shops.
4. Prepare job according to drawing.
5. Maintain workshop related tools, equipment and machineries

Unit – I 1a. Follow safety practices 1.1 Safety Practices, Causes of
General Workshop 1b. Explain the procedure for accidents, General safety rules,
Practice extinguishing fire Safety signs and symbols.
1c. Use firefighting equipment 1.2 First Aid
1d. Locate various machines and 1.3 Fire, Causes of Fire, Basic ways
equipment in workshop of extinguishing the fire
1e. Follow good housekeeping. Classification of fire, Class A,
B,C, D, Firefighting equipment,
fire extinguishers, and their types
Workshop Layout
1.4 Issue and return system of tools,
equipment and consumables
Unit– II 2a. Identify fitting tools. 2.1 Fitting hand tools bench vice,
Fitting 2b. Explain operation of fitting hammers, chisels, files, hacksaw,
shop machines surface plate, punch, v block,
angle plate, try square, marking
2c. Use hand tools
block , steel rule, twist drills,
2d. Operate machineries. reamers, tap set, die set and their
2e. Perform fitting operations Specifications
2f. Maintain tools, equipment 2.2 Operation of fitting shops
and machineries. machineries - Drilling machine,
Power saw, grinder their
specifications and maintenance.
2.3 Basic process chipping, filling,
scraping, grinding, marking,
sawing, drilling, tapping, dieing,
reaming etc.
Unit– III 3a. Identify plumbing tools. 3.1 Plumbing hand tools pipe vice,
Plumbing 3b. Explain operation of fitting pipe bending equipment, pipe
shop machines wrenches, dies and their
3c. Use hand tools Specifications
3d. Operate machineries. 3.2 Pipe fittings- bends, elbows, tees,
65
3e. Perform plumbing operations cross, coupler, socket, reducer,

3f. Maintain tools, equipment cap, plug, nipple and their
and machineries. Specifications
3.3 Operation of Machineries in
plumbing shops- pipe bending
machine their specifications and
maintenance.
3.4 Basic process cutting, threading.
Unit– IV 4a. Identify metal joining tools. 4.1 Gas welding hand tools- welding
Metal Joining 4b. Explain gas and arc welding torch, welding tip, pressure
procedure regulator, oxygen and acetylene
cylinders, spark lighter and their
4c. Use hand tools.
Specifications
4d. Perform welding, soldering, 4.2 Arc welding hand tools- electrode
brazing operations holder, cable connector, cable
4e. Maintain tools, equipment lugs, chipping hammer, earthling
and machineries. clamp, wire brush and their
Specifications
4.3 Operation of machineries in
welding shops- arc welding
transformer their specifications
and maintenance.
4.4 Welding Electrode, filler rod,
fluxes, and solders.
4.5 Basic process welding, brazing
and soldering.
Unit– V 5a. Select wood working tools as 5.1 Types of artificial woods such as
Furniture Making per job/ requirement. plywood, block board, hardboard,
5b. Explain operation of wood laminated boards, Veneer, fiber
working machines Boards and their applications.
5c. Use hand tools 5.2 Wood working hand tools
5d. Operate machineries. carpentry vice, marking and
5e. Perform wood working measuring tools, saws, claw
operations hammer, mallet, chisels, plans,
5f. Maintain tools, equipment squares, and their specifications
and machineries. 5.3 Operation of wood working
machineries - Wood turning lathe,
circular saw, their specifications
and maintenance.
5.4 Basic process- marking, sawing,
planning, chiseling, turning,
grooving, boring.
Unit–VI 6a. Identify sheet metal tools. 6.1 Sheet metal hand tools snip,
Sheet Metal 6b. Explain operation of sheet shears sheet gauge, straight edge,
metal machineries. L square, scriber, divider,
6c. Use hand tools trammel, punches, pliers, stakes,
6d. Operate sheet metal groovers, limit set and their
66
machineries.Specifications
6e. Perform bending operations
6.2 Operation of machineries in sheet
6f. Maintain tools, equipment
metal shops- sheet cutting and
and machineries.
bending machine their
specifications and maintenance.
6.3 Basic process-marking, bending,
folding, edging, seaming, staking,
riveting.
6. SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH HOURS AND MARKS (Practical)

No. Hours
R U A Total
Marks
Level Level Level
I General Workshop Practice 03 01 01 03 05
II Fitting 12 - 03 06 09
III Plumbing 06 - 02 07 09
IV Metal Joining 09 01 02 06 09
V Furniture Making 09 - 02 07 09
VI Sheet Metal 09 - 02 07 09
Total 48 02 12 36 50

Bloom’s taxonomy)

No. Hrs.
No. (Outcomes in Psychomotor Domain)
required
1 I Perform mock drill session in group of minimum 10 students for 03

extinguishing fire.
67
2 II Prepare job involving marking, punching, sawing, chamfering, 09

drilling, tapping operations as per given drawing. (simple job
individually)
3 III Prepare plumbing job as per given drawing (individually) 06
4 III Prepare black smithy job involving cutting, bending, drawing/ 06

upsetting operations as per drawing (individually)
5 IV Prepare lap joint/butt joint using arc welding as per given 06

drawing (individually)
6 IV Prepare utility job/ different working joints involving wood work 12

& V as per given drawing (in group of 4 to 5 students)
7 VI Prepare sheet cutting, bending, edging, end curling, lancing, 06

soldering and riveting operations. (in group of 4 to 5 students)
Total 48

1. Prepare work diary based on practical performed in workshop. Work diary consist
of job drawing, operations to be perform, required raw materials, tools,
equipments, date of performance with teacher signature.
2. Prepare journals consist of free hand sketches of tools and equipments in each
shop, detail specification and precautions to be observed while using tools and
equipment.
3. Prepare/Download a specifications of followings:
a) Various tools and equipment in various shops.
b) Precision equipment in workshop
c) Various machineries in workshop
4. Undertake a market survey of local dealers for procurement of workshop tools,
equipment machineries and raw material.
5. Visit any fabrication/wood working/sheet metal workshop and prepare a report.
68
1. Demonstration

No.
1. Workshop Practice Bawa, H.S. McGraw Hill

Education,Noida;
ISBN-10: 0070671192
ISBN-13: 978-0070671195
2. A Textbook of Gupta, S.Chandand Co. New

Manufacturing Process J.K.;Khurmi,R.S. DelhiISBN:81-219-3092-8
(Workshop Tech.)
3. Workshop Practice Hegde, R.K. Sapna Book House, 2012,

Manual For Engineering ISBN:13: 9798128005830
Diploma & ITI Students
4. Introduction to Basic Singh, Rajender New Age International, New

Manufacturing Process & Delhi; 2014, ISBN: 978-81-
Workshop Technology 224-3070-7
S. Equipment Name with Broad Specifications Experiment

No. S.No.
1 Fire buckets with stand of medium size I, II, III,
IV,V, VI
2 Fire extinguisher A,B and C types I, II, III,
IV,V, VI
3 Wood Turning Lathe Machine, Height of Centre: 200mm, Distance II
between Centers: 1200mm, Spindle Bore: 20mm with Taper, Range of
Speeds: 425 to 2800 with suitable Motor Drive. with all accessories
4 Circular Saw Machine, Diameter of saw blade 200 mm, Maximum Depth II
of Cut 50 mm, Table Size -350 x 450 mm, Table Tilting - 450
5 Wood working tools- marking and measuring tools, saws, claw hammer, II
mallet, chisels, plans, squares,
6 Carpentry Vice 200 mm II
69
7 Work Benches- size:1800 x 900 x 750 mm III

8 Bench Drilling machine (up to 13 mm drill cap.) with ½ H.P. Motor 1000 III
mm. Height.
9 Power Saw machine 350 mm mechanical with 1 HP Motor & all III
Accessories.
10 Bench Grinder 200 mm Grinding Disc diameter 200 mm. with 25 mm. III
bore 32 mm. with ½ HP/1HP Motor.
11 Vernier height Gauge 450 mm III
12 Surface Plate 600 x 900 mm Grade I III
13 Angle Plate 450 x 450 mm III
14 Welding machine 20 KVA 400A welding current 300A at 50, 100, 200, IV
250, 300 with std. Accessories and Welding Cable 400 amp. ISI with
holder
15 Oxygen and acetylene gas welding and cutting kit with cylinders and IV
regulators.
16 Pipe Bending Machine IV
17 Pipe Vice – 100 mm IV
18 Pipe Cutter- 50 mm IV
19 Bench Vice 100 mm II,III,IV,V,VI
20 II, III, IV,V,
Portable Hammer Drill Machine 0-13 mm VI
A.C. 230 V, 2.5Amp, Pistol type, having different types of bits
21 Sheet Bending Machine VI
22 Sheet Cutting Machine VI
23 Brazing Equipment VI
24 Fitting tools - hammers, chisels, files, hacksaw, surface plate, punch, v III
block, angle plate, try square, marking block, steel rule, twist drills,
reamers, tap set, die set.
25 Plumbing tools-pipe vice, pipe bending equipment, pipe wrenches dies. IV
26 Gas welding hand tools- welding torch, welding tip, pressure regulator, V
oxygen and acetylene cylinders, spark lighter
27 Arc welding hand tools- electrode holder, cable connector, cable lugs, V
chipping hammer, earthing clamp, wire brush.
28 Sheet metal hand tools-snip, shears sheet gauge, straight edge, L square, VI
scriber, divider, trammel, punches, pliers, stakes, groovers, limit set
12. E-learning recourses

(Please mention complete URL of the E- recourse CO wise)
1. http://www.asnu.com.au
2. http://www.abmtools.com/downloads/Woodworking%20Carpentry%20Tools.pdf
3. http://www.weldingtechnology.org
70
4. http://www.newagepublishers.com/samplechapter/001469.pdf
5. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TeBX6cKKHWY
6. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QHF0sNHnttw&feature=related
7. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Kv1zo9CAxt4&feature=relmfu
8. http://www.piehtoolco.com
9. http://sourcing.indiamart.com/engineering/articles/materials-used-hand-tools/
10. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9_cnkaAbtCM
CO. Course Outcome P P P P P P P P P P PS PS

NO. O O O O O O O O O O O O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
Prepare simple jobs on the shop floor
1 2 3 3 1 - 1 2 2 2 3
CO 1 of the engineering workshop
Select tools and machinery 1 2 3 3 1 - 1 2 2 2 2

CO 2 according to job
Use hand tools in different shop for 1 2 3 3 1 - 1 2 2 2 3
CO 3 performing different operation.
Operate equipment and machinery in 1 2 3 3 1 - 1 2 2 2 3 3
CO 4 different shops
Prepare job according to drawing 1 2 3 3 1 - 1 2 2 2
CO 5
Maintain workshop related tools, 1 2 3 3 1 - 1 2 2 2 3
CO 6 equipment and machineries

No faculty members
1 D.V.Tammewar Workshop Superitendent
2 Dr.U.V.Pise Head of Mechanical Engineering
71
6S202 GPA ELE OF ELECT. & ELECTRI. ENGG
COURSE TITLE- ELEMENTS OF ELECTRONICS & ELECTRICAL

ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE 6S202

offered
Computer Engg and Information Technology Second
1. RATIONALE
It is necessary for the students of Computer Engineering and Information Technology to study and
apply the basic principles, analyze and troubleshoot simple subsystems. To acquire this level of
understanding, the basic knowledge of electronic devices and circuits is essential. Electrical engineering
involves the conception, design, development, & production of the electrical or electronic products &
systems needed by our technological society. This Course is one of the core subjects which is deals with
construction, working principle of electronic devices, Electric circuits, different electrical machines with
application of active components.
2. COMPETENCY
Apply the basic electronic testing and fault finding of electronic and electrical components
and circuits.

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE @ PA
L T P C ESE PT
(OR) (TW)
- 2 06 80 20 25@ 25 150
4
Duration of the Examination (Hrs) 3 1 -- --
72

4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Identify electronic components in given electronic circuit.
2. Select particular diode for different rectifier application, Filters and Regulator Circuits.
3. Distinguish the functioning of Uni-polar devices & Bi-polar Junction Transistor.
4. Use of electric machines & instruments for computer application
5. Select the need and application of protective devices

Unit – I 1a. Differentiate between active 1.1 Active and passive components, Voltage
and passive electronic components and Current Source, Symbols of various
Electronic Semiconductor Components.
1b. Differentiate between voltage 1.2 Amplitude, Frequency, Phase,
Components
and current source. Wavelength, Signal, waveform, Time
and Signals and frequency domain representation,
1c. Explain the different types of Types of Signals: sinusoidal, triangular
signal Parameters with sketches. and square
1.3 Integrated Circuits – Analog and digital
1d. Differentiate various types of
ICs.
Unit– II 2a.Describe V-I characteristics of 2.1 Symbol , construction and working
PN junction diode with sketches principle of P-N junction diode
Diodes and
2b.Describe the application of PN 2.2 Need of rectifiers,Half wave, Full
Applications
Junction diode. wave and Bridge Rectifier, Working and
block diagram of regulated power
2c. Describe the working and supply,Need of filters,‘L’, ‘C’ and ‘π’' Filter
applications of Zener diode. working.
2d. Describe V-I characteristics of 2.3 Zener diode, Zener diode as voltage
Zener diode.
Regulator, Symbol , construction and
2e. Describe the applications of working principle and V-I characteristics of
Light Emitting Diode
73
LED.
2f.Compare -1.Types of Rectifiers
2.Types of Filters
Unit– III 3a. Differentiate unipolar and 3.1 Introduction to Unipolar and Bipolar
bipolar devices. devices
Bipolar junction
3b.Describe the applications of 3.2 symbol, construction and working
Transistor transistor. principle of NPN transistor, Transistor as
switch and amplifier,Input and Output
& Field Effect 3c. Determine the effect of Current characteristics of CE,CB and CC
Transistors(BJT gain on the performance of the configurations, Regions – Cut-off, saturation
& FET) transistor. and Active region,Transistor parameters-
3d. List specifications and ratings alpha, beta, input and output resistance and
of BJT relation between alpha and beta
3e. Describe the applications of 3.3FET-Types(JFET and

JFET and MOSFET. MOSFET),Classification of JFET,Symbol,
construction and working principle of N-
3.f Differentiate BJT and JFET. channel and P-channel JFET
Unit – IV 4a. State and explain Ohm’s law. 4.1 Current, Voltage- EMF and Resistance,
Electric Circuit 4b. Explain different Circuit Ohm’s Law, Equivalent resistance of
Fundamentals & condition. resistors connected in series and
Machines 4c. Apply Kirchoff’s law in parallel.,Circuit conditions – open,
different circuit. close and short circuit, Kirchhoff’s
4d. Give characteristics of voltage and current laws,Power and
Inductance & Capacitance. Energy, Meters used to measure
4e. Analyze Series and Parallel Current.
combination of circuits Practical 4.2 Voltage, Resistance,inductance and
examples of these circuits. capacitance Power and Energy, Simple
4f. Describe the working principle problems on ohm’s and kirchoff’s law.
of DC generator and alternator 4.3DC generator and alternator, Classification
4g. Classify induction motors of induction motors,Construction, working
4h Describe the working principle,Squirrel cage and wound rotor
Principle of given induction motor
induction motor
Unit– V 6a.Describe the construction of a 6.1 General construction and principle of
Transformer simple transformer. Transformers., Emf equation and
and 6b. Describe the types and uses of transformation ratio
protective transformers of transformers,Applications of Transformers,
devices 6c.List the types of transformers Construction and uses of auto transformers.
used in various devices 6.2 Different protective devices such as
6d.State the differences of MCB and fuse, M.C.B. and ELCB. HRC
ELCB fuses,Uninterruptible Power Supplies
74
6e.State the need of HRC fuses. (UPS),Protecting computer system against

6f.Explain how to protecting power transients,Earthing principles and pipe
computer against power transient. earthing
6g. Describe how earthing is done
for a domestic building
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
Electronic Components
I 08 04 04 02 10
and Signals
Diodes and
II 16 04 06 10 20
Applications
Bipolar junction Transistor

III & Field Effect 16 02 08 10 20
Transistors(BJT & FET)
IV Electric Circuit Fundamentals 14 04 06 08 18

& Machines
V Transformer and 10 02 04 06 12
protective devices
Total 64 16 28 34 80
Sr.
No.
I Measure parameters like amplitude, time period, frequency of 02
1 sine wave and square wave using CRO and Function
Generator
I Measure the value of the resistance by using (i) Analog and 02

2 Digital Multi-meters and (ii) by Colour coding.
75
3 II Test the working of PN junction diode. 02
4 II Test the working of Zener diode. 02
II Use rectifiers to convert AC signal into DC signal using Half 04

5 wave and Full wave rectifier. Use of filters to get regulated
DC.
6 II Use rectifiers to convert AC signal into DC signal using 04
Bridge rectifier. Use of filters to get regulated DC.
7 II Test the working of Zener regulator. 02
III Check input and output characteristics of NPN Transistor in 04

8
CE Mode.
9 III Measure voltage between terminals of AC/DC. 02
10 IV Apply ohm’s law experimentally in a given circuit. 02
11 IV Apply Kirchhoff’s current& voltage law in a given circuit. 02
12 VI Measure input & output quantities of single phase transformer. 02
13 VI Measure ratings of various Protective devices. 02
TOTAL 32

1. Prepare journals based on practical performed in laboratory.
2. Study of datasheet of electronic components.
3. Prepare charts of symbols of Electronic components.
4. Search information about Ratings and specifications of Regulator, diode transistors, CRO,
function generator.
5. List analog and digital ICs and prepare charts of the same.
6. Students may be asked to make a list of following items used in electric and electronics
circuits. Comparetheir properties, usage, cost and availability. Collections can be made
for small inexpensive items. Each of thesecan be offered as a project.
a. Conductors - Copper, Aluminum, Graphite, Carbon, Nichrome, Tin
b. Commonly used insulators
c. Transistors
d. Capacitors
76
e. Resistors
f. Diodes and Rectifiers
g. Transformers
h. SCRs, TRIACs, DIACs
i. LEDs, LCDs
j. Devices for industrial and residential illumination
k. Heaters and furnaces
l. Motors and Alternators
m. Switches, micro-switches and relays
n. Soldering, desoldering, welding devices and equipment.
o. Fans, Blowers and pumps
p. Smoke detectors, fire alarms used in electrical/electronics installations.
q.High voltage devices and equipment used and their safety features.
r. To study three phase induction motor parts & their identification & Study the UPS used in the
electrical/electronics laboratory.
outcomes.

2. Guide students in searching information regarding datasheets and electronic components.
4. Show Flash/Video/Animation clippings for functioning of instruments.
1. A text book of Applied R.S.Sedha S.Chand & Co., latest

Electronics edition
2. Electronics Principles Albert Paul Malvino McGraw Hill, latest

edition
3. Principles Of Electronics V.K.Mehta S.Chand & Co., latest

edition
Rohit Mehata
77
4. B.L Theraja Electrical Technology S. Chand & Co.

Vol. I & II
5. Prasad P.V and Electrical Cengage Learning India,
Sivanagaraju S. Engineering:Concepts and New Delhi, 2012
Applications
6 V. N. Mittle Basic Electrical Tata McGraw Hill, New
Engineering
.
S.
No.
1. Single/Dual regulated Power supply. As per Electronics and Electrical

industry specification
2. Digital multimeter and ammeter, micro- As per Electronics and Electrical

ammeter. industry specification
3. Dual trace CRO/DSO. As per Electronics and Electrical

4. Function generator. As per Electronics and Electrical

5. Trainer kits / breadboard for Rectifiers, As per Electronics and Electrical

regulator, Transistors, JFET and RC industry specification
coupled single / two stage amplifiers.
a. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/122104013/
b. http://www.electronics-tutorials
c. https://learn.sparkfun.com/tutorials/transistors
d. http://www.pitt.edu/~qiw4/Academic/ME2082/Transistor%20Basics.pdf
e. http://faculty.cord.edu/luther/physics225/Handouts/transistors_handout.pdf
f. http://www.technologystudent.com/elec1/transis1.htm
g. http://www.learningaboutelectronics.com/Articles/N-channel-JFET
h. http://www.electrical4u.com/jfet-or-junction-field-effect-transistor
i. http://www.electrical-technologies.com/
j. http://electrical4u.com/
k. http://www.electronics-tutorials
l. http://www.animations.physics.unsw.edu.au//jw/AC.html
78

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Identify electronic 1 - 1 - - - - - - - - -
components.
2 Use diodes in different 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 - -

applications
3 Test the functioning of 1 - 2 - - - - - - - - -

of uni-polar devices &
Bi-polar Junction
Transistor.
4 Measure the electric 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
circuits fundamentals
& Use the electric
machines for computer
application
5 Identify the need and - - - - 1 1 - - - - - -
use of protective
devices

No faculty members
2 Pawan Lahoti Lecturer in Computer Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic,Aurangabad
3 Nilophar Masuldar Lecturer in Computer Engineering, Govt Polytechnic, Aurangabad
79
6S204 GPA ‘C’ Programming
COURSE TITLE- „C‟ PROGRAMMING (CP)

COURSE CODE 6S204

offered
COMPUTER ENGINEERING SECOND SEMESTER
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
1. RATIONALE
This Course intends to develop programming skills in the students, using a popular
structured programming language `C'. The students will learn step by step procedure (i.e.
flowcharting &Algorithm) of any program development process. The programming skills thus
acquired can be used for developing programs with advance level programming features which in
turn will be helping in developing practical applications for the scientific, research and business
purposes.
2. LIST OF COMPETENCIES
At the end learning this course student will be able to:
“Develop structured, modular and memory efficient programs in „C‟ using arrays,
functions, pointers.”

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR) (TW)
150
3 - 4 7 80 20 #25 25
Duration of the Examination (Hrs) 3 1 2 --
80
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of learning this course students will be able to: -
1. Develop algorithm and Draw the flowchart for ‘C’ Programming.

2. Develop a program using decision and loop statement.
3. Implement program using array.
4. Use functions and pointer in given problem statement.
5. Create structure for different data type in one head.

UNIT-I 1a. Draw flow chart to solve 1.1 Introduction to C and
Basics of c programming given problem logically. General structure of ‘C’
1b. Develop Algorithm to solve program
given program. 1.2 Features and Advantages of
1c. Comprehend general C language.
structure of ‘C’ program 1.3 Character set, ‘C’ tokens
1d. Declare and define variables Keywords and Identifiers
1e. Write and execute simple 1.4 Constants and Variables
program in ‘C’ Data Types
1f. Use arithmetic, relational 1.5 Modifiers and type
and logical operators for conversion
forming expressions. 1.6 Input and Output statements
1g. Format input and output in ‘C’
using ‘C’ statements. 1.7 Types of Operators and
Expression: Arithmetic,
Relational ,Assignment,
Logical, conditional
operators and expressions,
Write, compile, execute a
simple ‘C’ program
UNIT-II 2a. Develop programs using 2.1 Decision Statements
Control and loop decision making statements 2.2 Unconditional branching:
statements in ‘C’ language. goto statement
2b. Develop programs using 2.3 Conditional branching
structured loop control statements: If statement, If-
statements in ‘C’ language else statement, Nested If
else statement
81
2.4 If-else-if Ladder statement

2.5 Break, continue and goto
statements, switch
statements
2.6 Loop Control Statements:
for loop, While loop, Do-
while loop
UNIT-III 3a. Declare and define array. 3.1 Array definition and
Introduction to Array 3b. Develop programs using Declaration
array in ‘C’ language 3.2 Concept of one dimensional
3c. Develop, debug and execute and two dimensional array
programs which use 3.3 Accessing and initialization
reading, writing and an array
manipulating Arrays. 3.4 Characteristics of an array
3d. Describe string function 3.5 Introduction of String
3.6 Declaration and
Initialization of String
3.7 gets(), puts() functions in
<String.h>: such as strlen(),
strcmp(), strcpy(). Strrev(),
strcat() and all.
UNIT-IV 4a. Develop, debug and execute 4.1 Introduction and Features
Pointer and Function modular programs by writing of Pointers
and using Functions 4.2 Declaration of Pointer,
4b. Develop, debug and execute Pointer initialization,
programs using Pointers pointer arithmetic operation
4c. Declare and initialize pointer 4.3 Array using pointer and
array of pointers.
4.4 Basics of Functions, Built-
in and user defined
functions
4.5 Advantages of using
Functions
4.6 Working of a Function
4.7 Declaring, Defining and
calling user defined
Functions
4.8 Types of functions: i) no
return type no argument list
ii) no return type with
82
argument list iii) return

type no argument list iv)
return type with argument
list.
4.9 Call by Value and call by
Reference and recursive
function
UNIT-V 5a. Implement program for 5.1 Introduction and Features
Structure and Union different Data types under a of Structures
single structure 5.2 Definition and
Declaration of Structures
5b. Describe array of structure
5.3 Memory allocation of
and pointer to structure. structure
5c. Describe union with its use 5.4 Array of Structures and
5d. Utilize memory effectively Pointers to Structure
using Union 5.5 Nested structure.
5.6 Declaration of Union, its
use and how to access it
5.7 Create dynamic memory
using <malloc.h> for
structure variable.
Unit Unit Title Teaching Distribution of Theory

Marks
No. Hours
R U A Total
I Basics of c programming 08 3 5 6 14
II Control and loop statements 10 3 5 8 16
III Introduction to Array 08 4 4 6 14
IV Pointer and Function 12 4 6 10 20
V Structure and Union 10 4 6 6 16
Total 48 18 26 36 80

Bloom’s Taxonomy)
83
The exercises/practical/experiments should be properly designed and implemented with an

attempt to develop different types of skills leading to the achievement of the competency.
Following is the list of exercises/practical/experiments for guidance.
Approx.
Hrs.
required
1. 1 Draw Flow Chart and write algorithm for at least four 2
problems.
2. 1 i. Write programs using Constants, Variables & arithmetic 2

expression.
ii. Write program to calculate average of numbers using
arithmetic operators
3. 1 Execute programs to create variable with different data types, 2
Type modifiers and Type conversion.
4. 1 Execute programs providing insight to formatted and 2

unformatted input and output in c
5. 1 Execute programs providing understanding of Relational 2

operators.
6. 1 Execute programs using logical and bitwise operators. 2
7. 2 Make programs using If, If-else, If-else-if and Nested If 4

statements.
8. 2 Make programs using break, continue, goto and switch 4

statements.
9. 2 Execute programs to understand simple For loop and nested 4

loops.
10. 2 Execute programs using While Loop and nested while loop. 2
11. Execute programs using Do-while Loop and nested Do-while 2

loop.
84
Approx.
Hrs.
required
12 3 i. Execute program to display 1-D and 2-D array. 4
ii. Execute programs on arrays. (Sorting, finding particular
value etc.)
3 Execute a program for matrix addition. 2
13 Execute a program for matrix multiplication 2
14 3 Execute programs using String functions 2
strlen(), strcpy, strcmp(), strlwr(),strupr(), strchr(), strcat()
15 4 Execute a program for math and other functions like sqrt(), 2

pow(), ceil(),round(), sin(), cos(), tan(), div(), abs() etc
16 4 Execute programs using functions and passing function 4

arguments.
17 4 Execute programs for pointer. 2
18 4 Execute programs using recursive Functions. 2
19 4 Execute program for call by reference 2
20 5 Execute and execute programs with various features 2
of Structures
21 5 Execute program for structure using pointer 4
22 5 Execute program for array of structure. 2
23 5 Execute program for structure within structure 2
24 5 Execute and execute programs using Union 2
25 5 Execute and execute programs for creating memory for 2

structure variable using <malloc.h>
Total 64
85
LIST OF PROPOSED ACTIVITY:

1. Students will prepare file for the above mentioned Practical
2. Prepare presentation and deliver seminar on various topics covered like String functions,
Pointers, Arrays, File Functions, Structures and Unions,
3. Students are expected to develop minimum one program of particular topic as an example
to exhibit real life application.
outcomes.
a. Improved Lecture methods-
b. Q & A technique.
c. Demonstration
d. Seminars
e. Activity based learning
List of Books
Sr.No Author Title of Books Publication
1 Kamthane,A.N. Programming in ‘C Pearson,2012
2 Balaguruswami,E. Programming in ANSI C TMH,2012
3 Kanetkar, Yashavant Let us 'C' BPB publications,2010
11. List of Major Equipment/ Software

S.
No.
1 Desktop Computer i5 processor or higher,4gb RAM
2 C compiler TurboC3 or latest version
86
12. List of Software/Learning Websites
1. ‘C’ Programming Language: http://www.w3schools.in/cprogramming- language/intro/

2. Learn C Online: http://www.learnconline.com/
3. ‘C’ Frequently Asked Questions: http://www.c-faq.com
4. ‘C’ Programming: http://www.cprogramming.com
5. Sams Teach Yourself C in 24 Hours: http://aelinik.free.fr/c/

CO. Course Outcome POs PSOS

NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
Develop algorithm and flowchart 1 - 2 3 - - - - - - 1 1

1 for ‘C’ Programming
Develop a program using decision - - 3 3 - - - - - - 2 2
2 and loop statement
Implement program using array. - 1 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2
3
Comprehend and use the concept of - 1 3 3 - - - - - - 2 2
4 functions and pointer.
Create structure for different data - 2 1 1 - - - - - - 2 2

5 type in one head
Open a file using ‘C’ Program. - 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 2

6
Sr Name of the faculty Designation and Institute

No members
1 Ms. R.S.Sindge LIT, P.L.Govt. Polytechnic, Latur
2 Ms. V.B. Kundlikar LIT, Govt. Polytechnic,Aurangabad
87
6S205 GPA STATIC WEB PAGE DESIGING LAB
COURSE TITLE- STATIC WEB PAGE DESIGING LANGUAGE

COURSE CODE 6S205
PROGRAM & SEMESTER
Diploma Programmes in which this Semester in which offered

course is offered
Computer Engineering / Information 2nd Semester
Tech.
1. RATIONALE:
this is basic level course aims at static web page desinging. World Wide Web is the basic
technology for e-commerce and HTML is the medium for creating web pages. This language
required for developing online educational applications such as organizational websites,
educational website, virtual learning environments etc. and business applications in various
fields such as products sale, banking, railways reservation, services etc.
2. COMPETENCY STATEMENT:
“Develop and host a static website using Hyper Text Markup Language with web
technology features like Cascading Style Sheets etc.”
3. TEACHING SCHEME
Examination Scheme (Marks)

Teaching Scheme Total
Total
(Hours/Credits) Credits Theory Mark Practical Mark
Marks
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR) (TW)
100
0 0 2 2 0 0 @50 50
Legends : L-Lecture; T-Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice ; P- Practical; C-

Credits; ESE- End Semester Examination; PT – Progressive Test, PA- Progressive
Assessment, OR – Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal
4. LEARNING OUTCOME
1. Select Static and Dynamic Web Pages.
2. Design web pages using basic HTML tags.
88
3. Design web pages containing hyperlink and different images.

4. Design web pages having frame consisting of table.
5. Design any kind of registration form.
6. Design and develop web pages using CSS styles, internal and/or external style sheets
5. DETAILED COURSE CONTENT
Major Learning
Unit Outcomes (in cognitive Topics and Sub-topics
domain )
Unit – I 1a.Identify website 1.1 Information about web site, web page,
Website development essentials. Web Browsers and their types.
Development 1.2 Working of different types of Web
Essentials Pages, General structure of a Web Page,
Scripting languages, URL, Popular
Search Engines, WWW.
1.3 Static Web Pages, Dynamic Web Pages
Unit -II 2a.Use basic HTML tags 2.1 Introduce Web page structure and basic
Introduction structure tags: !DOCTYPE, HTML,
to HTML HEAD, TITLE, BODY with attributes.
2.2 Block Level Tags: Headings, aragraphs,
Breaks, Divisions, Centered Text, Block
Quotes, Preformatted text, HR tag.
2.3 Text Level Tags: Bold, Italic, Teletype,
Underline, Strikethrough, Superscript,
Subscript DIV Tag, Font Tag.
2.4 Lists: Ordered Lists, unordered Lists,
Definition Lists, and Nested Lists.
Unit III: 3a.linking of documents 3.1 URL: Types of URLs, Absolute URLs,
Linking and images for given Relative URLs.
Documents required link. 3.2 Anchor Tag: Linking various documents
& Including for internal and external links, Marquee
Images Tag.
3.3 Image Formats: GIF,JPEG, BMP &
PNG
3.4 Adding Image using Image tag, setting
an image as background
Unit IV: 4a.use tables with given 4.1 TABLE tag with attributes. TABLE, TR,
Developing formatting. TH, TD tags, border, cell spacing, cell
Table & padding, width, align, bgcolor attributes.
Creating 4.2 Types of Frames with their attributes
Frame Creating frames: FRAMESET tag –
rows, cols attributes.
4.3 FRAME tag –name, frame border,
margin height, margin width, src, resize,
89
scrolling attributes. Use of NOFRAMES

tag, Frame targeting.
Unit V: 5a.design forms for given 5.1 Creating basic form: FORM tag, action
Developing systems and method attributes.
HTML 5.2 Form fields: Single line text field,
Forms password field, multiple line text area,
radio buttons, and check boxes.
5.3 Pull down menus: SELECT and
OPTION tags.
5.4 Buttons: submit, reset and generalized
buttons.
Unit VI: 6a.make use of style sheets 6.1 Introduce Style Sheets with different
Introduction types.
to Style 6.2 Adding style to the document: Linking to
sheets. style sheets, Embedding style sheets,
Using inline style.
6.3 Selectors: CLASS rules, ID rules.
6.4 Style sheet properties: font, text, box,
color and background properties.

(THEORY)
No. /
Practical R U A Total
Hours Marks
Level Level Level
I Website Development Essentials 06
II Introduction to HTML 12
III Linking Documents & Including 12

Images NOT APPLICABLE
IV Developing Table & Creating 10
Frame
V Developing HTML Forms 14
VI Introduction to Style sheets. 10
Legends: R = Remembrance; U= Understanding; A= Application and above levels (Revised

Bloom’s taxonomy)
90
Approx.
Hrs.
required
1 1 Study different static web site & dynamic web site. 02
2 2 Design a basic web pages using structure tag for displaying 02

“My First Web Page” message.
3 2 Create a HTML document giving details of your [Name, Age], 02
[Address, Phone] and [Register Number, Class] aligned in
proper order using alignment attributes of Paragraph tag and
different heading style
4 2 Create a page to show different character formatting (B, I, U, 02
SUB, SUP) tags.
viz :logb m p = p logb m
5 2 Create a web page, showing an ordered list and unordered list of 02
all second semester courses (Subjects).
6 3 Create a web page to link web page in the same directory, 02
different
Directory, in a subdirectory of a parent directory, any other
directory, and link to Email ID.
7 3 Write a HTML code to create a web page with pink colour 02
background and display moving message in red colour.
8 3 Write HTML code to create a WebPage that contains an Image 02
at its centre.
9 3 Create a web page with an appropriate image towards the left 02
hand side of the page, when user clicks on the image another
web page should open.
10 4 Create a web page implementing all formatting and table tags. 02
Reg. Student Date of
Year/Semester
Number Name Admission
11 4 Create a web page implements no. of frame in a single web 02

page
FRAME-1 FRAME-2
FRAME-3
12 5 Create a web page for students Registration form using FORM 04

tags.
91
Approx.
Hrs.
required
13 5 Write a program to demonstrate the use of GET, POST, 02

developing a Feedback form with the use of <form> and
<button> HTML tags.
14 6 Create a web page for demonstration of CSS applying 02
Internal/External/Inline style.
15 6 develop a CSS program to set an image as the background 02
Total 32
8. SUGGESTED LIST OF STUDENT ACTIVITIES

 Analyze any 5 different website.
 Create our own website using online available templates.
 Develop a static website consisting of minimum five web pages usingDreamweaver
Sr.
Author Title of Book Publication
No.
1 Duckett Jon Beginning Web Programming with Wrox, 2008

HTML,XHTML & CSS
2 Thomas Powell HTML and XHTML –The complete Tata McGraw Hill,
reference New
3 Robbins Design Learning Web O’Reilly
4 Dick Oliver SAMS Teach Yourself HTML & CSS in Pearson Education
24 Hours Publication
10. LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENTS
Computer System with latest configuration & Dreamweaver software
11. SOFTWARE/LEARNING WEBSITES

1. http://www.w3schools.com/html
2. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/html/
3. http://www.html.net/
4. http://www.2createawebsite.com
5. http://webdesign.about.com
6. https://www.codecademy.com/learn/web
92
CO. Course Outcome POS PSOs

NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
Explain the Difference between
1 Static and Dynamic Web Pages. - 2 2 - - - - - - - - -
Design web pages using basic

2 HTML tags. - 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - -
Design web pages containing

3 hyperlink and different images. - 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - -
Design web pages having frame

4 consisting of table. - 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - -
Design any kind of registration

5 form. - 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - -
Design and develop web pages

6 using CSS styles, internal and/or - 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - -
external style sheets.

No members
1 Mr. P.B.Lahoti LCO, Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
2 Ms. P.S. Sadafule LCO, Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
2 Ms. V.B. Kundlikar LIT, Govt. Polytechnic,Aurangabad
93
6G302 GPA COMMUNICATION SKILLS
COURSE TITLE : COMMUNICATION SKILLS

COURSE CODE : 6G302

All Branches of Diploma in Engineering and Technology Second Semester
1. RATIONALE
Proficiency in communication skills is one of the prime needs of diploma
engineer/ technician who has to communicate all the time with peers, superiors, sub-
ordinates and clients in his professional life. The need of acquiring effective
communication skills is more essential. As the world is shrinking into a global village
with the new technologies, technically sound diploma holders may be a quality human
resource, if their communicative abilities are shaped properly. Therefore, this course is
designed to develop the ability of students to stand as a skilled and effective
communicator with employability skills.
2. COMPETENCY
“Communicate effectively at workplaces.”

Scheme Credits Theory Marks Practical Marks Total Marks
(In Hours) (L+T+P)
L T P C ESE PT ESE(OR) PA
TOTAL
MARKS
1 0 2 3 - - @25 50 75
Exam Duration - - - -
(*): Out of 50 marks, 10 marks -micro-project assessment; 40 marks-progressive
assessments
Legends: L-Lecture; T – Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice; P -Practical; C –
Credit, ESE -End Semester Examination; PA - Progressive Test; OR-Oral examination
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Express new ideas effectively.
2. Select suitable type of communication in different situations.
3. Avoid communication barriers for effective communication.
4. Use appropriate body language to communicate effectively.
5. Formulate various ways to face interview effectively.
6. Draft different types of business letters, notices, memoranda and E-mails using
correct formats.
94
5. COURSE DETAILS
Outcomes
UNIT-I 1a. Describe significance of 1.1. Definition, importance
Introduction to Communication. 1.2. Communication cycle /
communication 1b. Describe the elements of process
communication. 1.3. Elements of
1c. Explain the cycle & Communication
process of communication.
1d. Identify the various
communication situations.
UNIT-II 2a.Identify the types of 2.1. Verbal-nonverbal , formal-
Types of communication. informal, upward-downward,
communication 2b.Explain the types of horizontal-diagonal
communication. communication
UNIT -III 3a.Explain the principles of 3.1.Effective Communication
Principles of effective communication. 3.2.Barriers to communication
communication 3b.Illustrate principles of & ways to overcome them
effective communication.
3c. Describe
communication barriers.
3d. Identify the types of
communication barriers.
3e. Select ways to
overcome communication
barriers.
UNIT-IV 4a. Understanding non- 4.1.Non-verbal codes
Non -Verbal verbal communication. 4.2.Aspects of body language
Communication 4b. Know the uses of body 4.3. Pictorial representation
language.
4c. Uses of pictorial
representations.
UNIT –V 5a. Listening& 5.1.Listening skills
Interview Techniques comprehending the passage. 5.2.Stress management
5b. Having presence of 5.3.facing oral communication
mind.
5c. Managing stress.
5d. Facing viva.
UNIT-VI 6a. Correct format with 6.1.Business Letters: Enquiry,
Formal Written Skills correct language. Order, Complaint, Adjustment,
6b. Identify the types of Seeking Permission etc.
letters.
6c.Applying different
techniques of drafting
letters.
95
(THEORY)

I Introduction to 03 NA NA NA NA
Communication
II Types of 02 NA NA NA NA
communication
III Principles of 03 NA NA NA NA
Effective
Communication
IV Non-verbal 03 NA NA NA NA
communication
V Interview 02 NA NA NA NA
Techniques
VI Formal written 03 NA NA NA NA
skills
teachers. The actual distribution of marks in the question paper may vary slightly from
above table.
The tutorial/practical/exercises should be properly designed and implemented with an
attempt to develop different types of cognitive and practical skills (Outcomes in
cognitive, psycho-motor and affective domain) so that students are able to acquire the
competencies.
S. Unit No. Practical Exercises Approx. Hrs.

No. (Outcomes in Psychomotor Domain) required
1 I & II Identify the elements of communication 04
cycle with three Suitable examples.
2 II Deliver two short and long prepared 04
speeches.
3 III Present a role-play. 04
4 III Form a group of four students and make a 04
group discussion on current issues and
summarize it.
5 II&IV Prepare a power point presentation on any 04
one technical topic.
6 III Demonstrate any assigned activity using 04
appropriate body language.
7 III Face a mock-interview. 04
8 IV Write two formal letters in correct format. 04
Total 32
96
Following is the list of proposed student activities:
a. List the different communication situations.
b. Use audio visual aids to learn different skills in communication.
c. Conversations –formal/informal.
d. Read newspaper.
e. Collect different audio clips.
f. SWOT analysis.
g. Deliver welcome/farewell speeches in various programmes.
h. Use of graphics in technical writings.
i. Interviewing common people.
j. Debating practices.
k. Summarizing discussions.
l. Practicing interviews

a. Arrange various debate/elocution competitions to develop spoken
communication skills.
b. Show audio/video clips to develop listening skills.
c. Collect various pictures/charts to demonstrate body language.
d. Prepare and give oral presentations.
e. Guide micro-projects in groups as well as individually.
10. SUGGESTED TITLES OF MICRO PROJECTS

A micro-project is planned to be undertaken by a student. He/she ought to submit it by
the end of the semester to develop the industry oriented COs. The micro-project could
be industry application-based, internet-based, workshop-based, laboratory-based or
field-based. Each student will have to maintain dated work diary consisting of
individual contribution in the project work and give a seminar presentation of it before
submission. A suggestive list is given here. Similar micro-projects could be added by
the concerned faculty:
a. Find out five communication events from day to day life and explain them in the
form of communication process.
b. Find out various reasons of communication gap in certain official situations.
c. Identify various types of communication situations in student’s life.
d. Study various barriers occurring in communication among diploma students.
e. Find out the remedies to overcome psychological barriers in communication.
f. Collect different types of letters and analyze the language and format used in it.
g. Prepare a review on the listened story/news/discussion/meeting.
97

1. Business Communication R.C.Bhatiya Ane Books India, New
Delhi.
2. Developing Communication Krishna Mohan& Macmillan
Skills Meera Banerjee
3. Power Point Presentation Adam B Cooper Macmillan
4. Group Discussions & Dr.B.R.Kishor& Vee Kumar

Interviews D. S.Paul
5. Body Language Allan Pease Sheldon Press, London.

Sr.No. Name of the Equipment Specification
1 Digital English Language Laboratory
2 Computers and Headphones
3 Magazines,Articles,Journals in Lab.
13. E-learning resources

(Please mention complete URL of the E- resourses CO wise)
1 https://www.nptel.ac.in/courses
2 https://www.k12reader.com
3. https://www.eduaction.com
4. https://www.k5learning.com
5. https://www.english4u.com
Course -
CO. Course Outcome

PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
NO.
Develop the habit to
CO1 express new ideas 1 1 3 - 1 - - - 1 1 - - -
properly.
Select correct type of
CO2 communication in - - 1 - 1 - 1 1 1 1 - - -
different situations.
Avoid communication
CO3 barriers for effective - - 2 - 2 2 2 2 2 2 - - -
communication.
Use appropriate body
CO4 language to - - 1 - 2 2 2 3 3 3 - - -
communicate effectively
98
Formulate various ways
CO5 to face interview - - 2 - 3 2 2 3 3 3 - - -
effectively.
Draft different types of
business letters, notices,
CO6 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 1 1 - - -
memoranda and E-mails
using correct formats.

No faculty member
1 Mrs. P.Y. Kamble Lecturer in English, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
2 Mrs. M.S. Ban Lecturer in English, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
3 Mr. P.V. Deshmukh Lecturer in English, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
4 Mr. R.L. Korde Lecturer in English, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
5 Mr. D.D. Gangthade Lecturer in English, Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad
6 Mr. A.P. Jagtap Lecturer in English, Government Polytechnic, Osmanabad

99
6P201 GPA COMP H/W MAINT. & TROUBLE SHOOTING
COURSE TITLE- COMPUTER HARDWARE MAINTENANCE AND

TROUBLE SHOOTING
COURSE CODE 6P201

Computer Engineering Third
1. RATIONALE
Computer Hardware Maintenance and Trouble Shooting is a basic level course to keep computer
systems maintain. This course helps the students to configure computer hardware as per the
specification and perform periodic maintenance of it. This course is skill oriented and will
develop the troubleshooting skills in the students.
2. COMPETENCY

"Install, configure and identify faults for maintaining and troubleshooting computer
systems and peripherals."

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(OR) (TW)
- 2 05 80 20 @25 25 150
3

100
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
The theory should be taught and practical should be carried out in such a manner that students are
able to acquire different learning out comes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to
demonstrate following course outcomes.
1. Identify components of computer system.

2. Dissect Secondary Storage Devices and Drive
3. Examine input devices based on their working principle.
4. Examine output devices based on their working principle.
5. Apply PC's troubleshooting and maintenance using different tools.

Unit-I 1a. Explain functionality and 1.1 Central Processing Unit (CPU): CPU
features of CPU. Speeds, Word Size, Data Path, Internal Cache
Components of memory, Slots and sockets, CISC vs. RISC
Computer 1b. Differentiate types of processor, CPU chips pre-processors
system motherboards pre-processors motherboard Types/Form Factors (AT, Baby
1c. Describe bus slots and cards AT, ATX, LPX, NLX, BTX).
1d. Define System Controller 1.2 PCI, Combination of Bus Systems, AGP
– Accelerated Graphics Port, Universal Serial
1e. Explain BIOS features Bus (USB), IEEE 1394 Fire Wire- A Bus
Standard.
1f. List advantages of Chipsets
1.3 Basic Input Output System: Services,
1g. List features of different
Bios Interaction, CMOS-RAM.
types memory modules
1.4 Chipsets: Definition, Advantage, North
and South Bridge.
1.5 System Memory: definition, memory

sizes, speeds and shapes (DIP, ZIP, SIPP,
SIMM, DIMM, RIMM), Memory modules
(Dynamic RAM, SDRAM, DDR SDRAM,
SLDRAM, DRDRAM, Fast Page Mode
(FPM) DRAM, Extended Data Out (EDO)
DRAM.
101
Unit-II 2a. Define: Heads, Tracks, 2.1 Hard Disk Interfaces: EIDE, Serial ATA,
Sectors, Cylinders, Cluster, SCSI, USB and IEEE 1394 (Firmware),
Secondary Landing zone, MBR, Zone bit RAID, Solid State Drive (laptop). Recording
Storage Devices recording Techniques: FM, MFM , RLL, perpendicular
and Drives. recording
2b. Describe functioning of hard
disk. 2.2 Disk Geometry: Heads, Tracks, Sectors,
Cylinders, Cluster, Landing zone, MBR,
2c. Explain the working of hard Zone bit recording.
disk controller
2.3 Hard Disk Controller: Functional Blocks,
2d. Explain types of DVD, HDC Functions,Formatting
recording and constructions 2e.
List blue-ray disk specification 2.4 DVD Drives: Types, Recording,
Construction, Interfacing.
2.5 Blue-ray disk specification
Unit-III 3a. Explain operations of 3.1 Keyboard Types, Types of Key switches
keyboard. (Membrane, mechanical, rubber dome,
Input Devices capacitive), Keyboard interfaces.
and power 3b. Explain operation of mouse.
supplies 3.3 Mouse: Types, Operation, Interfaces.
3c. Explain working of scanner.
3.4 Scanner: Scanner Types, Image quality
measurement.
3.5 Block diagram and working of SMPS
3.6 Power supply characteristics: Rated

wattage, Efficiency, Regulation,
Ripple, Load regulation, Line regulation
3.7 Uninterrupted Power Supply
Unit- IV 4a. Describe the working of 4.1 Types of printer, Printer Interfaces, Ink-
LaserJet and Ink-jet Printer. jet Printer: Parts, working principle, LaserJet
Output Devices Printer: Parts, working principle.
and Display 4b. Define video basics (CRT
Adapters parameters) and VGA monitors 4.2 Video Basics (CRT parameters), VGA
monitors.
4.3 Digital Display Technology- Thin

Displays, Liquid Crystal Displays, Plasma
102
Displays, Light Emitting Display.
4.4 Graphics Cards : Components of a card,

Accelerated Video cards, CGA, EGA, VGA
Unit V: 5a. Explain POST sequence 5.1 POST : Functions, IPL Hardware, Test
Sequence, Error messages.
Trouble 5b. Explain troubleshooting 5.2 Troubleshooting : possible problems and
Shooting and procedures of listed peripherals diagnosis , Motherboard , Keyboard , Hard
Preventive and motherboard Disk Drive, Printer
Maintenance 5.3 Preventive maintenance tools.
5c. List the Preventive 5.4 Power problems: Blackout, Brownout,
maintenance tools surges and spikes, Symptoms of power
problems.
5.5Diagnostic software for trouble shooting PC.
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
I Components of computer system 12 08 10 06 24
II
Hard Disk Drive and Controller, 10 06 06 04 16
DVD Drives
III Input Devices 10 06 06 04 16
IV
Output Devices and Display 8 04 04 04 12
Adapters
V
Trouble Shooting and Preventive 8 02 06 04 12
Maintenance
Total 48 26 32 22 80
103
Sr.
No.
1 I Identify basic components of a personal computer.
Demonstrate a list of various computer peripherals. (E.g.
02
CPU, Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse, Speaker, Web cam, Printer,
Scanner, microphone, speakers, modem, projector etc).
2 I Identify common ports, associated cables, and their

connectors. Observe various connectors, ports back and front
side of the computer. Write their purpose and specifications.
04
(e.g. Power, PS/2 keyboard and mouse, Serial and parallel,
USB, VGA, LAN, Audio & microphone, Firewire, HDMI,
games, SATA etc.)
3 II Observe various secondary storage devices- Hard Disk, Flash

drives, CD/ DVD drive. Open drives and dissect the internal
04
structure of them. (If available Also open the various
FDD/HDD disks to observe the magnetic disk inside.)
4 III Open at least 2 to 3 different types of keyboard and mouse

and observe the internal circuits. Observe and write steps to
04
troubleshoot, maintain and clean the diskette drives, keyboard,
mouse, etc.
5 IV Observe different types of printers (dot matrix, inkjet & laser,

multifunction). Install and configure device driver of printers 04
with PC/Laptop on any operating system.
6 IV Boot the computer system using different booting priority

02
and/or sequence.
7 IV Install Video Graphics Array (VGA) or Super Video Graphics

Array (SVGA) display 02
cards.
8 V Identify the fault in the given PC, using the given

troubleshooting sequence, fix the issue, record the given 02
problem, and produce proper documentation of your work
104
9 V a. Perform physical cleaning (internal and external) of

personal computer.
b. Demonstrate how to adjust basic performance settings.

04
c. Perform hard drive file system maintenance.
d. Identify anti-virus software and applications.
e. Identify diagnostic software such as anti-virus utilities.
10 V Use diagnostic software to identify installed computer

peripherals and test their working 02
condition.
Total 32
i. Survey of computer system, laptops, servers and peripherals available in the market to
get awareness of the technology being used and their specifications.
ii. Prepare comparative charts as outcome of survey done.
iii. Prepare charts for various types of CPU and input/output devices available in market.
outcomes.
i. Use online tutorials to guide students for desk top computer system, laptops, servers with
latest configuration.
ii. Demonstrate practical thoroughly Preventive maintenance kit
iii. Show Flash/Video/Animation All peripheral maintenance kits (motherboard, keyboard,
DVD, mouse, HDD etc)
1. The complete PC Mark Minasi BPB Publications

Upgrade & Maintenance
Guide
105
2. IBM PC and clones Govind Rajalu Tata McGraw Hill

Education Private
Limited
3. PC Upgrading and Biagloo Tata McGraw Hill

Maintenance
S.
No.
1. Desk top computer system, laptops with latest configuration.
2. All peripheral maintenance kits

(motherboard, keyboard, DVD, mouse, Motherboard,keyboard ,mouse
HDD etc)
3. Preventive maintenance kit/ Disk cleaning

kit Print head cleaner
4. Diagnostic software/tools, preferably open

source based
i. http://www.gcflearnfree.org/computerbasics/15/print
ii. http://www.more.net/sites/default/files/training/BTTmain.pdf
iii. Software: Microsoft windows operating system from XP/vista/7/8 to latest version
available in market, Windows server, linux/ubuntu/centos, server operating system
106

Sr. Course Outcome POs PSOs

No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Summarize and recall - - - - - - - -

various component of - 3 3 1
computer system.
2 Disassemble and locate - - - - - - - -
HDD and Disk Drive and 3 3 1 1
recall the functionality.
3 Examine and select exact - - - - - - - - -
input devices and printer 3 3 1
based on their working and
functionality.
4 Select proper output devices - - - - - - - - - -
based on their parameter and 3 2
their requirement.
5 Apply and test of PCs - - - - - - - -
troubleshooting and 2 3 3 1
maintenance using different
tools.

No faculty members
1 P B Lahoti Lecturer in Computer Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic,Aurangabad
2 N.M. Masuldar Lecturer in Computer Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic,Aurangabad
107
108
6S203 GPA DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
COURSE TITLE- DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

COURSE CODE 6S203

offered
Computer Engg and Information Technology Third
1. RATIONALE
This is basic technology level course. It aims to enable the students to understand functioning of
digital circuit using core structure of digital logic. This Course will enable student to solve
various Boolean expressions, to design, develop and implement logic circuits.
2. COMPETENCY

“Use Digital Systems and Logic Families to design Simple and combinational circuits of
any electronic device.”

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE @ PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR) (TW)
- 2 05 80 20 @25 25 150
3

Practical Examination,OR – Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal
109
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Convert numbers from one form to another.

2. Select appropriate gates for a given logic.
3. Simplify circuits using K-map.
4. Design digital combinational circuit using arithmetic circuit (half adder, full adder)
5. Design digital combinational circuit using multiplexer and demultiplexer.

Unit – I 1a. Use number system and 1.1 Number Systems : Binary Number
codes for conversion System, Signed Binary Numbers, Octal
Introduction to 1b. Use a proper digital Number System, Hexadecimal Number
Digital Principles system to develop logic. System , Binary Arithmetic.
1.2 1’s Complement & 2’s
Complement.
1.3 Codes: BCD, EBCDIC, ASCII
Code, Gray codes, Excess 3 code
1.4 Digital signal, Digital systems-
Positive and Negative Logic,
Advantages, Disadvantages and
Applications of Digital Systems.
Unit -II 2a. Explain working of Logic 2.1. Working principles and Truth of
Gates AND, OR, NOT, NOR, NAND, EX-OR,
Logic Gate & 2b. Construct logical circuit EX-NOR Gates
Boolean Algebra using gates. 2.2. Boolean Algebra : Basic Boolean
2c. Optimize logical circuit. 2.3. Operations, Basic Laws of Boolean
2.4. Algebra, De-Morgan’s Theorems
2.5. Boolean Forms-Canonical &
Standard
Unit III: 3.a. Design and simplify 3.1 Standard Representation For Logic
expression using K-map Functions.
Boolean for 2 variables. 3.2 K-map representation of logical
Expression 3.b. Design and simplify functions minimization using 2, 3,
110
Implementation expression using K-map Variables.

for 3 variables. 3.3 Minimization of Logic Functions
3.c. Explain Boolean function Specified and not specified in
3.d. Implementation and Minterms /Maxterms or Truth Table,
simplification. Don’t Care Condition.
3.e. Define Don’t Care
Condition.
Unit IV: 4.a. Explain Basic 4.1 Realization of system using
Combinational Logic Combinational Logic.
Combinational 4.b. Design half adder, 4.2 Realization of Half Adder & Full
Logic fulladder, Half Subtractor Adder.
&full Subtractor
4.c. Convert BCD code to 4.3 Realization of Half Subtractor& Full
Subtractor
Excess 3 Code.
4.4 Code Conversion-BCD to Excess 3 Code
Conversion
Unit V: 5.a. Implement Decimal-to- 5.1 Encoder, Decimal-to-BCD encoder.
BCD encoder and 5.2 Decoder, Decimal-to-BCD decoder
Combinational Decimal-to-BCD decoder. 5.3 Multiplexer – Block diagram, Truth
Logic using LSI 5.b. Design 4:1 Multiplexer table, Logical expression and logic
& MSI Circuit with its logical expression diagram of Multiplexers (2:1, 4:1, 8:1and
and block diagram.. 16:1), Multiplexer Tree.
5.c. Design 1:8 Demultiplexer 5.4 Demultiplexer – Block diagram,
with its truth table and Truth table, Logical expression and
block diagram. logic diagram of Demultiplexer (1:2,
1:4, 1:8and 1:16), Demultiplexer
Tree
Unit VI: 6.a. Differentiate Sequential 1.1 Introduction to Sequential Logic
& Combinational Logic Circuit – Difference between
Introduction to Circuit. combinational and sequential circuit.
Sequential Logic 6.b. Define 1-bit memory
Circuit cell. 1.2 Introduction to 1-bit memory cell
6.c. Define Flip flop. and flip flop.
111
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
I Introduction to Digital Principles 10 04 06 06 16
II Logic Gate & Boolean Algebra 08 04 04 04 12
III Boolean Expression 10 04 08 04 16

Implementation
IV Combinational Logic 06 04 04 02 10
Combinational Logic using LSI

V 10 06 08 04 18
& MSI Circuit
VI Introduction to Sequential Logic 04 04 04 00 08

Circuit
Total 48 26 34 20 80
Sr.
No.
1 1 Convert given Number system to another (HEX, OCTAL, 01
DECIMAL, BINARY)
2 1 Calculate 2’s and 1’s Complements 01
3 2 Verify truth table of basic logic gates. 02
4 2 Use universal gate to form basic gates. 04
5 2 Verify Demorgan’s theorem. 02
6 3 Implement given Boolean expression. 02
7 3 Implement given Boolean expression using Universal gates 02
8 3 Simplify the Boolean expression using Boolean algebra. 04
112
9 4 Construct and verify Decoder and Encoder circuit 02
10 4 Convert Decimal to BCD encoder &decoder. 02
11 4 Design and implement Half Adder and full adder circuit. 02
12 4 Design and implement Half Subtractor and full Subtractor 02

circuit
13 4 Construct and verify BCD to Excess 3 conversion. 04
14 5 Design and Verify TT of 4:1 mux & 1:4 demux 02
Total 32
Other than class room and laboratory activities following are the suggested guided co-curricular
students activities which need to be undertaken to facilitate the attainment of various course
outcomes of this course. The students are required to maintain portfolio of their experiences
which he/ she will submit at the end of the term.
1. Prepare charts of symbols of given Digital Circuit.

2. List and observe ICs for given Digital Circuit.
3. Visit digital portals.
outcomes.
1. Use online tutorials to guide students in searching information regarding Digital

Electronics.
3. Show Flash/Video/Animation clippings for given Logic Circuits.
6. Show simulation to analyze working of given Logic Circuits
113
1. Mano M. Morris Digital logic and Pearson publication,

Computer Latest Edition
Design ISBN: 81-203-0417-9
2. Malvino& Leach Digital Principles and Tata McGraw Hill, New
Applications
3. R P Jain Modern Digital Tata McGraw Hill, New
Electronics
4. Thomas L. Floyd Digital Fundamentals Pearson Education,

ISBN:9788131734483
S.
No.
1. Binary to Decimal Converter & Decimal to As per Electronics industry

Binary Converter specification
2. Binary to Gray code Converter & Gray to As per Electronics industry

Binary code Converter specification
3. BCD to Seven Segment Decoder (Common As per Electronics industry

Cathode Display) specification
4. Basic Logic Gates using Diode & As per Electronics industry

Transistor specification
5. AND, OR, NOT Gate Characteristics kit As per Electronics industry

specification
6. OR,NOR,EX-OR Gate Characteristics kit As per Electronics industry

specification
7. De-Morgan’s Theorem kit As per Electronics industry

specification
8. NAND & NOR as Universal Gate As per Electronics industry
114
specification
9. Multiplexer / De-multiplexer using Gates As per Electronics industry

specification
10. Half & Full Adder & Half & Full Sub As per Electronics industry
tractor specification
a. http://www.asic-world.com/digital/tutorial.html
b. http://electrical4u.com/
c. http://www.electronics-tutorials.ws
d. http://www.vlab.co.in/http://www.electrical4u.com/jfet-or-junction-field-effect-transistor
115

SN Course Outcome POs PSOs

o
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Identification and conversion - - - - - - -

3 3 1 1 -
of number system.
2 Select appropriate gates and - - - - - - - -

theorem to solve Boolean 3 1 2 1
algebra.
3 Apply K-map to simplify 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
Boolean expression.
4 Design digital combinational - - - - - - - -
circuit including arithmetic 3 2 2 -
circuit (half adder, full adder)
5 Design digital combinational - - - - - - - -
circuit using multiplexer & 3 3 3 3
demultiplexer.
6 Compare and contrast - - - - - - - -
combinational & sequential - 1 1 1
circuit.

No faculty members
1 Pawan Lahoti Lecturer in Computer Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
116
6S206 GPA Multimedia Techniques
COURSE TITLE- MULTIMEDIA TECHNIQUES

COURSE CODE- 6S206

offered
Computer Engineering/Information Technology Third
1. RATIONALE
Multimedia Techniques is basic level course where student are going to develop multimedia
application using recent tools. Animation plays a huge role in entertainment (providing action
and realism) in advertising, films and gaming industry and also be extremely effective in
education (providing visualization and demonstrations of abstract ideas and concepts). This
course includes tools and techniques for designing graphics oriented multimedia and animated
application based on audio, video and different file formats.
2. COMPETENCY

"Create and simulate multimedia and animated application using tools and technique."

Teaching Scheme
Credits
0(Hours/ Credits)
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR) (TW)
100
1 - 4 5 00 00 #50 50
ESE- End Semester Examination; PT – Progressive Test, PA- Progressive Assessment, OR –
Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
117
1. Identify various approaches, methods and techniques of Animation Technology.
2. Apply compression technique on appropriate multimedia file formats.
3. Develop effective animation for given application.

4. Create customized application using Photoshop.
5. Create animated movie using flash.

UNIT-I 1a. Illustrate Multimedia 1.1. I/O Devices
system.
Introduction to 1b. Compare application of 1.2. Evaluation of Multimedia System
Multimedia multimedia system.
1.3. Multimedia Application
1.4. Storage Media.
UNIT-II 2a. Distinguish between 2.1. Principles of Compression

different file formats. 2.2. Methods of Text and Image
Compressions Compression
Technique & File 2b. Apply compression and 2.3. Methods of Audio and Video
Formats decompression on different
Compression Working with sound and
file format. embedding videos
2.4. Study of various File Formats
2.5. MPEG vs. JPEG
UNIT-III 3a. Identify the animation its 3.1. Animation basics, Timeline, Frames
technique. and Key Frames
Introduction to 3.2. Creating a basic text animation
3.b.Apply the animation
Animation 3.3. Creating and manipulating animations
techniques in different
3.4. Creating a basic frame-by-frame
applications. animation, Using Onion Skin to
modify an animation
3.5. Using shape twining and hinting,
Using motion twining
3.6. Using motion twinning with a guide,
Mask Animations
UNIT-IV 4a. Apply the Photoshop tool 4.1. Parts of the Toolbox , Toolbox
Photoshop Tools on different applications. shortcuts , Tools options
4.2. Marquees , Magic wand , Lassos ,
Move tool , Crop tool, Slice tools,
Pencil , Paintbrush ,Eraser tools
,History brushes, Gradient , Paint
bucket , Burn-dodge-sponge, Blur-
118
sharpen- smudge, Shapes-line-

rectangle-polygon , Path selection tool
, Pen tool , Type tools , Notes tool-
audio annotation
4.3. Eyedropper-color sampler- measure
too, Hand-zoom, Quick mask-Screen
modes, Jump to Image Ready, Back
ground and foreground.
UNIT-V 5a.Use the flash environment 5.1. Overview of Flash
5.2. Flash Environment
Introduction to Flash 5b. Apply different flash tools.
5.3. Creating New FLASH documents,
User interface of Flash, FLASH
Workspace, Menu bar, Timeline
5.4. Different shapes, text tools and pen
tool
5.5. Selecting shapes using lasso tool and
performing basic editing tools
5.6. Modifying created objects
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
1
Introduction to Multimedia 2
Compressions Technique & File 4

2 Formats
NOT APPLICABLE
3 Introduction to Animation 2
4 Photoshop Tools 6
5 Introduction to Flash 2
Total 16
119
Sr.
No.
1 01 Identify multimedia devices. 02
2 02 Install 3D Max Software and identify its various tools. 02
3 05 Install latest version of Photoshop and navigate its tools. 04
4 04&06 Install latest version of open source Flash. 02
03 Perform image enhancement operation like - setting resolution 04

of images, sizes, pixel depth, color modes – RGB, CMYK,
5 grey Scale and comparison of images based on storage size &
image quality, save file in different file formats - .bmp, jpeg,
jpg, tga, tiff, gif, pic, pdf, png etc
04 Create an application using 04
6 1.Text Animation
2. Multimedia Animation.
7 04 Create an application using onion skinning. 04
8 04 Create an application using motion tween 02
9 05 Create an application using Menu bar tool in Photoshop. 04
05 Create an application in Photoshop using 04
1.Retouching Tool;
10
2.Painting and Drawing Tools;
3. Navigation Tool.
04 Create an application in Photoshop using 04
1.Selection Tools;
11
2.Crop and Slice Tools;
3. Measuring Tools.
06 Create an application in academics using flash for 02
12 1. graphics-lines and shapes,
2. Texture, filling colors using color palates, texturing.
13 06 Draw a car with appropriate tools in flash. Label each part of 02
the car using different style and format and animate text
120
06 To create a forest of tree with flowers fruits from small plant 02

14
using different layers and frame transition time.
06 Create a forest of trees using the object created earlier. Also 02
15
add lighting and rain effect.
06 Edit images captured by Digital web cam using Web-cam 02
16 software.
06 Import and Export the following using flash 02
1.Image
17
1.Sound
2. Video.
06 Create a multimedia database for student ID Card preparation 04

18 i.e. store image in database.
19 06 Design a game application in Flash. 04
20 06 Design an Advertisement in Flash 04
ALL Mini Project: Student should create a movie of minimum 2 04

minutes playtime using either Flash/3D-MAX/MAYA or
Photoshop.
Total 64
1. Following is the list of proposed student activities like:

2. Survey of various animated websites and latest tools available to create animated website
3. Seminar on various readymade examples of Photoshop/flash
4. Make small animation using flash and Photoshop in the group
5. Demonstration of individual assigned project
Lesa Photoshop CC: The O’Reilly Media

1.
Snider missing manual
121
Deke McClelland Adobe Photoshop CS5 - O’Reilly Media

2.
one-to-one
Robertt Adobe flash Wiley

3 Reinhardt, CS4Professional Bible
snow dowd
Katherine Ulrich Macromedia Flash For Pearson Education

4
Windows and Macintosh
10. LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENTS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED:
S.
No.
1. Computer System with latest configuration Latest version

and memory, laptops, servers
2. Open source Free software for animations Latest version

/editors for html5/css3
4 Photoshop Latest version
5 Micro-Media flash Latest version
6 3D MAX Latest version
7 Multimedia projector Latest version
8. Internet Access Latest version
1. http://www.codecademy.com/learn
2. www.photoshopessentials.com
3. www.adobeknowhow.com
4. http://www.webdevelopersnotes.com/tutorials/flash/
5. http://www.adobe.com/devnet/flash.html
6. http://www.adobe.com/support/flash/tutorial_index.html
7. http://www.thefreecountry.com/webmaster/flash.shtml
122

S.No Course Outcome POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 To familiarize the
students with various
approaches, methods 2 2 - 1 1 - - - - 1 - -
and techniques of
Animation Technology.
2 To develop
competencies and skills 1 3 - - 1 - - 1 - - - -
needed for becoming an
effective Animator.
3 Mastering traditional &

digital tools to produce 1 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 - -
stills and moving
images.
4 Exploring different
approaches in computer 1 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 1
animation
5 To enable students to
manage Animation
Projects from its - 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 1
Conceptual Stage to the
final product creation.
6 To apply Audio and

Video Production 1 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
Techniques to an
Animation Project
1. Prof.R.P.Tiwari Lect in Computer Engineering,Govt.Polytechnic,Aurangabad
2. Prof.Dipali P.Sapkal Lect.in InformationTechnology,Govt.Polytechnic,Aurangabad
123
6S208 GPA OBJECT ORI.PROG. USING C++
COURSE TITLE- OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING USING C++
COURSE CODE 6S208

offered
Computer Engg and Information Technology Third
1. RATIONALE
Object-oriented programming using C++ is a basic level course intends to teach students the
basic concepts of object-oriented programming (OOP). Large programs are probably the most
complicated entities ever created by humans. Because of this complexity, programs are prone to
errors so that software errors can be expensive and even life-threatening. Object-Oriented
Programming offers a new and powerful way to cope with this complexity.
2. COMPETENCY
“Develop C++ programs by using object oriented programming.”

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
PA
L T P C ESE PT ESE (PR)
(TW)
- 4 07 80 20 # 25 25 150
3

124
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Identify importance of Object Oriented Programming concepts

2. Select classes, objects, members of a class and the relationships among them needed for a
specific problem.
3. Demonstrate the concepts of Constructor and Destructor.
4. Solve given problems using Inheritance.
5. Solve given problems using Polymorphism.
6. Read and write data on new or existing file.

UNIT I 1a Differentiate procedure and 1.1 Introduction to OOP , need
INTRODUCTION object oriented languages And requirements of OOP,
TO OBJECT 1b Explain the general Limitations of C
ORIENTED structure of C++ Language 1.2 Procedure–oriented
PROGRAMMING 1c List different data types programming Vs Object-
available in C++ Oriented programming
1d Initialize Data using Concept
variables and develop simple 1.3 Features of OOPs, Structure
C++ programs of C++ programming, C++
1e Differentiate various I/O statements.
operators 1.4 Data types in C++, Defining
Constants .Declaration of
variables and Dynamic
Initialization of variables.
1.5 Reference variables
Operators in C++. Scope
Resolution Operators.
Member dereferencing
Operators.Memory
Management Operators
and Manipulators .Type cast
Operator.
2a Develop Simple Programs 2.1 Classes: Specifying a class
UNIT II using class and objects, array
of objects, friend functions, Defining member functions
OBJECTS AND passing and returning objects Arrays within a class
CLASSES 2b Differentiate static members
and normal members. 2.2 Objects
2c Develop programs using
125
inline functions. 2.2.1Creating objects

2d Develop Simple Programs
using class and objects, array 2.2.2 Memory allocation for objects
of objects, friend functions, 2.3 Static data and member function
passing and returning 2.4 Array of objects
objects. 2.5 Objects as function arguments
2e Develop Simple Programs 2.6 Inline Functions
using class and objects, array 2.7 Friend Function
of objects, friend functions, 2.8 Arrays of Objects passing and
passing and returning objects returning objects
UNIT III 3a Define constructor & 3.1 Concept

CONSTRUCTORS Destructor. 3.2 Types of Constructors
AND 3b Differentiate between types 3.2.2 Default
DESTRUCTORS of constructor. 3.2.2 Parameterized
3c Differentiate between 3.2.3 Copy
Constructor & destructor. 3.3 Overloaded Constructors
3d Develop program using ( Multiple Constructor)
3e constructor and destructor 3.4 Constructor with default argument
3.5 Destructor
UNIT IV 4.1 Introduction
4a Define Inheritance
INHERITANCE 4b List the applications of 4.1.1Base Classes
inheritance, types of
inheritance and develop 4.1.2Derived classes
programs using single,
multilevel and multiple 4.2 Types Of Inheritance
inheritance
4.2.1 Single inheritance
4c Apply the concept of
4.2.2 Multilevel inheritance
4d constructor in derived
4.2.3 Hybrid inheritance
classes
4.2.4 Multiple inheritance
4e Define Virtual base classes
4.2.5 Hybrid Inheritance
& Abstract classes 4.3 Making a Private Member Inherited
4.4 Virtual base classes
4.5 Abstract classes
4.6 Constructors in derived
UNIT V 5.1 Pointers to objects,

POLYMORPHISM 5a Apply Pointer to objects 5.2 Develop programs using pointers to
& POINTERS IN 5b Define derived classes and objects
C++ virtual functions 5.3 Pointer to Derived Classes
5c Differentiate between 5.4 Virtual Functions, Pointer to virtual
Overloading Vs Functions
Overriding 5.5 Compile Time Polymorphism
5d Differentiate between 5.5.1 Functions overloading
Compile Time 5.5.2 Operator Overloading (unary and
126
Polymorphism & Run binary )

Time Polymorphism 5.5.3 Overloading Vs Overriding
5.6 Run Time Polymorphism
5.7 Virtual functions
5.8 Static and dynamic binding
UNIT VI 6a. Select appropriate method 6.1 File

FILE HANDLING for opening a file 6.2 File Streams and File I/O
IN C++ 6b. Read and write data on new 6.2.1 Streams
or existing file 6.2.2.Standard File handling Classes
6.3 Opening and Closing File
6.4 General functions used in File
Handling
6.5 Reading from and writing to a file
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
INTRODUCTION TO
I OBJECT ORIENTED 06 2 3 4 09
PROGRAMMING
II 08 2 6 6 14
OBJECTS AND CLASSES
III CONSTRUCTORS AND
08 2 4 6 12
DESTRUCTORS
IV INHERITANCE 10 2 8 8 18
V POLYMORPHISM &
10 4 6 8 18
POINTERS IN C++
VI FILE HANDLING IN C++ 06 2 3 4 09
Total 48 14 30 36 80
127
1. I Implement two C++ programs using Input /output statements 02
2. I Implement program for printing formatted output (Make use of 04

manipulators )
3. I Implement program making use of C++ control structures.(if,if- 04

else,while,do-while,for loop switch case.)
4. I Implement any three programs using different type of function 04

approach.
5. II Implement a complete C++ program which makes use of classes 06

& objects by considering any one problem like banking.
6. II Implement a complete C++ program which makes use of classes 04

Static data and member function
7. II Implement C++ program which makes use of array of objects 04

for students information.
8. III Implement C++ program using Types of constructors & 04

destructors.
9. III Implement C++ program using Overloaded Constructors( 02

Multiple Constructor)
10. III Implement C++ program using Constructor with default 02
argument
11. IV Implement program making use of single inheritance 02
12 IV Implement program making use of multiple inheritance 02
13 IV Implement program making use of multilevel inheritance 02
14 IV Implement program making use of hybrid inheritance. 02
15 IV Implement program making use of hierarchical inheritance. 02
16 IV Implement a program which makes use of friend function. 02
17 V Implement program making use of Function Overloading. 02
128
18 V Implement program using operator overloading 04
19 V Implement C++ programs using pointers to objects 04
20 V Implement a program which uses virtual function & 04

polymorphism
21 VI Implement a program for opening and closing of File 02
22 VI Implement a program for reading and write to a File of File 02
TOTAL 64

1. Students will prepare file for the above mentioned Practical.
2. Students will prepare the tutorial book for tutorial sessions. The questions and
assignments will be solved in that and progressive assessment will be done by the teacher.
3. Present seminar, develops mini projects, panel discussion, and develops a program with real
life application examples on a particular topic.
4. Students are expected to develop minimum one program of particular topic as an example
to exhibit real life application.
outcomes.

2. Guide students in searching information regarding real world problems.
4. Show Flash/Video/Animation clippings for functioning Pillars if OOPS
129
1. Object Oriented Balaguruswami,E. Tata McGraw-Hill

Programming with C++.
2. C++ The Complete Herbert Scildt Tata McGraw-Hill

Reference
3. Let Us C++ Kanetkar, Yashavant BPB Publication
S.
No.
1. Computer System with latest configuration As per Computer industry

1 www.nptel.com
2 www.cplusplus.com
3 www.mycplus.com
Software’s:
1. C Compiler(Windows and Ubuntu)
130

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Recognize and Interpret

the importance of Object - 3 1 - - - - - - - - -
Oriented Programming
concepts
2 Identify classes, objects,
members of a class and
- 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
the relationships among
them needed for a
specific problem.
3 Demonstrate the concepts
- 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 -
of Constructor and
Destructor.
4 Examine and solve given
problems using - 3 3 - - - - - - 2 2 -
Inheritance.
5 Analyze and solve given
problems using - 3 3 - - - - - - 1 - -
Polymorphism

No faculty members
131
6S401 GPA Relational Database Management System
COURSE TITLE- RELATIONAL DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COURSE CODE 6S401

offered
Computer Engineering & Information Technology Third
1. RATIONALE
Relational Database Management System is applied level course aims to design and
manipulate database. Database system plays a vital role to manage huge volume of data
for commercial applications. This course includes data models, SQL commands,
techniques, normalization concepts and queries performance.
2. COMPETENCY
"Design, develop and manage databases for applications using Structured Query Language (SQL) in
ORACLE."

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
PA
(TW)
150
3 - 4 07 80 20 #25 25

4. COURSE OUTCOMES
132
1. Select/Explore database management concepts and its applications.

2. Design relational data model using given Constraints.
3. Perform SQL queries and execute PL/SQL block.
4. Design database applying normalization rules.
5. Design Entity –Relation model.

Unit - I 1a. Applications of database 1.1 Database system application
Database system 1.2 Purpose of Database systems
Management 1b. Objective of database 1.3 View of data
Concepts system 1.4 Database languages
1c. Level of data 1.5 Database design
1d. Explain database 1.6 Database users and administrators
languages 1.7 Database architecture
1e. List of database users and
administrator
1f. Describe database
architecture
Unit - II 2a Describe structure of 2.1 Structure of relational databases
Relational Model relational database 2.2 Database schemas
and Integrity 2b Concept of database 2.3 Keys
schemas
Constraints 2.4 Relational query languages
2c Types of keys
2d Explain relational query 2.5 Relational operations
languages and 2.6 Relational model constraints
relational operations 2.6.1 Domain entity constraints
2e Types of Constraints on 2.6.2 On delete cascade
relational model 2.6.3 NOT NULL
Unit - III 3a. Overview of SQL query 3.1 SQL query language
Introduction to SQL language and its data 3.2 SQL data definition
definition 3.3 Basic structure of SQL queries
3b. Explain structure of SQL 3.4 Modification of database
queries 3.5 Additional basic operations
3c. Queries of modifying 3.6 Set operations
database 3.7 Null values
3d. Queries to execute set 3.8 Aggregate functions
operations 3.9 String , Date and Time functions
3e. Queries to execute 3.10 PL/SQL introduction : control
aggregate functions structures, cursors, triggers, functions,
133
3f. Queries to execute string , packages, procedures, error handling

date and time functions
3g. Introduction to PL/ SQL
Unit - IV 4a. List features of good 4.1 Features of good relational designs
Relational database relational design 4.2 Atomic domains and First normal
design 4b. Types of normal forms form
4c. Differentiate between 3NF 4.3 More normal forms
and BCNF 4.4 Comparison of 3NF and BCNF
4d. Describe decomposition 4.5 Decomposition using functional
techniques using dependencies
functional dependencies 4.6 Decomposition using multivalued
dependencies
Unit - V 5a. Overview of E-R model 5.1 The entity relationship model
Entity relationship 5b. Constraints 5.2 Constraints
model 5c. Design E-R diagram 5.3 Removing redundant attributes in
5d. E-R design issues entity sets
5e. Features of extended E-R 5.4 Entity relationship diagrams
5.5 Entity relationship design issues
5.6 Extended E-R features
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
1 Database Management Concepts 08 5 5 4 14

Relational Model and Integrity
2 08 5 5 4 14
Constraints
3 Introduction to SQL 12 4 6 8 18
4 Relational database design 10 6 6 6 18
5 Entity relationship model 10 5 5 6 16
Total 48 25 27 28 80
Sr.
No.
134
Execute SQL query to create table and insert 10 records. 04

1. Execute DDL queries.
1 03 2. Execute DML queries.
3. Execute DCL queries.
4. Execute TCL queries.
Execute SQL queries for views and index 04
2 03
Execute SQL queries for 04
1. Date functions with all formats.
3 03 2. Time functions with all-time formats.
3.Conversion function
4 03 Execute SQL queries for all aggregate functions. 02
5 03 Execute SQL queries for all numeric functions. 04
6 05 Execute SQL queries for character/String functions. 04
Execute SQL queries to use operators. 04
7 03
1. Arithmetic 2. Relational 3.Comparison 4.Logical
Execute SQL queries using Group by, Having and Order by 04
8 03
clause
Execute SQL queries to show the record in the table 04
9 03
(Using 1.Like 2. Between 3.In 4.Any 5.All etc.)
10 03 Execute SQL queries using Set operators 02
11 03 Execute SQL queries using join operation. 04
Execute SQL queries to retrieve data from multiple tables 04
12 03 using sub/correlated queries.
Execute PL/SQL block to find the greatest number amongst 3 02

13 03 numbers
Execute PL/SQL block to find Factorial of a number using 02

14 03 FOR and WHILE
Execute PL/SQL block for error handling 04

15 03 1.Pre-defined
2.User defined
Execute PL/SQL block for cursors 04
16 03 1.Explicit
2.Implicit
Execute PL/SQL block for triggers 04

17 03 1.After and Before insert
2. After and Before delete
18 03 Execute PL/SQL block for Packages 04
Total 64
135
curricular student’s activities which need to be undertaken to facilitate the attainment of
a.Creating database which can perform insert, update, and delete operations.
b.Design a model for any real time database system.
c.Draw an E-R diagram for any database system.
d.Design relational database at different levels of normalized form.
e.Mini project: Create any database system i.e. Hostel reservation, Air ticket reservation,
Student database system etc.
outcomes.

b. Q & A technique.
c. Designing real time entity relationship model.
d. Guiding students for designing real time database system.
e. Observe students and monitor the performance of students.
f. Activity based learning.
g. Assign mini projects.
1. Database system concepts Henry Korth MGH
2. SQL / PL-SQL Ivan Bayross BPB
3 An Introduction to Pearson Education

C. J. Date
Database Systems
4 Oracle – The complete TMH
Oracle Press
reference
136
Hardware: Desktop Computer P-IV processor or higher

Software: Microsoft 2003 /any higher version , Oracle, SQL Server, MySQL
a. Ms-Access Tutorial : http://www.quackit.com/microsoft_access/tutorial/

b. SQL Basic Concepts: http://www.w3schools.com/sql/
c. SQL Tutorial : http://beginner-sql-tutorial.com/sql.htm
d. DBMS:http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=106106093

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Select/Explore database
management concepts
- 3 - - - - - - - - 1 -
and its applications.
2 Design relational data

model using given
- 3 2 2 - - - - - - - -
Constraints.
3 Perform SQL queries

and execute PL/SQL
- 3 - 3 - - - - - 2 2 -
block.
4 Design database
applying normalization - 3 3 3 - - - - - 2 - -
rules.
5 Design Entity –Relation
model. - 3 2 2 - - - - - - - -
137

No faculty members
1 Prachi P. Lecturer in Information Technology, Govt. Polytechnic,
Deshpande Aurangabad
138
6S405 GPA Software Engineering
COURSE TITLE- SOFTWARE ENGINEERING (SE)
COURSE CODE- 6S405

offered
Computer Engineering/Information Technology Third
1. RATIONALE
Software Engineering deals with reliability and quality assurance of the software under
development. It provides framework for development of quality software product. The course
enables the students to write specifications for software system, design and develop test plans
according to design specifications and the process to deploy software. The course also covers
important aspects of Software Engineering.
2. COMPETENCY
"Apply software development lifecycle phases and process framework activities to develop
prototype of enterprise application."

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE @ PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR/OR) (TW)
125
3 1 - 4 80 20 -- 25@

4. COURSE OUTCOMES
139
1. Classify and select appropriate software.

2. Use software process, models and framework to develop software.
3. Apply principles of software and requirement engineering.
4. Select appropriate software models for designing software.
5. Estimate risk arises in software project.
6. Prepare project scheduling and maintain its quality.
Unit Major Learning Topics And Sub-Topics

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain Only)
UNIT-I 1a.Comprehend the 1.1. Software-defination,evolving
difference between role,characteristics,types of software
An Introduction software and 1.2. Changing nature of software
to software software 1.3. Software Myths
Engineering engineering 1.4. Software Engineering-Basic, Definition.
UNIT-II 2a. Know the process 2.1. Software Engineering.-A layered Technology
framework of approach
Process and software; 2.2. A Process Framework-CMMI,Process Patterns,
Models Of 2b. Learn the different Process Assessment
Software process models. 2.3. Personal and Team process models
2.4. ProcessModels-
waterfall,Incremental,RAD,Prototype,Spiral,Concu
rrent Development Model, Component Based
Development, Formal Method Model
2.5. Agile Software Development-Difference between
prescriptive and agile process Model, Feature of the
Agile Software Development Approach
UNIT-III 3a. Recognize the 3.1. Software engineering core Principles
basic Principles of 3.2. Communication Practices, Planning Practices,
Software software Modeling Practices, Construction Practices
Engineering engineering and 3.3. Deployment-Principles, Concept of Delivery cycle,
Practices and engineering support cycle and feedback cycle
Requirement phases; 3.4. Requirement Engg.-Concepts, Tasks, Initiating the
Engineering 3b. Able to understand requirement Process, Eliciting requirements,
the requirement Building the analysis model, Negotiating
engineering. requirements, Validating requirements
3.5. SRS (Software Requirement Specification):
Concept of SRS, General Format of SRS,
Need/Importance of SRS.
140
UNIT-IV 4a. Use design concept 4.1. Design approaches of software engineering
of software 4.2. Design process and quality: Design concept,
Software engineering. Design Model, Pattern based Design
Design and 4b. Apply testing on 4.3. UID: The golden rules, User interface analysis and
Testing software Design steps
4.4. Introduction to Software Testing-Testing
fundamentals, Testing objectives, testing principles
4.5. Basics of software testing-Black Box and White
Box Testing
UNIT-V 5a. Comprehend the 5.1. Reactive vs. Proactive Risk Strategies
Risk Management; 5.2. Software Risks
Risk 5b. Know the actual 5.3. Risk Identification
Management estimation of 5.4. Risk Projection
and Estimation software Project. 5.5. Software Scope and Feasibility
5.6. Resources
5.7. Software Project Estimation
5.8. Empirical Estimation Models: The COCOMO II
Model, The Software Equation
UNIT-VI 6a. Appreciate the 6.1. Introduction to software project Management and
software project its need
Software structure and its
Project and 6.2. The management spectrum-4P’s and their
need;
Quality significance
6b. Know the Quality
Management concept of 6.3. Project Scheduling; Concept, Project Scheduling,
software Defining Task Network, Scheduling, Earned Value
Analysis
6.4. Software configuration management
6.5. Basic Quality concept: SQA, Software Reviews,
Software Reliability
141

Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
1 An Introduction to software 08 4 5 4 13
Engineering
2 Process and Models Of Software 08 5 4 4 13
3 Software Engineering. Practices and 08 6 4 4 14
Requirement Engineering
4 Software Design and Testing 08 4 6 4 14
5 Risk Management and Estimation 08 4 3 3 10
6 Software Project and Quality 08 4 6 6 16
Management
Total 48 27 28 25 80
Sr.
No.
1 II. Write an assignment on SDLC 02
2 II. Write the implementation SDLC on your mini project 02
3 IV. Write an assignment on DFD of your mini project 01
4 IV. Write an assignment on software testing of your mini project. 02
5 II &III. Write an assignment on calculating efforts of your mini project. 03
6 V. Write an assignment on risk management 02
7 VI. Write an assignment on quality assurance 02
8 VI. Write an assignment on six sigma technology 02
Total 16
 Prepare project feasibility report on given application.

 Case Study.

1. Roger Pressman Software Engineering Mc-Graw Hill
2. Elias Awad System Analysis and Design Galgotia Publications
Senn Analysis & Design of
3 -
Information System
142
10. MAPPING OF PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs) AND PROGRAMME

SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs) WITH COURSE OUTCOMES (COs)
S.No Course Outcome POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Relate the software and
software engineering 3 3 - - 3 - - - - 3 - -
concept.
2 Comprehend the
software process, 1 3 - 1 1 - - 1 - 1 - -
models and framework.
3 State the software
engineering principles
1 3 - - - - - - - - - -
and requirement
engineering.
4 Apply design
engineering concepts - 2 - - - - - - - - - -
and test the software.
5 Summarize the actual
risk and estimation of - 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 -
software project.
6 Able to manage the
project and quality of 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
software

No faculty members
1. Prof.R.P.Tiwari Lecturer in Computer Engineering,Govt.Polytechnic, Aurangabad
2. Prof.Dipali P.Sapkal Lecturer in Information Technology,Govt.Polytechnic, Aurangabad
143
GPA 6S207 Data Structure
COURSE TITLE: DATA STRUCTURE (DS)
COURSE CODE: 6S207
Diploma programme in which course is offered Semester in which course is offered
Computer Engineering/Information Technology Fourth Semester
1. RATIONALE
Data structure is basic technology course for organizing and arranging data in given structure.
Organizing or structuring data is important for implementation of efficient algorithms and program
development. This course includes searching, sorting techniques and different algorithms to
represent data. After learning this subject student will be able to identify the problem, analyse
different algorithms to solve the problem & choose most appropriate data structure to store data and
retrieve data.
“Develop C programs for arranging and manipulating data using given data
structure.”

(In Hours) (L+T+P) Theory Marks Practical Marks Total Marks
L T P C ESE PT ESE @ PA
(PR)
150
03 00 04 07 80 20 @25 25
Duration of the Examination (Hrs) 3 2 2 2
Legends: L-Lecture; T – Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice; P -Practical; C – Credit, ESE -
End Semester Examination; PT- Progressive Test; PA- Progressive Assessment OR-Oral
examination.
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1 Identify different data structures and operations on it.
2 Apply searching and sorting techniques on given problems.
3 Use the stack to evaluate given expressions.
4 Use Queue to store and manipulate data.
5 Develop the program for linked list.
6 Use tree and graph data structure to represent data.
144

UNIT-I 1a Identify the 1.1 Concept & Need of Data
approaches for Structure, Abstract data Type,
Introduction to
designing the effective Types of data structure: Linear
Data Structure algorithms. and nonlinear.
1b Identify operations on 1.2 Time and space complexity.
data structure. 1.3 Operations on data structure-
1c Design and implement Creation, traversing, insertion,
programs using arrays deletion, merging, searching,
sorting.
1.4 Arrays and its physical
allocation: One dimensional and
2-D array and operations on
them like Creation, Insertion,
Deletion and Display.
UNIT-II 2a Identify and apply 2.1 Sorting Techniques (Concept,
sorting techniques for Example & algorithm): Bubble
Sorting, searching
sorting the data. sort, Selection sort and Insertion
and Hashing 2b Identify and apply sort.
searching techniques (Concept & Example) Merge
techniques.
for searching sort, quick sort, Radix sort.
2c Identify and apply 2.2 Searching Techniques: Linear
various hashing search, Binary search.
techniques 2.3 Hashing Techniques: Hash
functions- Division method,
mid square method.
UNIT-III 3a Develop an algorithm 3.1 Definition of stack, Stack as an
for PUSH and POP ADT.
Stack
operations. 3.2 Array representations of stack
3b Evaluate various 3.3 PUSH and POP operations on
Expressions based on stack, Stack Underflow & Overflow.
stack. 3.4 Applications of stack.
3c Identify the areas 3.5 Expression Conversion: Infix to
where stack is Prefix & Infix to Postfix. Evaluation of
applicable. postfix & prefix Expression.
UNIT-IV 4a Implement queue with 4.1 Define queue and its terms, Queue
various operations on as an ADT
Queue
queue. 4.2 Array representation of Queue,
4b Select appropriate Operations on Queue, Queue
queue for given Overflow & Underflow.
problem. 4.3 Limitation of Single Queue.
4.4 Types of queue (Introductory
approach only): Circular Queue,
priority queue, double ended
queue.
4.5 Applications of queue
145
UNIT-V 5a Write algorithms for 5.1 Define linked list and its
to insertion deletion at terminologies.
Linked List
beginning, middle and 5.2 Linked List representation
end of list. using structure and array.
5b Identify types of 5.3 Operations on linked list:
linked list. insertion and deletion at
Beginning, middle and end of list.
Count number of nodes in list.
5.4 Limitations of singly linked list.
5.5Concept of circular linked list and
doubly linked list
5.6 Representation of Stack using
Linked list.
UNIT-VI 6a Identify types of tree. 6.1 Definition and terminologies in
6b Implement various tree: root, leaf node, level, depth,
Trees and
tree manipulations degree, path and sibling.
Graphs algorithms. 6.2 Types of Tree: Binary tree,
6c Prepare adjacency complete binary tree and full
matrices and binary tree. Binary search tree:
adjacency list insertion and deletion of a node
6d Find the Spanning in binary search tree,
tree using Kruskal Expression Tree.
algorithm. 6.3 Tree traversal: in-order, pre-
order, post-order.
6.4 Graph: Definition and its
terminologies, Representation of
Graph: adjacency matrices and
adjacency list, spanning tree
using Kruskal Algorithm.

No. Hours
R U A Total
I Introduction to data structure 06 4 2 2 08
II Sorting, searching and 09
4 4 8 16
Hashing techniques.
III Stack 09 4 4 6 14
IV Queue 06 4 6 2 12
146
V Linked List 08 4 6 4 14
VI Trees and Graph 10 2 6 8 16
Total 48 21 29 30 80
( Revised Bloom’s Taxonomy)

(Practicals should implemented using C programming)
Sr.no. Unit Practical Exercises Total

No. Hrs.
1 1 Prepare chart for types of data structure and their operations 04
2 Write program for implementing operations on array like 04
creating, inserting & deleting.
3 Write program for creating and displaying 2D array 02
4 2 Write program for bubble sort and insertion sort to sort given 04
array list.
5 Write program for selection sort. 02
6 Write program for to search a particular item in array using 02

Linear search.
7 Write program for to search a particular item in array using 04
Binary search.
8 3 Write program for implementing PUSH & POP Operation of 04
stack.
9 Write program to convert infix to postfix expression 04
10 Write program to convert infix to prefix expression 02
11 4 Write program for implementing Queue operations 04
12 Write program for implementing circular Queue. 04
13 5 Write program for adding and deleting data at the end of the 04
linked list.
14 Write program for adding and deleting data at the beginning 04
of the linked list.
15 Write program for adding and deleting data at the middle of 04
the linked list.
16 Write program for counting number of nodes in Linked List 04
17 6 Write program for constructing Binary Search Tree and tree 06
traversal (Inorder, Preorder & Postorder)
18 Solve problem for given graph for designing spanning tree. 02
Total 64
1. Students will prepare chart/poster for given topics

147
2. Prepare presentation and deliver seminar on various topics covered like sorting,
searching, stack, linked list, queue, tree
3. Students are expected to develop minimum one program of particular topic as an
example to exhibit real life application.
4. Design and implement program for stack using linked list.
5. Design and implement program for queue using liked list
outcomes.
b. Q & A technique.
c. Demonstration
d. Seminars
List of Books

1 Yashwant Kanetkar Data Structure using C BPB Publications
2 Aaron M. Data Structures Using C BPB Publications
Tenenbaum
3 Ellis Horowitz, Fundamentals Of Data Structures Universities of Press
Anderson-Freed, in C
Sahni
S.
No.

2 C compiler Turboc3.4 and above versions
12. LIST OF LEARNING WEBSITES

1. ‘C’ Programming Language: http://www.w3schools.in/cprogramming-
language/intro/
2. Learn DS Online: http://www.learndsonline.com/
148
3. „DS’ Frequently Asked Questions: http://www.ds-faq.com

Sr.No Course Outcome POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
Implement the - 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO1 algorithms of
different data
structure.
Apply searching and - - 3 3 - - - - - - 2 2
CO2 sorting techniques on
problems.
Evaluate the stack - 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 2
CO3 expressions.
Develop the program - - 2 3 - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 for Queue.
Develop the program - - 3 3 - - - - - - 2 2
CO5 for linked list.
Construct the tree - 2 2 3 - - - - - - 2 2
CO6 structure and graph
structure.

Sr Name of the faculty members Designation and Institute
No
1 Mrs. R.S. Sindge Lecturer In Information Technology
2 Mrs V.B.Kundlikar Lecturer In Information Technology
3 Mr. P B Lahoti Lecturer In Computer Engineering
149
GPA 6P301 Microprocessor & Programming
COURSE TITLE: MICROPROSESSOR & PRAOGRAMMING (MPP)
COURSE CODE: 6P301
COMPUTER ENGINEERING FOURTH SEMESTER
1. RATIONALE
Microprocessor is brain of computer. Intel family is widely used all over the world. 8085 is the 8-
bit CPU and 8086 is the 16-bit CPU. 8086 is the base of all upward developed processors. It is more
powerful and efficient computing machine. It overcomes all major limitations of the previous
processors. Itis able to get interfaced with 8-bit, 16-bit systems. This subject covers Basics of 8085,
architecture of 8086 along instruction set. It also covers assembly language programming with
effective use of procedure and macros. This will act as base for the advanced assembly language
programming for next generation microprocessors.
The student will be able to:
“Develop code, debug, test and execute various assembly language programs
using 8086 instructions set”
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME

L T P C ESE PT ESE @ PA
(PR)
150
03 00 02 05 80 20 25@ 25
Legends: L-Lecture; T – Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice; P -Practical; C – Credit,ESE-
examination.
3. COURSE OUTCOMES
I. Describe the architecture of 8085 microprocessor.
II. Analyse 8086 microprocessor architecture and its operating modes.
III. Identify the addressing modes, instruction sets of 8086.
IV. Illustrate the functions of APL Tools, Procedure and Macro.
149
V. Develop interfacing of 8086 with memory devices.

UNIT-I 1a Explain Memory 1.1 Organization of
based system. microprocessor-based system,
Basics of
memory, input and output.
Microprocessor
1b State & explain type (PO1, PO2)
of buses.
1.2 Types of Buses. (PO2)
1c Draw pin diagram of
8085 microprocessor.
1.3 Features of 8-bit
1d Draw and explain microprocessors (PO1)
block diagram of
8085 1.4 Pin configuration of 8085,
Functional Pin diagram of
1e Describe generation 8085 (PO2)
of control signal.
1.5 Architecture of 8085
microprocessor, Functional
block diagram of 8085. (PO2)
UNIT-II 2a Draw pin diagram of 2.1 8086 Microprocessor: Salient
8086 features, Pin descriptions,
16 bit Architecture of 8086 -
Microprocessor:8086. 2b Explain architecture Functional Block diagram,
of 8086 Register organization, Concepts
of pipelining, Memory
2c Draw timing diagram segmentation, and Physical
of 8086 in maximum memory addresses generation.
mode (PO 1, PO2, PO3)
2.2 Minimum Mode operation and

2d Calculate 20 bit
its timing diagram, Maximum
physical address
Mode operation and its timing
having CS: 5093H & diagram (PO 2, PO3)
IP:2000H
2e Describe Memory
segmentation.
UNIT-III 3a State & explain 3.1 Machine Language Instruction

different addressing format, addressing modes.
Instruction Set of (PO1,PO2, PO3)
mode of 8086.
8086 Microprocessor
3b Give syntax & use of 3.2 Instruction set, Groups of
MOVS & CMPSB Instructions: Arithmetic
instruction Instructions, Logical
150
Instructions, Data transfer

3c List any four process instructions (PO3)
control instruction
3.3 Bit manipulation instructions,
String Operation Instructions,
Program control transfer or
branching Instructions, Process
control Instructions. (PO3)
UNIT-IV 4a State use of ALP tool. 4.1 Assembly Language
Programming. Tools: Editors,
Procedure, Macro & Assembler, Linker, Debugger.
4b List different
Assembly Language assembly directive & (PO1, PO2)
operator.
Programming 4.2 Assembler directives and
4c Develop program on Operators (PO1)
branch instruction
4.3 Procedure: Defining Procedure -
4d Differentiate between Directives used, FAR and
NEAR, CALL and RET
NEAR & FAR
instructions, Reentrant and
CALL.
Recursive procedures, Assembly
Language Programs using
4e Explain Macro with Procedure.
suitable example.
4.4 Defining Macros: Assembly
Language Programs using
Macros.
4.5 Assembly Language Program
on: Sum of series, Arithmatic
operation on BCD & Hex
numbers, finding smallest and
largest number in array,
arranging ascending and
descending order, finding
even/odd number, Block
Transfer, String operation- find
length, reverse, concatenate,
compare and copy, count
numbers of “1” and “0”in 16 bit
no.
UNIT-V 5a Explain Stack
structure of 8086. 5.1 Stack structure of 8086,
Interrupt & interrupt service
Special architectural 5b Explain interrupt of routine, Interrupt cycle of
8086 8086.
features and
Interfacing with 8086 5c Differentiate 5.2 Non-maskable interrupt,
maskable and non- Maskable interrupt
maskable interrupt
5.3 Timing and delay.
5d Explain RAM
interfacing. 5.4 Static RAM Interfacing
151

No. Hours Marks
R U A Total
I Basics of Microprocessor 07 4 6 0 10
II 8086: 16-bit Microprocessor 10 6 8 4 18
III Instruction Set of 8086 12
Microprocessor 4 8 6 18
IV Procedure, Macro & 12
Assembly Language
Programming 4 6 12 22
V Special architectural features 07
and Interfacing with 8086 4 6 2 12
Total 48 22 34 24 80
Legends: R = Remembrance; U = Understanding; A = Application and above levels (
Revised Bloom’s Taxonomy)
Sr.no. Unit No. Practical Exercises Total

Hrs.
1 1 02
Demonstrate kit/simulator of 8085 and its instruction manual
2 2 Identify the Assembly Language programming tools like 02

Assembler, linker, debugger, editor.
3 2 Write an Assembly Language Program to add / subtract two 02
16 bit numbers.
4 2 Write an ALP to find sum of series of numbers. 02
5 2 Write an ALP to multiply two 16 bit unsigned/ signed 02
numbers.
6 2 Write an ALP to divide two unsigned/ signed numbers 04
(32/16 , 16/8, 16/16, 8/8 )
7 2 Write an ALP to add / Sub / multiply / Divide two BCD 04
numbers.
8 2 Write an ALP to find smallest/ largest number from array of 02
n numbers.
9 3 Write an ALP to arrange numbers in array in ascending/ 02
descending order.
10 4 Write an ALP to perform block transfer data using string 04
instructions / without using string instructions.
152
11 4 Write an ALP to compare two strings using string 02

instructions / without using string instructions.
12 4 Write an ALP to display string in reverse order, string 04
length, Concatenation of two strings.
Total 32
1. Develop programs related with unit wise topics in computer laboratory.

2. Develop any module of to be useful in real life application.
3. Multimedia presentation of module developed by students.

outcomes.
a. Improved Lecture methods: -
Concepts should be explained thoroughly in theory sessions
b. Concept implemented in laboratory appropriately along with the problem solving
c. Activity based learning: -
Concept should be developed by giving problems to students as assignments.
List of Books

1 Douglous V. Hall Microprocessor & interfacing Tata -McGraw Hill
(programming & hardware)
Revised Second Edition
2 Ramesh S. Microprocessor Architecture, Penram International
Gaonkar Programming and Applications Publishing (India)
with
the 8085
3 A.K. Ray, Advanced Microprocessors and Tata -McGraw Hill

K.M.Bhurchandi Peripherals
4 Walter A. Triebel, The 8088 and 8086 Pearson Publications

Avtar Singh Microprocessors
153
S.
No.
1 8085 microprocessor kits / Simulation 8085 microprocessor kits

software
2 Computer System Computer Systems with

minimum PIII processor
(equivalent/higher) and 512
MB RAM.
1. Simulator such as: http://8085simulator.codeplex.com/ http://gnusim8085.org/ or its
equivalent
2. www.pcguide.com/ref/CPU
3. www.CPU-World.com/Arch/
4. www.tutorialspoint.com/assembly_programming/
5. Intel 8086 microprocessor architecture: http://www.cpu-world.com/Arch/8086.html
http://www.emu8086.com/

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
Describe the
CO1 architecture of 8085 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0
microprocessor.
Analyse 8086
CO2 microprocessor
architecture and its 2 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
operating modes.
Identify the addressing

CO3 modes instruction sets 2 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
of 8086.
Illustrate the functions

CO4 of ALP Tools, 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Procedure and Macro.
Ability to Develop
programs on 1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
CO5
8086microprocessors.
154

No
1 Mr. P. S. Hiwale Lecturer In Computer Engineering
2 Mr. P. B. Lahoti Lecturer In Computer Engineering
155
6S402 GPA S/W Development Tool
COURSE TITLE- SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT TOOLS (SDT)

COURSE CODE 6S402
Diploma programme in which course is offered Semester in which course is

offered
Computer Engineering Information Technology Fourth semester
1. RATIONALE
Software development tool is applied level course. This course provides .net
framework for designing and developing business application and desktop applications. It
includes core C# construct, windows programming and database connectivity with
ADO.NET.
2. COMPETENCY
The course will be able to

"Develop business applications and windows application using C# as the
programming platform"
Teaching Total credits Examination scheme
scheme (L+T+P) Theory Marks Practical Total Marks
(In hours) marks
L T P C ESE PA ESE PA
(PR)
00 00 04 04 00 00 #50 75
125

Credit, ESE -End Semester Examination; PT- Progressive Test; PA- Progressive
Assessment OR-Oral examination
4. COURSE OUTCOMES:
I. Identify the role of .Net Framework with .Net platform.
II. Demonstrate console applications using OOP concepts in C#.
III. Develop effective GUI application using Windows Forms.
156
IV. Develop interactive GUI application with database connectivity.

1. Unit –I 1a Identify the role of 1.1 Building blocks of .net: CLR, CTS,
.Net
2. Introduction to and CLS.
framework/platform.
Building Blocks 1.2 The Role of the Base Class
of the .NET Libraries, core C# features.
Platform 1.3 The Role of the Common
Intermediate Language, The Role of
.NET Type Metadata,
Understanding the Common Type
System,
1.4 Building .NET Applications Using
Sharp Develop: introduction to C#
in .net platform
Unit -II 2a. Develop console 2.1 A Simple C# Program, Variations
Core C# application using C#. on the Main() Method, Specifying
Programming 2b. Implement OOP an Application Error Code,
Constructs concepts using C# Processing Command-Line
Arguments.
2.2 The System. Console Class,
System Data Types and C#
Shorthand Notation, Variable
Declaration and Initialization,
Narrowing and Widening Data
Type Conversions.
2.3 C# Iteration Constructs (loops)
Decision Constructs (statements),
Methods and Parameter
Modifiers.
2.4 C# Arrays: Array Initialization
Syntax, Defining an Array of
157
Objects, Understanding the Enum

Type, Understanding the
Structure Type, Understanding
Value Types and Reference
Types, C# Nullable Types.
2.5 Object oriented concepts in C#
Class, inheritance, polymorphism,
structured exception handling,
Object lifetime, interface,
Delegates, Events, and Lambdas.
Unit –III 3a Develop different 3.1 Windows Forms Control
Programming GUI using Windows Hierarchy, Adding Controls to
with Windows Forms Forms (IDE-Free), Adding
Forms Controls 3b Develop Attractive Controls to Forms (via VS .NET)
GUI using different 3.2 The TextBox Control, Button
controls. Control, Radio button Control,
Checkbox Control, Listboxes &
comboboxes Control, The Month
Calendar Control, Date Time
Type, Assigning ToolTips to
Controls, Track Bar Control,
Working with Panel Controls .
3.3 The UpDown Controls: Domain
UpDown and Numeric UpDown,
Configuring a Control's
Anchoring Behaviour,
Configuring a Control's Docking
Behaviour, Building Custom
Dialog Boxes, Creating the
Images.
Unit –IV 4a Interpret role of 4.1 The Need for ADO.NET, The
Database ADO.NET to
Role of ADO.NET Data
connectivity establish connection
with ADO.NET with database. Providers.
4b Design and develop
4.2 Types of System.Data, Examining
interactive GUI
158
using ADO.NET the Data Column Type, DataRow

type Building a Complete
DataTable, Understanding the
DataView Type.
4.3 The Role of the DataSet, Building
a Simple Test Database, Selecting
a Data Provider.
4.4 The Types of the
System.Data.OleDb, namespace,
working with the Connected Layer
of ADO.NET.
4.5 Working with the
OleDbDataReader, Inserting,
Updating, and Deleting Records
Using OleDbCommand.
4.6 Executing a Stored Procedure
Using OleDbCommand, Working
with the SQL Data Provide

No. Hours/ R U A Total Marks
Practical Level Level Level
Hours
I 9 Introduction to Building
Blocks of the .NET Platform.
II Core C# Programming
Construct
III Programming with Windows Not Applicable
Forms Controls
IV Database connectivity with
ADO.NET
Bloom’s Taxonomy)
159
Sr.no. Unit No. Practical Exercises Hours

1 01 Install latest version of visual studio IDE 02
2 02 Implement Simple C# program 02
3 Program for implementing loops
4 Program for implementing decision statements 02
5 Program for implementing array 02
6 Program for implementing structure 02
7 Program for implementing class &object 02
8 Program for implementing inheritance. 02
9 Program for implementing interface 02
10 Program for implementing exception handling 02
11 Program for implementing Delegates 02
12 Program for implementing user defined Delegates 02
13 Program for implementing events 02
14 3 Implement a program to create window’s form using different 04
control such as label, textbox, button, radio button and
checkbox.
15 Implement a program to create window’s form using List boxes 04
& combo boxes Control, The Month Calendar Control, Date
Time Type,
16 Create simple login form. 04
17 Implement a program to create window’s form using Building
Custom Dialog Boxes,
18 Create registration form to create mail-id for account. 04
19 Create application using all controls. 04
20 Create students registration form 04
21 4 Program to create database connectivity using ADO.Net 04
22 Program to create database connectivity using OleDb provider
23 Program for reading data, inserting data from database. 04
24 Program to display database table using datagrid view.
25 All Create mini project based on database. 08
160
Total 64
1. Design creative GUI for given application

2. Design desktop application in C#
3. Design scientific calculator using C#
4. Design desktop application with database connection

These are sample strategies, which a teacher can use to facilitate the attainment
of course outcomes.

b. Q & A technique.
c. Demonstration
d. Seminars

List of Books

1 Pro C# 2010 and the Andrew Troelsen Paul Manning
.NET 4 Platform, Fifth
Edition
2 C# and the .NET Andrew Troelsen
Platform, Second
Edition
3 CLR via C# Jeffrey Richter Microsoft Press
11. LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT/ SOFTWARE
S.
Name of equipment/Software Brief specification
No.
2 Visual Studio IDE Visual studio 2010 or onwards.
3 Database s/w SQL server 2008 or onwards/ Any other
database software
161
12. LIST OF SOFTWARE / LEARNING WEBSITES
1. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/csharp
2. http://csharp.net-tutorials.com/basics/
3. download.cnet.com

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
Summarize the role of
CO1 .Net Framework with - 3 - 3 - - - - - - - -
.Net platform.
Develop console
CO2 applications using oop - 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3
concepts in C#.
Develop attractive GUI
CO3 application using - 3 3 3 - - - - - - 3 -
Windows Forms.
Develop interactive GUI
CO4 application with - 3 3 3 - - - - - - 3 3
database connectivity.

No
2 Mrs. D.P.Sapkal Lecturer In Information Technology
162
6S403 GPA Java Programming
COURSE TITLE- JAVA PROGRAMMING (JP)

COURSE CODE 6S403

offered
Computer Engineering Information Technology Fourth Semester
1. RATIONALE
Java programming is applied level course which enhances and refines the object
oriented paradigm. Java is rapidly becoming the dominant application development
language and system programming language. JAVA being platform independent
language and open source software is used to develop business & mobile applications.
This course includes OOP concept, multithreading, java database connectivity and
applet programming.
2. COMPETENCY
The course will be able to
"Implement java program for solving real world problems."
Teaching Total Credits Examination Scheme

Scheme (L+T+P) Theory Practical Marks Total
(In Hours) Marks Marks
(PR)
03 00 04 07 80 20 #25 25 150

Credit, ESE -End Semester Examination; PT- Progressive Test; PA- Progressive
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
I. Select programming language for implementing OOP concepts
II. Implement encapsulation in java.
III. Implement reusability, extensibility concept and import, create packages.
IV. Demonstrate multithreaded program and handle runtime exception.
163
V. Establish connection between database and java program.

VI. Design window using applet and frame.

Unit –I 1a Select best object 1.1 Definition of JAVA, Getting
Introduction to
oriented programming started with JAVA, difference
Java
Programming language. between java, c, c++.
1b Write simple java 1.2 Rules & Structure of JAVA, java
program using features,
structure of java 1.3 Variable and data types, declaring
program. variables, variables assigning,
1c Use java features to literal,number literal, Boolean
develop programs. literal, expression.
1d Write java programs 1.4 Operators:- arithmetic operator,
using different relational operator, logical
operators. operator, assignment operator,
1e Use array data type for increment & decrement operator,
storing and assessing operator precedence
group of data in java. 1.5 Arrays: declaring array variable,
1f Use decision statement creating array objects , accessing
and loop statement in array elements and
given programs. multidimensional array
1.6 Decision making statement: if
statement, if-else statement, Switch
statement.Loop statement: for
loops, while & do loops, while
loops. do…. While loops,
breaking out of loops.
Unit –II 2a Create class and object 2.1 Declare and Define classes, define
Classes and
for given application. member function of a class. Create
Wrapper
classes. 2b Demonstrate method instance/object of class.
overloading in 2.2 Object as function arguments,
164
program. Method overloading.

2c Choose appropriate 2.3 Constructor and their types,
constructor in a constructor overloading, this
program keyword.
2d Use various string 2.4 Strings class, string constructors.
functions in program. String functions: string length,
2e Use wrapper classes in concatenation, comparison.
java. 2.5 Vectors, Wrapper classes:
Number: Double, Float, Byte,
Short, Integer, Long.
2.6 Command line arguments,
garbage collector.
Unit-III 3a Identify the use of 3.1 Inheritance: Need of inheritance,
Inheritance
inheritance. creating subclasses, types: single
and packages
3b Apply appropriate inheritance, multilevel inheritance,
type of inheritance in hierarchical inheritance. Use of
given program. super keyword.
3c Demonstrate multiple 3.2 Method overriding, final keyword,
inheritance using finalize method, abstract method &
interface. class.
3d Make use of built in 3.3 Interface: Defining interface,
packages in java. Extending interface, implementing
3e Create and use user interface, accessing interface
defined packages in variable.
given application. 3.4 Packages: introduction to all build
in packages.
3.5 Creating user defined packages,
accessing packages, adding class to
a package, putting classes together.
3.6 Creating package within a package.
Unit-IV 4a Identify exceptions 4.1 Types of error, exception.
Exception occurred in a program.
4.2 Exception handling mechanism
handling and 4b Detect exception and
Multithreading manage that exception using try-catch statements, throws
in a given application.
exception. User defined exception.
4c Develop a threads for
165
given program. 4.3 Thread, thread life cycle.

4.4 Creating thread: by extending
thread class and implementing
runnable class.
4.5 Stopping & blocking a thread,
thread exception.
4.6 Thread priority, synchronization.
Unit-V 5a Identify the role of 5.1. I/O stream classes: Input stream
I/O Basics and input stream and
classes, Output stream classes,
JDBC output stream.
5b Use character byte Byte stream classes, and
stream classes for
Character stream classes.
writing and reading
data. 5.2. Other I/O stream classes:
5c Identify components
random access file, stream
of JDBC.
5d Design a code to tokenizer.
connect to database
5.3. Introduction to JDBC: JDBC
using java.sql.
Connection. Architecture, Common JDBC
5e Develop an
Components. JDBC Driver
application to read
and write data from types.
and to database using
5.4. java.sql, Connection, Statement,
statement and result
set classes. and Result set, SqlException.
Unit-VI 6a Select appropriate 6.1 Introduction to AWT package’s
Introduction to
class for designing classes and interfaces.
AWT
window. 6.2 Windows fundamentals.
6b Create an applet for Introduction to applets.
given application. 6.3 How applets& application are
6c Create frame for different. Applet life cycle,
given application. applet tag, creating applets &
6d Draw different shapes parameters to applets.
using graphics 6.4 Working with frame windows,
function creating a frame window in
applet, display information
within a window.
6.5 Creating Graphics & Colors:
graphical class, lines, rectangle,
166
circle & ellipse, drawing arc,

drawing & fillings text & font,
creating font objects, using color
objects.
6. SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH HOURS & MARKS

(THEORY)
No. Hours Marks
R U A Total
1 Introduction to Java 8 3 5 4 12
Programming
2 Classes and Wrapper classes 8 3 5 4 12
3 Inheritance and packages 8 4 4 6 14
4 Exception handling and 8 4 4 6 14
Multithreading
5 I/O Basics and JDBC 10 4 4 8 16
6 Introduction to AWT 6 4 4 4 12
Total 48 22 26 32 80
Bloom’s Taxonomy)
Sr Unit Practical/Exercises App.

. No. Hours
N Required
o
1 1 Install JDK for java. 4
Write a simple java program
2 Implement programs using arithmetic operators for 4
given problem.
Demonstrate programs using condition statements
for given problems
3 Demonstrate program using 1D array for given 4
problem
Demonstrate program using 2D array for given
problem.
4 2 Write Program To Create Instance & Class Variable 4
and member function for given problem
Implement program for method overloading.
5 Demonstrate constructor and its type for given 4
problem.
6 Write a java program to demonstrate use of Command 4
Line Argument
Write a java program to demonstrate string functions,
vector data type.
7 Demonstrate a program for use of wrapper classes in 4
given problem.
167
8 3 Write a java program to demonstrate for 4

inheritance and its types
9 Write a java program Using Method Overriding 4
Write Program for multiple inheritance using interface.

10 Write Program to use built in packages in given 4
problem and write a program for creating user defined
packages.
11 4 Write a java program for implementing 4
multithreading using both methods
12 Write a java program to implement concept of 4
Exceptional handling
13 5 Implement program for writing data from keyboard 4
using I/O stream classes
14 Write a program to select data from database and 4
display selected data.
Write a program to insert data in database and display
inserted data.
15 6 1. Write a Simple Program On Applets. 4
2. Write a java program Using Graphics To
Draw ,Fill, Use Color
16 1. Create Small Application For frame 4
2. Create Small Application using graphics in
frame
Total 64
1. Install different versions of JDKs

2. Install IDE for java such as Net beans, eclipse.
3. Install any one database(My SQL, SQL server, Oracle)
outcomes.

b. Q & A technique.
c. Demonstration
d. Seminars
S Author Title Publisher

r.
N
0 Patrick Naughton, Complete reference for java Tata McGraw Hill
o
1. Herbert Schildt
168
0 E. Balaguruswami. Programming with java BPB

2
0 Keyur Shah Java2 Programming Tata McGraw Hill
30 John R.Hubbard Programming with Java Tata McGraw Hill
4
S.
Name of equipment/Software Brief specification
No.
2 JDKs or IDEs jdk1.7 or higher version, NetBeans, Eclipse
a. Creating a GUI using AWT
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/awt/
b. JDBC Database Access
https://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/jdbc/
https://www.tutorialspoint.com/jdbc/index.htm
https://www.tutorialspoint.com/jdbc/jdbc_tutorial.pdf
Sr. No Course Outcome POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
Differentiate between
- 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO1 Java and C++
Make use of object
CO2 and built in classes of - 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
java.
Implement reusability
CO3 and extensibility
- 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 -
concept and create
user defined packages
Create multithreaded
CO4 program and handle - 2 2 2 - - - - - - - -
runtime exception
Establish connection
CO5 between database and - 3 3 2 - - - - - - - -
java API.
Design window using
- 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 -
CO6 applet and frame
169

Sr No Name of the faculty members Designation and Institute
2 P. S. Sadafule Lecturer In Computer Engineering
3 Mr.J.P.Joshi Lecturer In Information Technology
170
6S404 GPA Operating Systems
COURSE TITLE : OPERATING SYSTEMS

COURSE CODE : 6S404

offered
Computer Engineering/ Information Technology IV
1. RATIONALE:
Operating system is the applied level course that makes a computer system operational
so as to manage computer resources and to control users and software. This course obtains
requisite knowledge about operating system concepts, it drives all the hardware parts of the
computer and is the first piece of software to run on the machine when the system boots. Students
will learn process concept, CPU scheduling, Memory Management, Storage Management.
2. COMPETENCY:
At the end of studying this course students will be able to,
"Install & configure various Operating Systems"
3. TEACHING AND EXAMNATION SCHEME:

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE @ PA
L T P C ESE PT
(OR) (TW)
150
4 - 2 6 80 20 @25 25
Legends : L-Lecture; T-Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice ; PR- Practical; C-

Assessment, OR – Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal, ~ Online
Examination.
171
4. COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Identify structure and component of different operating system.
2. Use of process and thread for inter-process communication.
3. Apply different algorithm for scheduling and deadlock avoidance.
4. Apply paging and segmentation for memory management.
5. Distinguish between various file access and allocation methods.
6. Compare and contrast UNIX and Linux operating system.
5. DETAILED COURSE CONTENTS:

Unit - I 1a. Identify operating 1.1 Operating System- Evolution, Generation 1st,
Operating system for given 2nd, 3rd.
System application. 1.2 Different Types of Operating system, Multi
Concepts 1b. Compare operating Programmed, Multitasking, Time shared OS,
systems. Multiprocessor System, Distributed Systems,
1c. Arrange system Cluster Systems, and Real time Systems.
components for given 1.3 System components- main memory, file
system. management, Input-output Management,
1d. Identify architecture Secondary storage management.
for given operating 1.4 Simple structure, Layered, Monolithic,
system. Microkernel.
1d. Use system calls. 1.5 System calls- uses, process control, file
management, device management.
Unit – II 2a. Modify process state 2.1 The process model, process state, process
Processes using system calls. control block, context switch.
and Thread 2b. Compare schedulers. 2.2 Process scheduling- Scheduling Queues,
2c. Synchronize process Schedulers.
using semaphores. 2.3 Interprocess communication- Introduction,
2d. Select Thread model shared memory system & message passing
for given application. system, critical section problem, semaphores.
2.4 Threads- Benefits, users and kernel threads,
Multithreading Models- Many to One, One to
One, Many to Many.
Unit - III 3a. Separate CPU and IO 3.1 Scheduling & its types- Objectives, concept,
CPU burst statements from CPU and IO burst cycles, Pre-emptive, Non Pre-
Scheduling given program. emptive scheduling, Scheduling criteria.
3b. Compare scheduling 3.2 Types of scheduling algorithms- First come
and
algorithm. first served(FCFS), Shortest Job First (SJF),
Deadlocks 3c. Arrange processes to Shortest Remaining Time(SRTN), Round Robin
avoid deadlocks. (RR), Priority scheduling, multilevel queue
scheduling.
3.3 Deadlock- System Models, Necessary
conditions leading to Deadlocks, Deadlock
Handling- Preventions, avoidance, Banker’s
algorithm.
Unit - IV 4a. Utilize main memory. 4.1 Main Memory: Background
Memory 4b. Compare paging and 4.2 Swapping, Contiguous Memory Allocation
Management segmentation. 4.3 Paging, Structure of the Page Table.
4c. Calculate page fault for 4.4 Segmentation
172
given problem. 4.5 Virtual Memory: Background, Demand
4d. Identify free space Paging, Copy on Write, Page Replacement
management techniques. algorithm- LRU, FIFO, Optimal, Allocation of
frames, Thrashing.
4.6 Partitioning, Fixed and Variable, Free space
management Techniques- Bitmap, Linked List.
Unit - V 5a. Compare file and 5.1 File system Interface- File concept, Access
Storage directory. Methods, Directory and Disk structure, File
Management 5b. Identify file system System Mounting, File sharing, Protection.
structure. 5.2 File system Implementation: File system
structure. File System Implementation,
Directory Implementation, Allocation Methods,
Free Space Management, Efficiency and
performance, Recovery.
Unit - VI 6a. Compare Unix and 6.1 Unix vs Linux operating System.
Introduction Linux Operating System. 6.2 Structure of UNIX OS.
to 6b. Change boot sequence. 6.3 Booting in Linux
6c. Modify inodes. 6.4 File System of UNIX.
Unix/Linux
6.5 Inodes, directory, Superblock.
Operating
System
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
I Operating System Concepts 12 4 4 4 12
II Processes and Thread 10 2 4 4 12
III CPU Scheduling and Deadlocks 10 4 4 4 12
IV Memory Management 12 8 4 4 16
V Storage Management 10 4 4 4 12
VI Introduction to Unix/Linux 10 8 4 4 16
Operating System
Total 64 30 24 24 80
173
7. LIST OF PRACTICAL / LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS/ TUTORIALS :
Sr.
No.
1 I Installation of Linux Operating System-Fedora/Ubuntu/Centos 4
2 II Execute program to create process in Linux using fork ( ) System 2

calls.
3 II Execute program to create thread in Linux using pthread library. 4
4 II Execute program to understand multithreading. 2
5 III Execute program to understand IO burst and CPU burst processes. 2
6 III Execute program for FCFS Algorithm in C. 2
7 III Execute program for SJF and RR Algorithm in C. 2
8 III Execute program for Banker's Algorithm in C. 2
9 IV Execute program for Memory Allocation method in C. 2
10 IV Execute following command to display system memory 2

information- free, cat /proc/meminfo, vmstat, top, htop, atop,
pagesize, df -g.
11 V Execute program to understand disk allocation method in C. 4
12 VI Modify and execute GRUB configuration files. 2
13 VI Execute C program to modify inodes of given file. 2
TOTAL 32
8. SUGGESTED STUDENTS ACTIVITIES:
Other than class room and laboratory activities following are the suggested co-curricular
outcomes of this course. The students are required to maintain portfolio of their experiences.
SR. NO. ACTIVITY
1 For Real time system suggests appropriate Operating System.
2 For Latest Mobile System suggest appropriate Operating System.
3 Collect Operating System specification for educational institutes.
4 Prepare List of System call for given situations in System Software.
174
9. SUGGESTED SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL STRATERGIES:
outcomes.

b. Q & A technique.
c. Demonstration.
d. Activity based learning.
f. Use of video, animation films to explain concepts, facts and applications of
Operating System.
10. SUGGESTED LEARNING RESOURCE:
1 Operating System Silberschatz, Peter WileyIndian Edition

Concepts B. Galvin and Greg
Gagne
2 Modern Operating Andrew S Prentice Hall India
Systems Tanenbaum
3 Principles of Operating Naresh chauhan Oxford Press
Systems
4 Operating Systems D.M. Dhamdhere Tata McGraw Hill
5 Operating Systems- William Stallings Prentice Hall India
Internals and Design
Principles
6 UNIX Concepts and Sumitabha Das Tata McGraw Hill.
Applications
7 Unix Shell Programming Yashwant Kanetkar BPB publications.
Sr.
No.
1 Computer System Computer System with latest configuration.
2 Linux Fedora/Ubuntu/Centos.
12. LEARNING WEBSITE & SOFTWARE:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108101/
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_cs29/preview
3. https://computer.howstuffworks.com/operating-system.htm
175
SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs) WITH COURSE OUTCOMES (COs) :

No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Identify structure and

component of different 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
operating system.
2 Use of process and
thread for inter-process 1 2 1 1 - - - - - - - -
communication.
3 Apply different
algorithm for 1 2 2 - - - - - - 2 - -
scheduling and
deadlock avoidance.
4 Apply paging and
segmentation for - 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
memory management.
5 Distinguish between
various file access and - 1 2 - - - - - - - - -
allocation methods.
6 Compare and contrast
Unix and Linux 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 2 2
operating system.
Course Curriculum Design Committee:

No faculty members
1 Jitendra Joshi Lecturer in Information Technology, Govt. Polytechnic,
Aurangabad
2 Shashikant Bankar Lecturer in Computer Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic,

Aurangabad
3 Om Varma Lecturer in Information Technology, Govt. Polytechnic,

Aurangabad
176
6S408 GPA PYTHON PROGRAMMING
COURSE TITLE- PYTHON PROGRAMMING

COURSE CODE- 6S408

offered
Computer Engineering/Information Technology Fourth
1. RATIONALE
Python is an easy to learn, powerful programming language. It has efficient high-level data structures
and a simple but effective approach to object-oriented programming. Python code is simple, short,
readable, intuitive, and powerful, and thus it is effective for introducing computing and problem solving
to beginners. It's elegant syntax and dynamic typing, together with its interpreted nature, make it an ideal
language for scripting and rapid application development in many areas on most platforms.
2. COMPETENCY
The course content should be taught and implemented with the aim to develop the following
competencies.
“Develop general purpose programming using python"

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE @ PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR/OR) (TW)
125
1 0 4 5 00 00 50 75

194
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Install and configure python editor/IDE.

2. Use primitive data types, selection statements, loops, functions to write programs in python.
3. Develop applications using OOP basics in Python.
4. Design and develop interactive GUI application using database connectivity.
Unit Major Learning Topics And Sub-Topics

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain Only)
UNIT-1 1a.install and configure 1.1 What is Python; Python download and
Introduction the Python IDE and installation; Comments; Documentation;Multiple
to Python editor Statements on a Single Line
1 b Describe History of
1.2 Python editors; IDLE, the Python editor.
Python
1 c Write and run a 1.3 History of Python
simple Interactive and 1.4 Basic syntax of a Python program
script Modes. 1.5 Write and run a simple Interactive Mode, Script
mode
UNIT –2 2.a State and Explain 2.1 Basic Data types: variables, Multiple Assignment
basic data types with in Variables Data types and ints Multiple
Basic Data General Syntax and assignment, number ,set, string, listArrays, List
Types
use. functions
,dictionaries,
Modules , 2.2 Dictionaries: dictionary functions, tuples.
2.b Write a program on 2.3 Module basics module files are a namespace
control
if selections , while name qualification import variants
structures
and operators loop, break, continue, 2.4 Reloading modules package imports odds and
pass for loops with ends module design concepts.
examples. 2.5 Modules are objects: meta programs.
2.c State the Modules 2.6 Assignment expressions, Relational operators,
logical operators.Arithmetic Operators,
basics, Modules files
Comparison (Relational) Operators, Assignment
Operators, Logical Operators, Bitwise Operators,
Membership Operators, Identity Operators
195
2.d Describe reloading 2.7 Decision making Statement : Print if selections

modules ,if else statement, nested ifelse, Elif Statement,
Multiple Statement Groups as Suites
2.e Design a program
2.8 Python syntax rules documentation sources
on modules as objects
(meta programs interlude truth tests.
2.9 While loops break, continue, pass, and For loops,
Nested For loops with examples, Prime number
Generators.
Unit – 3 3.a State the Exceptions 3.1 Exception basics first examples.
and it’s types .with 3.2 Exception idioms exception catching modes ,
Exceptions examples. class exceptions.
and Functions 3. b Develop simple 3.3 Function basics scope.
built in and program using 3.4 Rules in functions more on “global” (and
user defined exceptions “nonlocal”) more on “return”
3.c State exception 3.5 More on argument passing special argument
idioms, exceptions matching modes odds and ends
caching modes ,class 3.6 Generator expressions and functions
exceptions with 3.7 Function design concepts : return statement
examples. 3.8 Pass by reference vs value functions are objects:
3.d State functions indirect calls
scope global and local 3.9 built in functions and user defined functions
more on return type Abs(),bool(),dir(),help(),eval(),exec(),len() and
3. e Develop a program sum(),range()
on argument passing 3.10 Data conversion functions :int(),str() and float()
special modes odds and 3.11 Basic I/O statements in Python:
ends 3.12 Reading Keyboard Input : raw_input, input
Unit - 4 4.a Define OOP’s 4.1 Oop basics: the big picture class basics a more
OOP basics realistic example using the class statement
concept with example
inheritance, 4.2 Object and Classes2oence
using class statement 4.3 Encapsulation. Abstraction
methods, live
4.4 Data Hiding. Polymorphism
demo, new- 4.b Write a program for
4.5 Inheritance
style, OO object and classes. 4.6 Learning Python, using class methods
design
4.c write a program on 4.7 Customization via inheritance specializing
inheritance, inherited methods
4.8 Operator overloading in classes
polymorphism with 4.9 Namespace rules: the whole story
inherited methods 4.10 OOP examples: inheritance and composition
classes and methods are objects odds and ends
new style classes
196
Unit – 5 5a. Import tkinter 5.1 the tkinter module
GUI module to create 5.2 Geometry Management: pack(),grid() and

programming window place() method
using tkinter 5.3 tkinter widgets(components/control) : button,
and SQLite 5b Design GUI canvas, checkbox, entry, frame, label, listbox,
database menu, menubutton, message, radiobutton,
application using
scrollbar, text , etc.
different widgets. 5.4 SQLite database: installation of sqlite database,
sqlite3 module, create
5c. Design GUI connection:sqlite3.connect(), create table, insert
application using data, display and update data
database connection
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
1 Introduction to Python 02
Basic Data Types ,dictionaries,

2 Modules , control structures and 03
operators
Exceptions and Functions built NOT APPLICABLE

3 04
in and user defined
4 OOP basics concept used in 03

Python
5 GUI programming using tkinter 04
and SQLite database
Total 16

197
Approx.
Hrs.
required
1 1 Install python editor or IDE 02
2 1 Execute a program to give input any two numbers and to find Quotient 02
and Remainder
3 1 Execute a program to find the simple interest based upon number of 02

years. If number of years is more than 12 rateof interest is 10
otherwise 15.
4 2 Execute a program to give input any number and to find square 02

and square root.
5 2 Execute a program to find simple interest using function. 02
6 2 Execute a program to find area of the circle. 02
7. 2 Execute a program To write expressions that use the conditional 02

expressions.
8. 2 Execute a program on to give input any choice 02
9. 2 Execute a program to input any number and to print all natural 02

numbers up to given number
10. 2 Execute a program to input any number and to find reverse of that 02
number
11 2 Execute a program on interchange for loop into while loop 02
12 3 Execute a program on arguments in function call 02
13 3 Execute a program on String methods & built in functions: 02

len() capitalize() find(sub[,start[, end]]) isalnum() isalpha()
isdigit() lower() islower() isupper() upper() lstrip()
14 3 Execute a program to input any string and count number of 02

uppercase and lowercase letters
15 3 Execute a program on lists and their operations 02
198
Approx.
Hrs.
required
16 3 Execute a program on the overloaded function definitions of add()- on 02

adds two numbers and other concatenates two strings..
17 3 Develop programs to understand working of exception handling and 02

assertions.
18 4 Develop program for creating class and object 02
19 4 Execute a program for constructor and their types 02
20 4 Execute a program on single inheritance. 02
21 4 Execute a program on multiple inheritances. 02
22 4 Execute a program for new style classes 02
23 5 Design GUI for login form 02
24 5 Design form for adding controls using different methods of geometry 02

management
25 5 Design GUI for application form for specific example using all controls 04
26 5 Design GUI application with database connectivity using SQLite 04
27 All Design a mini project using all concepts(maximum 2 group members) 08
Total 64

i. Prepare power point presentation showing relation between Python programming.
ii. Develop sample Application using Python.

outcomes.
b. Q & A technique.
c. Demonstration
199
d. Seminars
S.
No.
1 Computer Science With CBSE board First Edition 2014, CBSE, India
Python-II CBSE board
2 Introduction To Y. Daniel Liang Armstrong Atlantic State

University
Programming Using
Python
3 Hands-on Python Tutorial Dr. Andrew N. Loyola University Chicago

Harrington.
11. List of Major Equipment/ Instrument with Broad Specifications
S.
No.
2 Python editor / IDE Python editor 3.5 and above / IDE –

pycharm/ Jupiter
12. List of Software/Learning Websites

Software: Wiindows 7 ,. Python 3.4.3
1 http://python.swaroopch.com/
2 Learn Basic of python programming Online:
https://github.com/swaroopch/byte-of- python /
4 Text books online

https:// www.tutorialspoint.com/python/python_tutorial.pdf
200

CO. Course Outcome PO P P P P P P P P P P PS No. of hours

NO. 1 O O O O O O O O O S O2 allocated in
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 O curriculum
10 1
Analyze and design strategies for

CO1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 8
solving basic programming problems
Use primitive data types, selection

CO2 statements, loops, functions to write 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 12
programs.
Develop proficiency in creating based

CO3 applications using the Python 1 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 14
Programming Language.
Understand the various data structures

CO4 available in Python programming
0 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 10
language and apply them in solving
computational problems.
Make use of testing and debugging of

CO5 1 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 12
code written in Python

No faculty members
1 S.M. Bankar Lecturer in Computer Engineering Government Polytechnic

Aurangabad
2 P.B. Lahoti Head of the Department Computer Engineering Government

Polytechnic Aurangabad
3 V.B.Kundlikar Lecturer in Information Technology, G P Aurangabad
201
6S406 GPA PHP Programming
COURSE TITLE: PHP PROGRAMMING (PP)
COURSE CODE: 6S406

offered
COMPUTER ENGINEERING / FOURTH SEMESTER
1. RATIONALE
PHP and MYSQL is an applied level course, provides server side scripting for creating
dynamic and interactive database driven websites. PHP is widely used as efficient open source
technology. Student will be able to design dynamic interactive web based applications such as
online banking, ticket/hotels booking sites, E-Commerce etc..
“Develop interactive web based application using PHP and MySQL”

01 00 04 05 00 00 #50 75
125
Legends: L-Lecture; T – Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice; P -Practical; C – Credit, ESE
-End Semester Examination; PT- Progressive Test; PA- Progressive Assessment OR-Oral
examination.
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
I. Demonstrate simple programs using basic PHP concepts
II. Use built in and user defined functions in PHP programming.
III. Design Web pages using form controls to display web-based content.
IV. Develop Web pages to handle cookies, session and exceptions.
V. Demonstrate CRUD (Create, Retrieve, Update and Delete) application
177

UNIT– I 1a Define the basic of PHP 1.1 Configuration of PHP, Apache Web
Introduction to Server, MySQL and Open Source
scripts
PHP
1b Write the syntax and use 1.2 Relationship between Apache,
of Block of PHP MySQL and PHP(AMP Module)
statements. Installing PHP for (Windows, Wamp
1c Explain Global And server , XAMP server),

1.3 PHP Structure and Syntax , Creating
super global variables.
PHP pages, Rules of PHP syntax
1d List the Data types and
Integrating HTML with PHP
Elaborate it.
1.4 Constants Predefined Constants:
1e list and describe the
Static and Global Variable Super
different operators
global
1f Use of variables and
1.5 The echo Statement and print()
constants.
Function
1g Write syntax and use of
1.6 Combining HTML and PHP
conditional statement and
Adding Comments to PHP Code
loop statement 1.7 Data Types Conversions .
Changing Type with settype()
Changing Type by Casting
1.8 Operators and Expressions.
The Assignment Operator
Arithmetic Operators The
Concatenation Operator Combined
Assignment Operators Automatically
Incrementing and Decrementing an
Integer Comparison Operators
Creating More Complex Test
Expressions with the Logical
Operators Operator Precedence
1.10 The if Statement Using the else
Clause with the if Statement Using
the else if Clause with the if
178
Statement The switch Statement

Using the ? Operator
1.11 Loops : The while Statement
do...while Statement The for
Statement Breaking Out of Loops
with the break Statement Skipping
an Iteration with the continue
Statement Nesting Loops
UNIT – II 2a Develop a web page 2.1 Variable Function:
Working with In using function variable, (gettype, settype, isset, strval,
Built Functions string like predefined and floatval, intval,print_r)
formatted, math, date, 2.2 string function:
Array and File. (Chr, ord, strtolower, strtoupeer,
2b Develop a web page strlen, ltrim, rtrim, trim, substr,
using function. strcmp, strcasecmp, ctrops, strops,
stristr, str_replace, strrev, echo,
print)
2.3 Formatting Strings with PHP
Working with printf() Specifying a
Field Width Argument Swapping
Storing a Formatted String
Manipulating Strings with PHP .
Cleaning Up a String with trim()
and ltrim() and strip_tags().
2.4 Replacing a Portion of a String
Using substr_replace() Replacing
Substrings Using str_replace
Converting Case Wrapping Text
with wordwrap() and
nl2br(),Breaking Strings into
Arrays with explode()
2.5 MATH functions:
(Abs, ceil, floor, round, fmod,
min, max, pow, sqrt, rand)
2.6 Date function:
179
(Date, getdate, setdate, checkdate,

time, mktime)
2.7 Array Function:
(Count, list, in_array, current,
next, previous, end, each, sort,
array_merge, array_reverse)
2.8 File function: (Fopen, fread,
fwrite, fclose)
2.9 What Is a Function? Calling
Functions Defining a Function
Returning Values from User-
Defined Functions Variable Scope
2.10 Accessing Variables with the
global Statement Saving State
Between Function Calls with the
static Statement More About
Arguments Setting Default Values
for Arguments Passing Variable
References to Functions Testing
for the Existence of a Function.
UNIT – III 3a Implement a web page 3.1 Reading data using Form Controls
to read the data using (Text Fields, Text Areas,
Working with data
forms controls. CheckBoxes, Radio Buttons, List
and forms using
Boxes, Password Controls, Hidden
Arrays in PHP and 3b Develop a web page to
Controls, Image Maps, File
OOPS in PHP submit the values using
Uploads, Buttons)
different form methods
3.2 Submitting form values, using
and it’s Array.
$_Get and $_Post Methods,
3c Develop a web page
$_REQUEST
using OOPs concepts. 3.3 Accessing form inputs with
Get/Post functions
3.4 Combining HTML and PHP codes
together on single page, Redirecting
the user
3.5 Arrays in PHP
180
What Is an Array? Creating Arrays

Creating Associative Arrays
Creating Multidimensional Arrays
Some Array-Related Functions
3.6 Arrays, constructs User Defined
function, argument function,
variable function, Return function,
default argument, variable length
argument
3.7 Creating an Object
Properties of Objects , Object
Methods, Constructors. Object
Inheritance.
UNIT– IV 4a Demonstration about 4.1 Creating a Simple Input Form
validating User Input with Accessing Form Input with User-
Working with
html and PHP and the Defined Arrays .
Forms and User
usage of DOM, HTML. 4.2 Combining HTML and PHP Code
Sessions, Cookies
4b Implement server side on a Single Page.
and Exception
programming, sending 4.3 Using Hidden Fields to Save State.
Handling
data to the server using 4.4 Redirecting the User Sending Mail
POST and GET methods, on Form Submission System
using inner functions, Configuration for the mail()
downloading and Function Creating the Form
executing scripts from Creating the Script to Send the
the server. Mail Formatting Your Mail with
HTML
4.5 Working with File Uploads
Creating the File Upload Form
Creating the File Upload Script
4.6 Working with User Sessions
Session Function Overview Starting
a Session Working with Session
Variables Passing Session IDs in
the Query String Destroying
Sessions and Unsetting Variables
181
4.7 Error Types in PHP Exception

Handling in PHP
UNIT– V 5a Identify and apply the 5.1 Introduction to Databases

concept of a PHP Data Creating database , tables
Developing
Applications in Object to connect to a 5.2 Inserting values in table ,
PHP using MySQL MySQL database. Displaying, changing, searching,

5b Design a web based deleting records from the table
application with data 5.3 Developing applications in PHP
transfers from and to a a. Arithmetic operators through
backend database table GUI
without errors. b. Web calculator
5.4 SQL queries- insert, select, delete,
update, where, order by.

No. Hours Marks
R U A Total
I Introduction to PHP 2
II Working with In Built 4
Functions
III Working with data and forms 4
IV Session, Cookies and Error 2 NOT APPLICABLE
Handling
V Database Connectivity using 4
MYSQL
Total 16
Sr.no. Unit Practical Exercises Total.

No. hrs
1 1 Execute a PHP script to display Welcome message. 04
2 2 Develop a PHP script to demonstrate arithmetic operators, 04

comparison operator, and logical operator.
182
3 3 Develop PHP Script to print Fibonacci series. 02
4 1 Develop PHP Script to generate result and display grade. 02
5 1 Develop PHP Script to find maximum number out of three given 02

numbers.
6 1 Implement PHP Script for addition of two 2x2 matrices. 02
7 2 Implement PHP script to demonstrate Variable function 02
8 2 Implement PHP script to obtain 5! Using function 02
9 2 Execute PHP script to demonstrate string function. 02
10 2 Develop PHP script to demonstrate Date functions. 02
11 2 Develop PHP script to demonstrate Math functions. 02
12 2 Develop PHP script to demonstrate Array functions. 02
13 2&4 Execute PHP script to demonstrate File functions 04
14 3 Develop student registration form using text box, check box, 04

radio button, select, submit button. And display user inserted
value in new PHP page.
15 3 Develop Website Registration Form using text box, check box, 04

radio button, select, submit button. And display user inserted
value in new PHP page.
16 3 Implement two different PHP script to demonstrate passing 02

variables through a URL.
17 4 Develop two different PHP script to demonstrate passing 02

variables with sessions.
18 4 Implement PHP script to demonstrate passing variables with 02

cookies.
19 4 Implement a program to keep track of how many times a visitor 02

has loaded the page.
20 4 Develop an example of Error-handling using exceptions. 02
21 5 Develop a PHP script to connect MySQL server from your 04

website.
22 5 Execute a program to read customer information like cust_no, 02

cust_name, Item_purchase, and mob_no, from customer table
and display all these information in table format on output
183
screen.
23 5 Execute a program to edit name of customer to “Bob” with 02

cust_no =1, and to delete record with cust_no=3.
24 5 Execute a program to read employee information like emp_no, 02

emp_name, designation and salary from EMP table and display
all this information using table format.
25 5 Develop a dynamic web site using PHP and MySQL 04
Total 64

2. Prepare power point presentation showing relation between PHP, APACHE and
MYSQL
3. Students are expected to develop minimum one application of particular topic as an
4. Develop sample web based Application using PHP and MYSQL and present the same.

outcomes.
b. Q & A technique.
c. Demonstration
d. Seminars
List of Books

1 W. Jason Gilmore Beginning PHP and MySQL, 4th Apress, 2010
Edition
2 Steven Holzner PHP: The Complete Reference McGraw-Hill, 2008
3 Robin Nixon Learning PHP, MySQL, O'reilly Media , 2014
JavaScript, CSS & HTML5, Third
184
Edition
4 Julie C. Meloni, Teach yourself PHP, MySQL and Pearson Education,
Apache All in One , 5th Edition 2012
S.
No.
2 UBUNTU 16.04 WINDOWS 7 WAMP server / XAMPP server

1. Developing Web Pages- Udacity https://www.udacity.com/
2. Build your firs App http:// http://www.codecademy.com/tracks/web
3. Android App Development Tutorial http://www.w3schools.org/php
13. APPING OF PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs) AND PROGRAMME SPECIFIC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
Demonstrate simple
CO1 programs using basic 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - -
PHP concepts.
Use built in and user
CO2 defined functions in - 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
PHP programming.
Design eb pages using
CO3 form controls to
- 2 3 3 - - - - - - - -
display web based
content.
Develop Web pages to
CO4 handle cookies, session - 1 3 3 - - - - - - - -
and exceptions.
Demonstrate CRUD
CO5 (Create, Retrieve,
- 2 3 3 - - - - 1 - - -
Update and Delete)
application

No
185
1 S.M. Bankar Lecturer in Computer Engineering

2 P.B. Lahoti Head of the Department Computer Engineering
186
6S407 GPA RUBY Programming
COURSE TITLE: RUBY PROGRAMMING (RP)
COURSE CODE: 6S407

offered
1. RATIONALE
Ruby programming is applied level course, use for designing light weighted programs. This
course use OOP concepts and has clean and easy syntax that allows a new developer to learn very
quickly and easily.Ruby has similar syntax to that of many object oriented programming languages.
Ruby has a rich set of built-in functions, which can be used directly into Ruby scripts.
“Perform General purpose programming to develop standalone application

using ruby programming”

01 00 04 05 00 00 #50 75
125
examination.
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
I. Select strategies for solving basic programming problems using Ruby.
II. Use the Data types, selection, loops, functions to write programs.
III. Develop proficiency in creating scripts using Ruby programming.
IV. Find user defined and predefined exception errors in Ruby.
187

UNIT– I 1a Install Ruby with it’s 1.1 What is Ruby; Ruby download
Introduction to
Editor and installation; irb and SciTE;
Ruby Environment.
1b Use of puts and gets Free format; Case sensitive;
methods Comments; Statement delimiters;
1c Select the IDE Documentation;
environment to run the 1.2 Whitespace in Ruby Program.
programs and making Line Endings in Ruby Program

Reserved Words, Ruby
Ruby interactive and
Identifiers., Features of Ruby.
script modes
1.3 Ruby editors; text editor like
1d Write and run a simple
Notepad or Edit plus; .rb file;
Interactive and script
RubyWin is a Ruby Integrated
Modes.
Development Environment (IDE)
for Windows ,Ruby Development
Environment (RDE) .
1.4 Interactive Ruby (IRb)
1.5 Usage of puts, gets methods; Ruby
conventions; BEGIN and END
Statements; Garbage collection
UNIT – II 2a Identify and state basic 2.1 Basic Data Types :Name
Variables, data types with syntax characters; Variables – local,
Constant, concept it’s use eg. Variable instance, class , global;
of scope operators constants class and 2.2 Constants naming, rules and
Numbers and
naming conventions and 2.3 scope operator ::; Naming
Arrays in Ruby
rules. conventions;
2b Execute programs on 2.4 Dynamically typed; Usage of
local global variables method type
float integer Fixnum 2.5 Concept and usage with Class
Binum etc.with Numeric, Float, Integer, Fixnum
examples. and Bignum Random
188
2c Write a program on Numbersrand method

class array methods like 2.6 Arrays Concept;
delete sort length using do Class Array methods like delete,
end. sort, length and each using do
end .
UNIT – III 3a Develop a programs on 3.1 String literals using single- and
String literals using single double-quotes and their differences;

Strings conditional
3.2 Usage of #{expression};
branching and double-quotes.
3.3 Conversions using .to_i, .to_f,
statement, 3b. Write program on simple
.to_s; Usage of <<;
Operators, Regular usage of << and symbols. Concept of symbols;
expression and
3c Execute a program on 3.4 String methods like chomp,
Ranges hashes
reverse, length, upcase, downcase,
different string methods.
swapcase, capitalize, strip, length,
3d Execute a program on
index, slice, upcase!, downcase!,
conditional and case swapcase! and capitalize!
statement. 3.5 Conditional Statement Constructs
if else end elsif; while end; case
3e Execute a program on
when end .
Operators
3.6 Operators (with precedence and
3f Execute a program on associatively rules) assignment
Regular Expressions ranges comparison, bitwise operators,
logical, Range, conditional and
and hashes
Ternary operators;
3.7 Regular Expressions Simple
examples
3.8 Ranges and Hashes
UNIT– IV 4a Develop a program 4.1 Code Blocks:

on code blocks using Using do end and { };
Code Blocks List File
I/O Basic OOPS do end {} and proc it’s Usage of yield method; Concept of
Concept and method call. Proc and it’s method call; lambda.
Exception handling 4.2 File I/O File class and its method
189
4b Develop a program on open

File I/O using File 4.3 Concept of an object and that
class it’s open method everything is an object in Ruby;
4c Develop a program on Object class and its methods;
object class and 4.4 Writing a class : Standard class

method Class; initialize; new methods;
4d Develop a standard Access modifiers private and

protected; Usage of attr_reader,
class initialize new
attr_writer, attr_accessor;
method and use access
4.5 Methods: Writing own methods
modifiers.
using def end; class and instance
4e Write a program on
methods (with getter and setter);
inheritance and use of
return and concept of value
super.
returned by last statement in a
4f Execute a program on
method; variable number of
Modules
parameters using *
4g Develop a program on
4.6 Inheritance and using <;
exception handling Using super
4.7 Modules: Examples of writing a
module; Usage of require and
include; Concept of mix-ins
4.8 List.
4.9 Exception handling:
Exception class and its hierarchy;
begin rescue ensure end;

No. Hours Marks
R U A Total
I Fundamental of Ruby 2
I Variables, Constant, 4
Arrays in Ruby
190
III Strings conditional 4

branching statement, NOT APPLICABLE
Regular expression and
Ranges hashes
IV Code Blocks, List, File I/O 6
Basic OOPS Concept and
Exception handling
Total 16

Hrs.
1 1 Create a simple program in ruby 04
2 2 Ruby BEGIN Statement Ruby END Statement using puts 02

statement comment hides a line, part of a line, or several lines
from the Ruby interpreter
You can use the hash character (#) at the beginning of a line
3 4 Write a program using class and object. 02

4 2 Write a program on local variable and global variable 02
instance variable and class variable in Ruby
5 4 Create Objects in Ruby Using new Method 02
6 4 Create a Ruby Class called Customer two methods: 02
display_details: This method will display the details of the
customer.
total_no_of_customers: This method will display the total
number of customers created in the system
7 2 Execute a program on Constant in Ruby 02

8 2,3 Create a program on string literals 02
9 3 Execute a program on Arrays and Hashes. 02
10 3 Create a program on assignment , comparison, bitwise 02
operators.
11 3 Create a program on logical, Range, conditional and 04
Ternary operators.
12 3 Execute a program String methods & built in functions: 06
chomp, reverse, length, upcase, downcase, swapcase,
capitalize, strip, length, index, slice, upcase!, downcase!,
swapcase! and capitalize!
13 4 Execute a program to input any string and count 04

number of uppercase and lowercase letters
191
14 2 Create a program on lists 04

15 4 Execute a program on single inheritance. 02
16 4 Execute a program on multiple inheritance.. 02
17 3 Create a program To write expressions that use the conditional 02
expressions.
18 3 Execute the overloaded function definitions of add()- on 02
adds two numbers and other concatenates two strings..
Total 64

2. Prepare power point presentation showing relation between Interactive Ruby.
4. Develop sample Application using Ruby.

outcomes.
b. Q & A technique.
c. Demonstration
d. Seminars
List of Books

1 Peter Cooper Beginning Ruby
2 Chris Pine Learn to Program
3 Yukihiro Ruby programming Language

Matsumoto. Tutorial
192
S.
No.
2 Windows 7 Ruby1.6.7, Apache 1.3.19-5 Web
server.

1. http://www.ruby-lang.org
2. Text books online http://www.tutorialspoint.com/ruby/ruby_tutorial.pdf

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
Select the strategies for
CO1 solving basic
2 3 2 - - - - - - - - -
programming problems
with Ruby
Use data types,
CO2 selection statements,
- 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
loops, functions to write
programs
Develop proficiency in
CO3 creating scripts using
- 2 3 3 - - - - - - - -
the Ruby Programming
Language.
Find the error handling

CO4 using exception with - 1 3 3 - - - - - - - -
examples

No
193
6S409 GPA Android Programming
COURSE TITLE: ANDROID PROGRAMMING (AP)
COURSE CODE: 6S409

offered
1. RATIONALE
Android Programming is applied level course provides platform for mobile application
development. This course is designed to enable student to build mobile applications on android
operating system. This course covers the basics of Android along with required programming codes
for developing necessary programming skills for mobile applications.
“Develop GUI based mobile applications with Eclipse Android SDK on open
source Android and propriety platforms with database connectivity”

L T P C ESE PT ESE # PA
(PR)
125
01 00 04 05 00 00 #50 75
examination.
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
I. Identify the role of android framework in android platform.
II. Develop android user interface Layout.
III. Develop interactive event driven mobile application.
IV. Develop application using menus and dialog boxes using SQLite.
V. Find the error handling using exception with examples.
202

UNIT– I 1.a Identify components of 1.1 Overview of different mobile
Introduction to Android Architecture and application development platforms.
Android
environment with framework. 1.2 Linux Kernel : Libraries ,Android
architecture
Runtime ,Application Framework,
Android Startup and Zygote,
Android Debug bridge, Android
Permission model,
Android Manifest File .
1.3 Mobile technology : Overview of
Android - An Open Platform for
Mobile development
1.4 Open Handset Alliance , Use
Android for mobile app
development, Android
Marketplaces , Android
Development Environment setup .
1.5 Android development Framework
- Android-SDK, Eclipse Emulators
/ Android AVD.
1.6 Creating & setting up custom
Android emulator
1.7 Android Project Framework and
its applications
UNIT – II 2.a Describe Android 2.1 Android application components
Android Activities application components Intent, Activity, Activity
and activity. Lifecycle, Broadcast receivers,
Services and Manifest
2.2 Create Application and new
Activities
2.3 Expressions and Flow control,
Android Manifest.
203
UNIT – III 3.a Develop an Event driven 3.1 Event driven Programming in
Advanced UI
programs on text edit and Android (Text Edit, Button clicked
Programming and
)
UI Design button clicked. 3.2 Creating a splash screen
3.b.Develop simple UI layout. 3.3 Introduction to threads in Android
3.c Describe GUI object in 3.4 Simple UI -Layouts and Layout

XML. properties Fundamental Android
UI Design Introducing Layouts
Creating new Layouts Drawable
Resources Resolution and density
independence (px,dp,sp)
3.5 XML Introduction to GUI objects
3.6 Push Button Text / Labels
EditText Toggle Button
WeightSum Padding Layout
Weight.
UNIT– IV 4a Design and develop 4.1 Menu: Custom Vs. System Menus
Toast, Menu, menus, dialogs and 4.3 Creating and Using Handset menu
toast Button (Hardware)
Dialog, List and
Adapters Working 4b Create Android 4.4 Android Themes, Dialog, create
Manifest.xml File an Alter Dialog
with Database
4c Connect and create 4.5 Toast in Android, List & Adapters
SQLite database. 4.6 Android Manifest.xml File
4.7 SQLite: Open Helper and create

database
4.8 Open and close a database

No. Hours Marks
R U A Total
I Introduction to Android 2
environment with architecture
II Android Activities and UI 4
204
Design
III Advanced UI Programming 4
and UI Design NOT APPLICABLE
IV Toast, Menu, Dialog, List and 6
Adapters Working with
Database
Total 16

Hrs.
1 1 Develop “Hello World” application to “Hello World” in the 04

middle of the screen in the red color with white background.
2 1 Develop sample application with login module.(Check 04
username and password), validate it for login screen or alert
the user with a Toast.
3 2 Execute a login application using username as Email ID else 02
login button must remain disabled.
4 2 Develop Login application and open a browser with any one 02
search engine.
5 3 Develop an application to display “Hello World” string the 04
number of times user inputs a numeric value. (Example. If
user enters 5, the next screen should print “Hello World”
five times.)
6 3 Develop spinner with strings from the resource folder (res 04
>> value folder). On changing spinner value, change image.
7 3 Develop an application to change screen color as per the user 04
choice from a menu.
8 3 Develop an application that will display toast (Message) at 04
some regular interval of time.
9 3 Develop a background application that will open activity on 04
specific time.
10 4 Develop an application that will have spinner with list of 04
animation names. On selecting animation name, that
animation should affect on the images displayed below.
11 3 Develop an UI listing the diploma engineering branches. If 04
user selects a branch name, display the number of semesters
and subjects in each semester.
12 4 Use content providers and permissions by implementing read 04
phonebook contacts with content providers and display in
the list.
13 4 Develop an application to call a phone number entered by 04
the user the Edit Text.
14 4 Develop an application that will create database to store 04
username and password.
15 4 Develop an application to insert, update and delete a record 04
from the database.
205
Total 64

2. Prepare presentation and deliver seminar on Developed application on mobile device.
4. Design and implement sample GUI.

outcomes.
b. Q & A technique.
c. Demonstration
d. Seminars
List of Books

1 Reto Meier Professional Android 2 Application Wiley India Pvt Ltd
Development
2 Mark L Murphy Beginning Android Wiley India Pvt Ltd
3 Sayed Y Hashimi Professional Android Wiley India Pvt Ltd

and Satya
Komatineni
S.
No.
2 Android Open Source Project, Android SDK, Android Open Source Project, Android
Eclipse Environment SDK, Eclipse Environment with latest
versions
206

1. Developing Android Apps- Udacity https://www.udacity.com/course/ud853
2. Build your firs App http://developer.android.com/training/basics/firstapp/index.html
3. Android App Development Tutorial http://www.codelearn.org/android-tutorial
4. ADT Plugin http://developer.android.com/tools/sdk/eclipse-adt.html
5. Installing the Eclipse Plugin http://developer.android.com/sdk/installing/installing-
adt.html
6. Eclipse Download https://www.eclipse.org/downloads/

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
Identify the role of

CO1 Android framework in
android platform for 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 -
mobile application
development.
Develop Android user 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - -
CO2 interface Layout
Develop interactive
event driven mobile 1 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3
CO3
application.
Develop an
CO4 applications using
menus and dialog
1 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3
boxes using SQlite
databases
Find the error handling

CO5 using exception with
- 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3
examples
Sr No Name of the faculty members Designation and Institute
207
6G305 GPA Industrial Organization and Management
COURSE TITLE INDUSTRIAL ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT

COURSE CODE 6G305

offered
ME/EE/CE/AE/ET/CO/IT Fifth / Sixth
1. RATIONALE
Diploma graduate works at middle management level in the industries/engineering organizations.

Therefore he has to be proficient in planning, organizing & coordinating various activities of
industries/ organizations or when he is required to work in different types of projects. They are also
expected to deal with workforce and management problems. In the present era of competition, optimum
utilization of the resources with achieving higher productivity is essential for any industry to survive.
Quality and cost controls are also other important factors which contribute to the day to day supervision
issues. This course aims to deal effectively with such issues along with familiarization of acts and laws
applied to industries.
2. COMPETENCY
“Plan, organize and Coordinate various activities/ processes in industry/projects by ensuring

optimal use of resources”
Teaching Total Examination Scheme (Marks)

Scheme (Hours/ Credits
Credits) (L+T+P) Theory Practical Total
ESE@ PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR/OR) (TW)
03 - 02 05 80 20 - 25 125
Duration of the Examination 02
01 - -
(Hrs) (Online Exam)
ESE- End Semester Examination; PT – Progressive Test, PA- Progressive Assessment, OR –
Oral Examination, TW - Term. Work, # External, @ Internal,~ Online Examination.
215
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Identify the different sector and industry of given company name.

2. Plan, organize and Coordinate various activities in industry or a project.
3. Ensure proper management of human resources.
4. Identify the need of finance and its optimal use in an organization.
5. Manage materials &stores.
6. Apply PERT/CPM method for project scheduling of given project
7. Apply marketing strategies to promote the sales & services.

(in cognitive domain) (Containing POs and PSOs assignment in each
Sub-topic)
Unit 1 1a Classify businesses. 1.1 Type of sectors. Service, Manufacturing,

Business Trade.
overview 1b Outline the impact of 1.2 Globalization and IPR- Introduction,
Globalization and IPR on business. Advantage and Disadvantage w.r.t India.
1c Identify& need of e-commerce. 1.3 e - Commerce: Merits and Demerits.
Unit 2 2a Outline the historical perspective 2.1 Evolution of management thoughts.
Evolution of of management. 2.2 Definition of management, Levels of
Scientific 2b Identify the functions of management.
2.3 Scientific management by F W Taylor.
Management. management.
2.4 Administration Vs. Management
2c Develop organization structure. 2.5 Henry Fayol’s 14 Principles of
2d Select appropriate form of management.
ownership. 2.6 Functions of management - Planning,
Organizing, Staffing, Directing &
controlling
2.7 Types of organization- Line, Line &
Staff, Functional & Project.
2.8 Centralization and Decentralization.
2.9 Forms of Ownership- Proprietorship,
Partnership, Joint Stock Company, Co-
operative society & Government Sector.
Unit 3 3a Identify & develop human 3.1 Definition, Objectives and Function of
Personnel resource Personnel management
Management 3b Apply strategies of motivation. 3.2 Recruitment & Selection Procedure
3.3 Training & its type: Induction, Skill
& Legislative 3c Practice safety procedure
Enhancement & Motivational Training.
Act. 3d Identify the features of industrial 3.4 Leadership & its styles.
216
acts. 3.5 Motivation-Definition, its type &

Maslow Theory
3.6 Safety management: Causes of Accident
and Safety procedure
3.7 Salient Features of (Introduction,
Objective, Scope, Important definition &
Related provision)
1 Indian Factory act 1948.
2 Industrial dispute acts 1947.
3 Workmen compensation act 1923.
4 The employees state insurance
Act 1948.
5 Contract Labour Act.
Unit 4 4a Identify sources of finance 4.1 Objectives & Functions of financial
management.
Financial 4b Prepare budget. 4.2 Capital, Types of Capitals-Fixed &
Management Working Capital
4c Acquaint with prevailing taxation 4.3 Direct Cost & Indirect Cost
policy. 4.4 Sources of raising Capital- Internal &
External sources.
4.6 Introduction of budget & budgetary
control.
4.7Production Budget (including Variance
Report)
4.8Labour Budget
4.9Introduction to Profit & Loss Account
(only concepts)
4.10Introduction of Income Tax & GST
(Good & Service Tax)
Unit 5 5a. Plan Inventory for processes. 5.1 Objective and function of material
5b. Calculate EOQ. management.
Materials 5c. Practice purchase procedure. 5.2 Inventory – Concept, its Classification &
Management Objective.
5.3 Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) -
Concept & Graphical Representation.
5.4 ABC Analysis- Definition & Step of
ABC Analysis.
5.5 Purchase Procedure
5.6 Overview of ERP, JIT, 5’s, Kaizen& six
sigma (Introduction, Objective & Benefit).
Unit 6 6a Use CPM/PERT for project 6.1 Introduction of Project Management,
scheduling for execution. project Network Analysis
Project 6.2 Concept and introduction of CPM/PERT.
Management 6b Track the project with the help of 6.3 Solving simple network using CPM/
project management techniques. PERT
6.4 Concept of Breakeven analysis.
217
6.5 Progress tracking charts-bar charts,

Gantt charts and histogram.
Unit 7 7a. Apply marketing strategies. 7.1 Objective & Function of marketing
management
Marketing
Management 7.2 Sellers and Buyers markets, Marketing,
Sales, Selling vs. Marketing, Sales
promotion, Marketing Mix, Pricing Policies.
7.3 Marketing Strategies: Segmentation,
Targeting & Positioning.
7.4 Marketing Information System.
Unit Unit Title Teachi Distribution of Theory Marks

No. ng
Hours R U A Total
Marks
Level Level Level
I Business Overview 03 02 04 00 06
II Evolution of Scientific Management 09 04 10 00 14
III Personnel Management & 11 04 10 04 18

Legislative Act
IV Financial Management. 07 04 06 02 12
V Materials Management 06 04 04 02 10
VI Project Management 07 02 06 04 12
VII Marketing Management 05 02 04 02 08
Total 48 22 44 14 80
Legends: R– Remember, U – Understand, A – Apply and above (Bloom’s revised Taxonomy)
218
The practical/exercises should be properly designed and implemented with an attempt to develop
different types of skills (outcomes in psychomotor and affective domain) so that students are able
to acquire the competencies/ programme outcomes. Following is the list of practical exercises for
guidance.
Faculty should refer to that common list and should ensure that students also acquire outcomes in
affective domain which are required for overall achievement of Programme Outcomes/Course
Outcomes.

develop different types of cognitive and practical skills (Outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor and
affective domain) so that students are able to acquire the competencies.
1. Identify the different sector and industry of given company name.

2. Plan, organize and Coordinate various activities in industry or a project.
3. Ensure proper management of human resources.
4. Identify the need of finance and its optimal use in an organization.
5. Manage materials &Stores.
6. Apply PERT/CPM method for project scheduling of given project
7. Apply marketing strategies to promote the sales &services.
S. Unit No. Practical Exercises Approx.

Hrs.
No. (Outcomes in Psychomotor Domain) required
Part A- Common to all Programme

1. I To collect data / information and prepare report about 04
business/organization and identify the nature of business and
prepare organization structure.
2. III Identify and propose Safety requirements/ mechanism for an 04
industry.
3 V Prepare a report of inventory by visiting stores of an 02
industry/organization.
4 VI Prepare network diagram using CPM& PERT ( 3-4 networks 04
each) for identified Projects
5. IV/VII Undertake Survey/Data Collection, Presentation and Data
interpretation for following. (Any One) 04
a. Sales Promotion.
b. Channel of Distribution
219
c. Capital Generation & Management
Part B- Programme Specific Practical for

CO/IT/ET/EE/ME/AE ( Five Numbers )
6 III Prepare a report on Human Resource (HR) policies used in 02
Multinational companies
7 IV Give presentation (PPT) on various Financial budgets of any 02
company
8 IV/V/VII Data collection on i) GST ii) Six sigma iii) Market 02
segmentation
9 VII Discuss Global marketing strategies by making small 04
presentation (PPT).
10 All Units Micro Project (visit to an industry, observe & prepare a 04
report on various management techniques adopted by the
Total company) 32Hrs
Part B- Programme Specific Practical for Civil

Engineering ( Five Numbers )
6 III Prepare a small report on Human Resource (HR) policies 02
used in any Multinational companies/infrastructure
development company/manufacturing of civil engineering
materials.
7 VI Prepare a bar chart of construction activities of bunglow / 02

residential building.
8 V Study and collection of various records pertaining to store 02

like Goods received sheet, store indent, priced store ledger,
register of materials at site account, statement of receipts,
issues& balance of road metals, cement register etc.
9 II/III/V Group Discussions and report writing on (Any one form 04

following or likewise)
1) Modern Techniques of material Management
2) Causes of Accident and safety management.
3) Production and Labour budget
10 All Units Micro Project (visit to an PWD/WRD/Large private 04
construction organization/infrastructure development
company to observe & prepare a report on construction
management techniques/working adopted by the
organization)
220
Total 32Hrs
Sr No Activities
1 Prepare a group of five students and write qualities of a good leader.
2 Prepare a group of 10 students and conduct a group activity like housekeeping of a

class room.
3 Draw a network for given set of activities and identify the critical path
4 Calculate the total time required to accomplish a task when te, tp and tm is given.
5 Visit to nearest ESIC office and collect information about services provided by
ESIC office to the working employees.
Sr No. Unit no. Unit name Strategy
1 1 Business Overview Live explanation, videos.
2 2 Evolution of Scientific Live explanation, , case study

Management
3 3 Personnel Management & Live explanation, movie, case
Legislative Act study
4 4 Financial Management. Case study, survey, industrial
visits
5 5 Materials Management Net survey, Case study, industrial
visits
6 6 Project Management Net survey, Case study, industrial
visits
7 7 Marketing Management Net survey, Case study, industrial
visits
Sr No. Title of Book Author Publication

1. Industrial Organization and O.P.Khanna, DhanpatRai and
Management Sons
2. Industrial Organization and Banga and Sharma, Khanna Publications
Management
221
3. Modern Business S.A.Sherlekar& V.A. Himalaya

Organization & Sherlekar, Publications
Management

1. https://mitpress.mit.edu
2. http://iveybusinessjournal.com/publication/a-new-role-for-management
3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Project_management
4. http://www.pmi.org.in/

OUTCOMES (PSOs)WITH COURSE OUTCOMES (COs)
SRN Course Outcome POs PSOs

o
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Identify the different sector and - - - - 3 - - 1 - - 3 -

industry of given company name.
2 Plan, organize and Coordinate 3 3 2 - 3 - - 1 - - 3 -

various activities in industry or a
project
3 Ensure proper management of 2 3 - 2 3 - - 1 - - 2 2
human resources.
4 Identify the need of finance and its 3 3 - 2 - - - - - 1 3 3

optimal use in an organization
5 Manage materials & Stores 2 3 - 3 - - - - - - 3 -
6 Apply PERT/CPM method for 1 3 - 3 - - - - - 2 3 2

project scheduling of given project
7 Apply marketing strategies to - 3 - 3 - - 2 2 - 2 3 -

promote the sales &services.

No members
1 A. B. Deshpande Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic,
Aurangabad
2 K.S. Borde Lecturer in Civil Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
222
3. P.B. Lahoti Lecturer in Computer Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic,

Aurangabad
223
6P401 GPA Advance Microprocessor &
Microcontroller (AMM)
COURSE TITLE- ADVANCE MICROPROCESSOR AND

MICROCONTROLLER
COURSE CODE 6P401

offered
Computer Engineering Fifth
1. RATIONALE
Advanced Microprocessor & Microcontroller is applied level course aims for interfacing of
various peripheral elements with microcontroller to design an automated system. This course
covers introduction to families of microprocessors from 32 bit 64 bit and embed C programming
environment to control peripheral devices.
2. COMPETENCY
“Develop interface between microprocessor and microcontroller”

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(OR) (TW)
175
04 - 02 06 80 20 #25 50

224
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Identify architecture of 80286 and 80386 microprocessors feature.

2. Examine architecture of Pentium microprocessors.
3. Develop program in assembly language using different functions of DOS and BIOS interrupt.
4. Compare and contrast microprocessor and microcontroller.
5. Develop C program for 8051 counter and timer.

Unit - I 1.a State any four salient 1.1 80286: Salient feature, Internal
32 bit features of 80286 & 80386. architecture, Register organization
Microprocessor: (General purpose register, Segment
1.b Explain privileges of 80286 register, status and control register,
80286 & 80386
microprocessor. instruction pointer, segment descriptor
1.c Describe paging concept cache register), Addressing mode such
used in 80386 as Real, Protected Virtual Addressing
microprocessor. mode, privilege, protection. (PO2, PO3,
PO4)
1.2 80386: Salient feature, Internal

architecture, Register organization
(General-purpose register, segment
register, status and control register,
instruction pointer), Addressing modes
of 80386, real, PVAM, paging, virtual
8086 mode. (PO2, PO3, PO4)
Unit - II 2.a Give salient feature of 2.1. Salient features of 80486 (PO2)
Introduction to Pentium
2.2. Salient features of Pentium, System
Pentium Processor
2.b Explain floating point architecture (Super-scalar Execution,
exception. Separate code & data cache, Floating
Point Exceptions, Branch prediction.
(PO2)
Unit - III 3.a. Develop program on INT 3.1. Introduction to X86 interrupts
Interrupts of X86 (Hardware, software and exceptions),
225
microprocessor 16H. Interrupt vector table, Interrupt

processing sequence. (PO2, PO3)
3.b. Explain Interrupt vector
table. 3.2. Hardware or exception interrupts
(Singles step, divide by
zero/overflow, non-maskable,
breakpoint, overflow) software
interrupts (INT, INTO instructions)
(PO2,PO3, PO4)
3.3. Introduction to.com and .exe

programs, DOS & BIOS Interrupts-
INT 21H, INT 25H, INT 26H, INT
10H, INT 16H, INT 17H.
(PO2,PO3,PO4)
Unit - IV 4.a. Differentiate 4.1. Introduction, Comparison with

8051 microprocessor and Microprocessor, Evolution of
Microcontroller microcontroller. Microcontroller, Microcontroller and
embedded systems (PO2)
4.b. Draw and explain PSW of
8051 microcontroller. 4.2. Microcontroller selection criteria 4.4
Architecture and Block Diagram of
4.c. Explain memory 8051, Flag bits and PSW, ROM
organization of 8051. memory space allocation, RAM
memory space allocation. (PO2)
4.3. Pin diagram of 8051, Addressing

modes, Memory organization of 8051.
(PO2)
Unit - V 5.a. Classify data types in 5.1. Bit Addresses of I/O and RAM (PO2)
8051 Programming 8051 C.
5.2. Data types in 8051 C, Time delay in
in C
5.b. Explain modes of timer. 8051 C, I/O programming, Logic
operations, Data conversion.
5.c. Write a program for time (PO2,PO3)
delay generation using
loop and timer of 8051. 5.3. Accessing Code ROM Space, Data
Serialization, Registers for Timer
Programming.(PO2,PO3,PO4)
5.4. Modes of Timers, Counter

226
Programming, Programming Timers

of 8051. (PO2,PO3,PO4)
5.5. Execution of program using cross

compiler like Keil IDE, SPJ, RIDE.
(PO2,PO3,PO4)
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
1 32 bit Microprocessor: 80286 & 20 08 16 00 24

80386
2 Introduction to Pentium Processor 08 06 04 00 10
3 Interrupts of X86 microprocessor 12 04 06 04 14
4 8051 Microcontroller 10 06 06 02 14
5 8051 Programming in C 14 04 08 06 16
Total 64 28 40 12 80
Sr.
No.
1 1 Develop a program to display the status of Flag register and 02
Machine Status Word register of 286 on the screen
2. 1 Develop a program to display the status of Flag register and 02
Machine Status Word register of 386 on the screen.
3. 2 Develop a program to demonstrate CPUID instruction of 02
Pentium Processor
4. 3 Develop a program to display the status of keys described in 02
02H functions of BIOS INT 16H.
227
5. 3 Develop a program to read password & validate the user with 04

the help of DOS INT 21H functions.
6. 3 Develop a program to 02
1. Scroll Screen up (use of function-06H of DOS INT 10H)
2. Scroll Screen down (use of function-07H of DOS INT 10H)
1. Delete file (use of function-41H of DOS INT 21H)
2. Rename file (use of function-56H of DOS INT 21H)
1. Set/Get file attribute (use of function-43H of DOS INT 21H)
2. Set/Get file time & date (use of function-57H of DOS INT 21H)
1. Create/Make directory (use of function-39H of DOS INT 21H)
2. Delete/Remove Directory (use of function-3AH of DOS INT
21H)
10. 4 Develop a program for different C data types for 8051. 02
11. 5 Develop a program for time delay generation using loop and 02
timer of 8051.
12. 6 Develop a Program to toggle bits of P1 continuously forever 02
with some delay.
13. 6 Develop a program to send out the value 44H serially one bit 02
at a time via P1.0. The MSB should go out first.
Total 32
curricular student's activities which need to be undertaken to facilitate the attainment of
a. Develop programs related with unit wise topics in computer laboratory.
b. Develop any module of to be useful in real life application.
c. Multimedia presentation of module developed by students.
outcomes.
a. Improved Lecture methods
228
b. Q & A technique.
c. Activity based learning
1. A. K. Ray. Advanced microprocessor TATA McGraw Hill

K. M. Bhurchandi & peripheral
Peter Abel IBM PC Assembly Prentice Hall India
2. Language and
Programming
3 Douglous Hall Microprocessor & Tata -McGraw Hill
Interfacing
4 James L. Antanakos The Pentium Processor Pearson Publication
Muhammad Ali The 8051 Microcontroller Pearson Education

5 Mazidi,Janice Gillispie and Embedded Systems
Mazidi,Rolin D. McKinlay Using Assembly and C
Rajkamal Embedded Systems Tata -McGraw Hill

6 Architecture,
Programming, Design
S.
No.
Desktop PC Computer Systems with minimum i-3

intel pentium processor (or equivalent)
1. and 1 GB RAM.
2. Tasm / Masm Software Freeware Software
4 Keil IDE, SPJ, RIDE Freeware Software
a. www.intel.com
b. www.pcguide.com/ref/CPU
c. www.CPU-World.com/Arch/
d. www.techsource .com / engineering- parts/microprocessor.html
e. http://www.embeddedindia.com/
229
f. http://www.esacademy.com/
g. www.EmbeddedTechJournal.com
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Identify architecture of
80286 and 80386 - 3 3 3 - - - - - - - -
microprocessors feature.
2 Examine architecture of
Pentium - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
microprocessors.
3 Develop program in
assembly language using - 2 3 2 - - - - - - 1 1
different functions of
DOS and BIOS interrupt.
4 Compare and contrast
microprocessor and - 3 - - - - - - - - 2 -
microcontroller.
5 Develop C program for
8051 counter and timer. - 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 1

No members
1 P B Lahoti Head of the Department, Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
230
6P402 GPA MOBILE COMPUTING (MOC)
COURSE TITLE- MOBILE COMPUTING (MOC)

COURSE CODE 6P402

COMPUTER ENGINEERING FIFTH SEMESTER
1. RATIONALE
Mobile computing is applied level course that designed to needs more skilled technicians for
operation, maintenance & servicing of mobile cellular system. As exponential growth in mobile
computing, student needs to learn different technologies such as GSM and CDMA with their
variations and the 4G. This course includes wireless communication, mobile handset, cellular
concepts, VoIP, WLL, WAP and WML.
2. COMPETENCY
"Apply WAP language to operate and develop standalone mobile application."

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE @ PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR/) (TW)
150
03 - 02 05 80 20 25 25

4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Identify different mobile network architecture.

2. Troubleshoot GSM mobile handsets.
231
3. Identify handoff management in GSM.

4. Identify WAP model and WAP protocol.
5. Identify CDPD architecture and GPRS services.
6. Perform WML script programming.

Unit I 1a.Explain Evolution of mobile 1.1 Evolution of mobile radio
Introduction to radio communication communication,
wireless 1b. Explain AMPS,IS-95, GSM 1.2 Mobile radio system around the
communication 1c.How cellular telephone call is world-(Such as AMPS, NAMPS, IS-95,
system and mobile made GSM), Related definition base station,
network 1d.Explain principles of cellular control Channel, forward channel etc.
Architecture communication. 1.3 how cellular telephone call is made,
1e .Explain 1G, 2G, 3G,4G and 1.4 Principles of cellular
5G technologies communication,
1.5 overview of 1G, 2G, 3G,4G and 5G
technologies
Unit–II 2a. Explain the block diagram of 2.1 Mobile handset: block diagram
Mobile Handset mobile handset 2.2 Baseband section
2b. Explain the working principle 2.3 Digital signal processor used in
of baseband section mobile hand set
2c. Explain the function of digital 2.4 Charging control section
signal processing used in mobile 2.5 Batteries
hand set. 2.6 Memories
2d. Describe working function of 2.7 SIM card and SIM card interface
charging control section 2.8 General faults and fault finding
2e. Explain types of batteries used procedures
for mobile communication and
their importance
2f. Differentiate various types of
memories use in mobile handset
2g. Explain the subscriber identity
module(SIM) pin connection
2h. Discuss the SIM card interface
2i. State the general faults
occurring in mobile
handset(GSM)
2j. Explain the fault finding
procedure in mobile handset
UNIT-III 3a. Explain Cellular concept 3.1 Introduction a basic cellular system,
The cellular 3b. What is Handoff? 3.2 Hand off, Type of hand off, hard
232
concept. 3c.Explain Types of Hand off hand off, soft hand off, Handoff
3d.Expalin GSM architecture management,
3e.Explain mobility and roaming 3.3 GSM architecture and mobility
management. management, Roaming Management.
UNIT-IV 4a. Explain WAP Model 4.1 WAP Model
Wireless 4b. Explain WAP Gateway 4.2 WAP Gateway
Application 4.c Explain WAP Protocol 4.3 WAP Protocol
Protocol (WAP)
UNIT-V 5a. Explain Mobile IP and IPV6 5.1 Mobile IP and IPV6 and it’s
Mobile IP protocol and its applications. applications in mobile computing,
architecture 5.b Explain CDPD 5.2 cellular digital packet data CDPD,
5c.Explain GPRS service VOIP, GPRS services
UNIT-VI 6a.What is WML 6.1 An introduction to WML,

Wireless Markup 6b. Explain fundamentals of 6.2 Markup languages,
Language & script WML 6.3 fundamentals of WML,
6c.Explain WML script 6.4 WML script
6d. Explain WML Script Control 6.5Writing and Formatting Text,
Structures Navigating Between Cards and Decks
6E. Explain Navigating Between 6.6 Displaying Images, Tables
Cards and Decks, 6.7 Using Variables, Acquiring User Input
6f. Explain WML Script Control 6.8 An Introduction to WML Script
Structures with an example. 6.9 WML Script Control Structures, Events
6.10 validation of user input
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
Introduction to wireless 08 4 4 4 12
1 communication system and
mobile network Architecture
Mobile Handset 10 4 8 4 16
2
The cellular concept. 10 4 8 4 16
3
Wireless Application Protocol 04 4 4 0 08
4
(WAP)
Mobile IP protocol architecture 08 4 4 4 12
5
Wireless Markup Language & 08 4 4 8 16
6
script
233
48 24 32 24 80
Sr.
No.
1 I Analyze the behavior of 3G network using cellular phone on the 02
3G mobile trainer kit.
II Identify and explore different sections and components of Mobile 04
2 Phone Unit and Perform Installation of SIM Card in Mobile Phone
3 II Analyze general fault finding procedure in GSM mobile handset. 02
4 II Read contents of SIM card. 02
5 V Analyze GPRS architecture and its services. 02
6 VI Design & Develop a program to format a text. 02
VI Design and develop program for navigating between cards and 02

7 decks
8 VI Design & Develop a program to display data in tabular format. 02
9 VI Design & Develop a program for user input 02
10 VI Displaying of Image using WML 02
11 VI Design & Develop a program to handle different events. 04
12 VI Design & Develop a program to convert currency 02
VI Design & Develop a program to perform validation using WML 04

13 script.
a. Industrial visit to BTS site or MSC.

b. Workshop on mobile repair by service technician of any mobile repairing centre.
c. To explore websites to understand repairing of various mobile handsets.
234
d. To design and develop GSM/GPS and other wireless technology based working models.
outcomes.
a. Lecture and demonstration
b. Online animation/flash
c. Self Line learning
d. Arrange visit to nearby BTS/BSC/MSC of any service provider.
e. Power point presentations with visuals.
f. Arrange expert lectures on latest mobile communication technologies.
g. Expert video lectures on mobile technologies.
h. Faculty should allow students to use their creativity and during practical sessions let them
struggle to learn on their own. However, faculty should remain around the students and
should help them when they are stuck.
i. Organise workshop for repairing of mobile hand set.
1. Wireless and Mobile network Yi-Bing Lin and Imrich John Wiley & Sons
architecture
2. Wireless communication Rapport T.S. PHI Learning, New
principle & Practice Delhi, (Latest
Edition)
3. Mobile and Personal Pandya Raj IEEE
Communication System and
Servicing
4. Mobile Communication Lee C. Y. Pearson, New Delhi
(Latest Edition)
5. Mobile Cellular Lee C.Y. TMH, New Delhi,
Telecommunication System (Latest Edition)
6. Wireless communication Dalal Upena OXFORD New
Delhi,
7. Advance Mobile Repairing Pandit Sanjib BPB, (Latest Edition)
8. Mobile Communication Schiller PHI Learning, New
Delhi, (Latest
235
Edition)
9. The beginning of WML and Wrox Wrox publication
WML script
S. No. Name of equipment Brief specification
1. Computer systems (P-IV and above)
2. Nokia WAP toolkit For windows OS
3. Mobile Handset -
4. WinWap For windows OS

a. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php?disciplineId=106
b. www.larnerstv.com
c. www.learnerstv.com
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Identify different
mobile network - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
architecture.
2 Troubleshoot GSM
mobile handsets.
- 3 3 1 - - - - - 3 - -
3 Summarize GSM - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
architecture.
4 Summarize WAP
model and WAP - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
protocol
236
5 Summarize CDPD
architecture and GPRS - 3 - - 2 - - - - 2 - -
services.
6 Perform WML script
- 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 1 -
programming.

No faculty members
1 O.R.Varma Lecturer in IT Dept., Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
2 P.B.Lahoti Lecturer in CO Dept., Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
237
6P403 GPA COMPUTER NETWORKS (CN)
COURSE TITLE- COMPUTER NETWORKS (CN)

COURSE CODE 6P403

COMPUTER ENGINEERING FOURTHSEMESTER
1. RATIONALE
Computer networks is an applied level course aims to use and share resources over the network
for global connectivity. This course obtains requisite knowledge about hardware and software
tools and requirements of networks to acquire skills for establishment of network. Students will
learn to maintain and troubleshoot computer networks with its resources and services.
2. COMPETENCY
"Use resources and network technology to establish computer networks."

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE @ PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR/) (TW)
150
4 - 2 6 80 20 25 25

4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Identify computer network on the basis of classification and arrangement.

2. Use OSI-ISO and TCP/IP computer network models.
3. Select guided and unguided medium for given types of data transmission.
208
4. Configure IP address to the network and network components.

5. Identify protocols required for internet services.

Unit – I 1a. State the necessity of 1.1 Definition, Need and Advantages of
Network Computer Networks Computer Networks
Fundamentals 1b. Discuss the applications of 1.2 Applications of computer networks:
Computer Networks Business, Industrial and home
1c. Describe the functions of applications
various components of Computer 1.3 Components of Computer Networks:
Networks hardware and software
1d. Compare various computer 1.4 Network topologies: Star, Ring, Bus,
network topologies. Mesh, Tree, Hybrid
1e. Classify computer networks- 1.5 Network Classification
Based on Transmission, scale , i. Based on Transmission Technologies:
and Architecture Point-to-point, broadcast
1f. Differentiate LAN, ii. Based on scale: PAN, LAN, WAN,
WAN,MAN MAN,VPN, Internet
1g. Describe configuration of iii. Based on Architecture: Peer to Peer,
PAN with example Client Server, advantages of Client Sever
1h. State the applications service over Peer-to-Peer Model
offered by WAN
Unit –II 2a. Define the terms: Protocol, 2.1Terms:Protocol, Interface, Services,
Reference Interface, Services, Primitives, Primitives, semantics, syntax
Model semantics, syntax 2.2 The OSI-ISO Reference Model:,
2b. Explain the need for layer Brief functional description of each
modeling. layers with list of protocols
2c.Describe the functions of each 2.3 The TCP/IP Reference Model: Brief
layer of OSI Reference model. functional description of each of the
2d.Describe the functions of each Layer with list of protocols
layer of TCP/IP Reference
model.
2e. Compare the major features
of OSI and TCP/IP model
Unit –III 3a. Explain the characteristics of 3.1 Transmission Media:
Transmission Media guided and unguided Unguided and Guided media, Wired and
and network devices transmission media. Wireless,
3b. Describe specifications of 3.2 Guided media :UTP, Coaxial and
UTP and coaxial cable. Fiber optical cable
3c. Sketch construction details 3.3 Un-Guided Media: Wireless
UTP and coaxial cable with Communication–Communication
209
labels. Band, Microwave Communication,

3d. Explain functions of following
Satellite Communication–Access
network devices: Repeater, Hub, Method, Cellular (Mobile) Telephone –
Bridge, Switch , Router, B-router,
Band in Cellular Telephony, Calls Using
Gateway, Network Adapter, Mobile Phones, Transmitting receiving
Access point, Wireless Access Operations, New Developments.
points 3.4 Network devices: Repeater, Hub,
Bridge, Switch , Router, B-router,
Gateway, Network Adapter, Access point,
Wireless Access points
Unit – IV Internet 4a. Explain IP addressing scheme 4.1 Internet addresses: gateway
architecture with examples addressing, network and broadcast
4b. Distinguish various addressing, dotted decimal notation,
components of IP v4 and IPv6 loopback addressing
protocol. 4.2 IP layer Protocols: IPv4 and IPv6
4c. Compare functions and frame Format
services TCP and UDP 4.3 Connection oriented and
4d. Differentiate between DNS, Connectionless services, TCP and UDP
Email and FTP frame format
4e. Explain the working of 4.5 Domain Name System: Introduction,
firewall used for network mapping to IP addresses
security 4.6 Security –Social issues, Hacking,
precautions and Firewall.
Unit-V 5a. Compare ADSL and broad 5.1 Cable Modem system
Internet services and band modem 5.2 ADSL and broad band modem
its applications 5b. Classify different Internet 5.3 Internet Services World Wide Web:
Services Web browser, HTML, web servers
5c. Differentiate FTP and 5.4 Electronic Mail: Functions of E-mail
Remote login system, User agent, Message format , Mail
5d. Explain how Voice and Protocols (SMTP, POP3),FTP, Remote
login
Video is transferred over IP
5.5 Voice and Video over IP
5.6 Social services :Forums, Newsgroup
and blog
210
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
1 Network Fundamentals 14 6 5 4 15
2 Reference Model 10 4 5 4 13
3 Transmission Media 12 8 4 4 16
4 Internet architecture 16 8 8 4 20
Internet services and its 12 6 6 4 16

5 applications
Sr.
No.
1
I Prepare detailed report of existing LAN in the Department. 02
I Connect computer terminal in various physical topologies and test the 02

2 data transfer.
II Install Network Interface Card with Proper Driver software to 04

3 locate MAC address of Computer.
II Execute Basic TCP/IP Utilities and Network Commands with all 04

4 options.
5 II Install and configure TCP/IP Protocols (Version 4 and version 6) 02
6 III Install and configure/Test various networking devices. 02
7 III Prepare and Test Straight UTP Cable. 02
8 III Prepare and Test Cross UTP Cable. 02
211
9 IV Install/configure/Test LAN and sharing of resources. 02
10 IV Install/configure/Test Network operating System 02
11 IV Set Firewall for the network security. 02
12 V Execute Network Commands for the network control operations. 02
V Install Wireshark software to capture packet and configure it to 04

13
capture Ethernet Packet
a. Prepare technical report on Current Network at your Department/ Institute.

b. Test the performance of HUB, Switches, router and Servers.
c. Project- Build a small PAN/ LAN at your Home /Community.
d. Enhance security of your network by introducing Firewall.
outcomes.
a. Lecture and demonstration

b. Online animation/flash
c. Practical exercises, LAN implementation
d. Mini project related with industrial applications and house hold applications
e. Self Line learning
1. Data Communication and Forouzan Tata McGraw Hill,

Networking, Education New Delhi
(Latest edition)
2. Computer Networks Tannebaum Andrew S Pearson, New Delhi,
Wetherall David J 5thEdition, 2011
3. Data and Computer Stallings Williams PHI Learning, New
Communication, Delhi (Latest edition)
4. Data Communication Sharma Sanjay S.K.Kataria and Sons,
Networks New Delhi (Latest
212
edition)
5. Computer Networks Trivedi Bhushan Oxford University
Press, New Delhi 2013
S. No. Name of equipment Brief specification
1. Computer systems (P-IV and above)
2. Network Cable Cat 5/Cat 6.
3. Crimping Tool (RJ45,RJ11, Cat 5/Cat 6)
4. UTP Cable Tester Lan Tester
5. Layer 2 Switch ,Hub(16 I /O) 24 port,48 port switches
6. Wireless Access point and Wireless router IEEE standard

a. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php?disciplineId=106
b. http://www.edrawsoft.com
c. Network Simulator Tool: GNS3 v0.8.5, NetSimK
d. www.learnerstv.com

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Identify computer
network on the basis of 0 3 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 3 0
classification and
arrangement.
2 Use OSI-ISO and
TCP/IP computer 0 3 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0
network models.
213
3 Select guided and

unguided medium for 0 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 3 0
given types of data
transmission.
4 Configure IP address to
the network and 0 3 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 0
network components.
5 Identify protocols
0 3 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3 0
required for internet
services.

No faculty members
1 O.R.Varma Lecturer in IT Dept., Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
2 J.P. Joshi Lecturer in IT Dept., Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
214
6P404 GPA Linux Programming Lab
COURSE TITLE : LINUX PROGRAMMING LAB

COURSE CODE : 6P404

offered
Computer V
1. RATIONALE:
Linux Programming Lab is an applied level course to perform various activities on open source
operating system. This course aims at extending the knowledge of open source operating
system and get exposure of handling system call that directly talk to the kernel. This course
includes basics of Linux operating system, system calls, Shell programming and process
management.
2. COMPETENCY:
"Manage and control functionality of Linux operating system"

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR) (TW)
100
1 - 4 5 -- -- # 50 50

Examination.
238
4. COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Identify component of Linux Operating System.
2. Perform various Linux command.
3. Develop shell script program in Linux.
4. Select proper system calls for file processing on a given problem.
5. Perform various activities related to Process Management.

Unit - I 1a. Compare flavor of 1.1 Introduction and installation,
Introduction to Linux Operating System. 1.2 UNIX and LINUX history,
LINUX 1b. Identify Boot Loader.1.3 Licensing, FSF / GNU and Open source.
operating 1c. Modify Environment 1.4 Flavors of Linux Operating System,
Variable. 1.5 kernel, shell and types of shells.
1d. Identify GUI under 1.6 role of Kernel, role of shell,
Linux. 1.7 Boot Loader-GRUB/LILO.
1.8 file system / directory structure,
1.9 Changing login shell, login scripts and
profile, Environment Variables.
1.10 X- windows system, GUI Under LINUX.
Unit – II 2a. Identify command 2.1 Command structure- ls, man, cat, cal, ps,
Commands in structure. du, df, passwd, less, more, wc, uname, who, tty,
LINUX: 2b. Arrange command cpio, pr ,ifconfig, netstat, nslookup, tar, find,
output AWK chmod, chown, su, diff, cmp, cp, mv, rename,
programming. crontab, iptables, mkdir.
2c. Use filter. 2.2 Filter and redirection: head, tail, cut, paste,
2d. Apply redirection. sort, uniq, tee, grep, pipe, and Input, Output and
2e. Select modes of vi- error redirection, awk, sed.
editor. 2.3 Creating and viewing files: using the Vi
editor, modes.
Unit - III 3a. Use shell script in 3.1 Introduction to shell scripts, variable, expr
Shell Linux. command.
Programming 3b. Use control structure. 3.2 Control structure: if, test, for, while, case.
3c. Generate series using 3.3 Command Line Parameters.
function recursion. 3.4 Creating functions, Array variable,
Function Recursion.
Unit - IV 4a. Compare Inode and In- 4.1 I-node, directory.
Internal core Inode. 4.2 structure of regular file, superblock.
Representation 4b. Identify structure of 4.3 direct and indirect block of inodes.
of file and superblock. 4.4 File system calls- open, create, read, write,
System calls 4c. Use System calls. fseek, dup, pipe, chdir, chown, stat.
Unit - V 5a. Modify process state 5.1 Process – Process concept, Kernel support
Linux Process using system calls. for process, process attributes, process control -
and Thread 5b. Utilize resources of process creation, waiting for a process, process
system. termination, zombie process, orphan process,
5c. Compare process and 5.2 Multithreaded Programming: Differences
thread. between threads and processes.
5d. Identify Thread APIs. 5.3 Thread structure, Lightweight Processes,
POSIX Thread APIs, and Creating Threads.
239
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
I Introduction to LINUX 3
operating
II Commands in LINUX 4
III Shell Programming 3
IV Internal Representation of file 3 NOT APPLICABLE

and System calls
V Linux Process and Thread 3
Total 16
240
Sr.
No.
1 I Install Linux Operating System (CentOS/Fedora/Ubuntu) 4
2 I Modify GRUB configuration file to change boot order. 2
3 I Set the environment variable for reference in a shell script 2

program. ( JAVA_HOME, PATH, CATALINA_HOME)
4 II Execute following commands for file manipulation- ls, cat, 4

copy, rename, rm, mv, comm, diff, cmp, tar.
5 II Execute following commands for display and manipulate 4
system information- who, tty, cpio, df, ifconfig, netstat, ps,
iptables.
6 II Execute following commands for desired output- head, tail, cut, 4
paste, sort, uniq, pr, tee, grep, pipe, Input Redirection (0<),
Output Redirection (1>) and Error Redirection (2>).
7 II Operate different modes of vi-editor (input mode, command 2
mode) to use functionality of vi-editor.
8 II Write and execute Sum of column value using awk script. 2
9 III Write and execute Shell script to calculate the gross salary. 2
10 III Write and execute tests connectivity with the PCs whose IPs are 2
provided as command line parameters.
11 III Write and execute Shell script to check whether the given 2
number is prime or not.
12 III Write and execute Shell Script to Find Armstrong Numbers 2
between Ranges.
13 III Write and execute Shell script, which receives two filenames as 2
arguments. It checks whether the two files contents are same or
not.
14 III Write and execute checks disk space and store the value to the 2
variable and display it.
15 IV Execute program to display file information (inode) of given 4
file (stat system call).
16 IV Execute program for output redirection using dup system call. 4
17 IV Execute program to read file from end to start (reverse order) 4

using fseek system call.
18 IV Execute program for inter process communication using pipe 4
system call.
19 V Execute program for process creation using fork( ) system call. 2
20 V Execute program for process creation using fork( ) and execl( ) 2

system call.
21 V Execute program for process termination using exit( ) system 4
call, zombie process, orphan process.
241
22 V Execute program to sending a signal to parent process (wait ( ) 4
system call).
TOTAL 64
SR. NO. ACTIVITY
1 Download Linux source code from kernel.org and add new system call into source code
then compile it.
2 For Given problem suggest appropriate System calls.
3 Collect source code of file related system calls.
242
outcomes.

b. Q & A technique.
c. Demonstration.
f. Use of video, animation films to explain concepts, facts and applications of Linux
Programming.
1 Linux: Command Line Richard Blum Wiley India

and Shell Scripting
2 Linux : Complete Richard Pearson Tata McGraw Hill
Reference
3 Easy Linux Commands Jon Emmons Terry SPD Publications
Clark
4 Beginning Linux Neil Mathew, Wrox Publications
Programming Richard Stones
5 Unix Concepts and Sumitabha Das McGraw-Hill Education
Applications
6 The Design of the Unix Maurice J. Bach PHI
Operating System
7 Red Hat Linux- A bible Christophe Negus Tech Media SAMS
Sr.
No.

4. https://www.whoishostingthis.com/resources/linux-programming/
5. http://www.freeos.com/guides/lsst/
243

No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Identify component of
Linux Operating 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 -
System.
2 Perform various Linux 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1
command.
3 Develop shell script
program in Linux. 2 1 2 - - - - - - 2 2 2
4 Select proper system

calls for file 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 1 2
processing on a given
problem.
5 Perform various
activities related to 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 1 1
Process Management.

No faculty members
Aurangabad
2 Pawan Lahoti Lecturer in Computer Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic,

Aurangabad
244
COURSE TITLE : LINUX PROGRAMMING LAB

COURSE CODE : 6P404

offered
Computer V
1. RATIONALE:
Linux Programming Lab is an applied level course to perform various activities on open source
operating system. This course aims at extending the knowledge of open source operating
system and get exposure of handling system call that directly talk to the kernel. This course
includes basics of Linux operating system, system calls, Shell programming and process
management.
2. COMPETENCY:
"Manage and control functionality of Linux operating system"

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR) (TW)
125
1 - 4 5 -- -- # 50 75

Examination.
238
4. COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Identify component of Linux Operating System.
2. Perform various Linux command.
3. Develop shell script program in Linux.
4. Select proper system calls for file processing on a given problem.
5. Perform various activities related to Process Management.

Unit - I 1a. Compare flavor of 1.1 Introduction and installation,
Introduction to Linux Operating System. 1.2 UNIX and LINUX history,
LINUX 1b. Identify Boot Loader.1.3 Licensing, FSF / GNU and Open source.
operating 1c. Modify Environment 1.4 Flavors of Linux Operating System,
Variable. 1.5 kernel, shell and types of shells.
1d. Identify GUI under 1.6 role of Kernel, role of shell,
Linux. 1.7 Boot Loader-GRUB/LILO.
1.8 file system / directory structure,
1.9 Changing login shell, login scripts and
profile, Environment Variables.
1.10 X- windows system, GUI Under LINUX.
Unit – II 2a. Identify command 2.1 Command structure- ls, man, cat, cal, ps,
Commands in structure. du, df, passwd, less, more, wc, uname, who, tty,
LINUX: 2b. Arrange command cpio, pr ,ifconfig, netstat, nslookup, tar, find,
output AWK chmod, chown, su, diff, cmp, cp, mv, rename,
programming. crontab, iptables, mkdir.
2c. Use filter. 2.2 Filter and redirection: head, tail, cut, paste,
2d. Apply redirection. sort, uniq, tee, grep, pipe, and Input, Output and
2e. Select modes of vi- error redirection, awk, sed.
editor. 2.3 Creating and viewing files: using the Vi
editor, modes.
Unit - III 3a. Use shell script in 3.1 Introduction to shell scripts, variable, expr
Shell Linux. command.
Programming 3b. Use control structure. 3.2 Control structure: if, test, for, while, case.
3c. Generate series using 3.3 Command Line Parameters.
function recursion. 3.4 Creating functions, Array variable,
Function Recursion.
Unit - IV 4a. Compare Inode and In- 4.1 I-node, directory.
Internal core Inode. 4.2 structure of regular file, superblock.
Representation 4b. Identify structure of 4.3 direct and indirect block of inodes.
of file and superblock. 4.4 File system calls- open, create, read, write,
System calls 4c. Use System calls. fseek, dup, pipe, chdir, chown, stat.
Unit - V 5a. Modify process state 5.1 Process – Process concept, Kernel support
Linux Process using system calls. for process, process attributes, process control -
and Thread 5b. Utilize resources of process creation, waiting for a process, process
system. termination, zombie process, orphan process,
5c. Compare process and 5.2 Multithreaded Programming: Differences
thread. between threads and processes.
5d. Identify Thread APIs. 5.3 Thread structure, Lightweight Processes,
POSIX Thread APIs, and Creating Threads.
239
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
I Introduction to LINUX 3
operating
II Commands in LINUX 4
III Shell Programming 3
IV Internal Representation of file 3 NOT APPLICABLE

and System calls
V Linux Process and Thread 3
Total 16
240
Sr.
No.
1 I Install Linux Operating System (CentOS/Fedora/Ubuntu) 4
2 I Modify GRUB configuration file to change boot order. 2
3 I Set the environment variable for reference in a shell script 2

program. ( JAVA_HOME, PATH, CATALINA_HOME)
4 II Execute following commands for file manipulation- ls, cat, 4

copy, rename, rm, mv, comm, diff, cmp, tar.
5 II Execute following commands for display and manipulate 4
system information- who, tty, cpio, df, ifconfig, netstat, ps,
iptables.
6 II Execute following commands for desired output- head, tail, cut, 4
paste, sort, uniq, pr, tee, grep, pipe, Input Redirection (0<),
Output Redirection (1>) and Error Redirection (2>).
7 II Operate different modes of vi-editor (input mode, command 2
mode) to use functionality of vi-editor.
8 II Write and execute Sum of column value using awk script. 2
9 III Write and execute Shell script to calculate the gross salary. 2
10 III Write and execute tests connectivity with the PCs whose IPs are 2
provided as command line parameters.
11 III Write and execute Shell script to check whether the given 2
number is prime or not.
12 III Write and execute Shell Script to Find Armstrong Numbers 2
between Ranges.
13 III Write and execute Shell script, which receives two filenames as 2
arguments. It checks whether the two files contents are same or
not.
14 III Write and execute checks disk space and store the value to the 2
variable and display it.
15 IV Execute program to display file information (inode) of given 4
file (stat system call).
16 IV Execute program for output redirection using dup system call. 4
17 IV Execute program to read file from end to start (reverse order) 4

using fseek system call.
18 IV Execute program for inter process communication using pipe 4
system call.
19 V Execute program for process creation using fork( ) system call. 2
20 V Execute program for process creation using fork( ) and execl( ) 2

system call.
21 V Execute program for process termination using exit( ) system 4
call, zombie process, orphan process.
241
22 V Execute program to sending a signal to parent process (wait ( ) 4
system call).
TOTAL 64
SR. NO. ACTIVITY
1 Download Linux source code from kernel.org and add new system call into source code
then compile it.
2 For Given problem suggest appropriate System calls.
3 Collect source code of file related system calls.
242
outcomes.

b. Q & A technique.
c. Demonstration.
f. Use of video, animation films to explain concepts, facts and applications of Linux
Programming.
1 Linux: Command Line Richard Blum Wiley India

and Shell Scripting
2 Linux : Complete Richard Pearson Tata McGraw Hill
Reference
3 Easy Linux Commands Jon Emmons Terry SPD Publications
Clark
4 Beginning Linux Neil Mathew, Wrox Publications
Programming Richard Stones
5 Unix Concepts and Sumitabha Das McGraw-Hill Education
Applications
6 The Design of the Unix Maurice J. Bach PHI
Operating System
7 Red Hat Linux- A bible Christophe Negus Tech Media SAMS
Sr.
No.

4. https://www.whoishostingthis.com/resources/linux-programming/
5. http://www.freeos.com/guides/lsst/
243

No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Identify component of
Linux Operating 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 -
System.
2 Perform various Linux 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1
command.
3 Develop shell script
program in Linux. 2 1 2 - - - - - - 2 2 2
4 Select proper system

calls for file 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 1 2
processing on a given
problem.
5 Perform various
activities related to 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 1 1
Process Management.

No faculty members
Aurangabad
2 Pawan Lahoti Lecturer in Computer Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic,

Aurangabad
244
6P405 GPA INFORMATION STORAGE
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (ISMS)
COURSE TITLE- INFORMATION STORAGE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

(ISMS)
COURSE CODE 6P405

offered
Computer Engineering Six
1. RATIONALE
Information Storage Management System is a applied level course aims to recognize the
importance of Storage, Evolution of Storage Technology, Data and Information, Structured and
Unstructured Information, Information Life cycle Management. This course gives insight to
protect data, RAID, RAID levels, Implementation of Software and Hardware RAID, RAID
Impact on Disk Performance.
2. COMPETENCY
After learning this course student will be able to

 “Corporate governance, human resource management, product
development and marketing will all have an important role to play in strategic ways,
and we must not see one domain of activity alone as the sole source of strategic
success..”

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE @ PA
L T P C ESE PT 150
(OR) (TW)
245
3 2 - 05 80 20 25 25

4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Select storage design based on given application

2. Identify given Raid and observe their impact on performance
3. Select fiber channel protocol stack, layers, services and ISCI
4. compare backup methods and replication, Advantages of object storage device, their key
features
5. Use steps for business continuity planning for storage in an enterprise.

Unit – I 1a. Explain Storage 1.1 Information Storage,
Introduction to Architecture 1.2 Evolution of Storage Architecture,
Storage 1b.State & explain type of 1.3 Data Centre Infrastructure,
Management Virtualization and 1.4 Virtualization and Cloud Computing.
Cloud Computing 1.5 Data Centre Environment:
1c. Data Centre Infrastructure. Application, DBMS, Host, Connectivity,
1d.Describe Data Centre Storage, Disk Drive Components, Disk
Environment. Drive Performance, Host Access to
Data, Direct-Attached Storage, Storage
Design Based on Application, Disk
Native Command Queuing, Introduction
to Flash Drives.
Unit -II 2a Explain working of Logic 2.1 RAID Implementation ,Methods,

Data Protection Gates 2.2 Array Components, Techniques,
246
2b Construct logical circuit Levels, Impact on Disk

using gates. Performance, Comparison, Hot
2a. Optimize logical circuit. Spares.
2.3 Intelligent Storage System:
Components, Storage Provisioning,
Types. (PO2)
Unit III: 3a. FC Topologies 3.1 FC Overview, Evolution, Components,
Fiber Channel 3b. Classify Login Types FC Connectivity, Ports, FC
Storage Area 3c.Explain Network-Attached Architecture, Fabric Services, Login
Networks Storage
Types, Zoning, FC Topologies,
3d. Which Factors Affecting
NAS Performance. Virtualization in SAN.IP SAN and
FCoE: iSCSI, FCIP, FCoE.
3.2 Network-Attached Storage:
Benefits, Components, NAS
I/O Operation, Implementations, File
Sharing , Protocols, I/O Operations,
Factors Affecting NAS Performance,
File-Level Virtualization
Unit IV: 4a State need of Backup 4.1 Object Based Storage Devices,
Object Based Archive and Replication 4.2 Content Addressed Storage, CAS
and Unified 4b Implement Use Cases 4.3 Use Cases, Unified Storage.
Storage 4c ExplainContent Addressed 4.4 Backup Archive and Replication
Storage, CAS .
Unit V: 5a Explain Planning Lifecycle 5.1 Information Availability, Terminology,
Business 5b Need of Securing the 5.2 Planning Lifecycle, Failure Analysis,
Continuity Storage Infrastructure Impact Analysis, Solutions.
5c Give Challenges, Information 5.3 Securing the Storage Infrastructure:
Lifecycle Management Framework, Risk Triad,
5.4 Domains Managing the Storage
Infrastructure:
5.4.1Monitoring, Management
Activities,
5.4.2Management Challenges,
Information Lifecycle,
Management, Storage ,
Tiering.
Unit Title Of Unit Teaching Distribution Of Theory Marks
247
No Hours
R U A
TOTAL
level Level Level
I Introduction to Storage 10 06 06 04 16
Management
II Data Protection 08 02 06 06 14
III Fiber Channel Storage Area 12 06 06 08 20

Networks
IV Object Based and Unified 06 02 04 04 10
Storage
V Business Continuity 12 06 08 06 20
Total 48 22 30 28 80
Sr.
No.
1 I Learn information storage types & Evolution storage 02
technologies
2 I Analyze Data Centre Environment. 04
3 II Learn implementation of RAID & Classification RAID 02

Levels
4 II RAID impact performance Analysis 04
5 III Learn SAN its Evolution & Learn Components of SAN 02
6 III FC connectivity & Learn Fiber Channel Architecture & FC 04

Topologies
7 IV Learn the types of Archives & Learn features & Benefits of 02
CAS
8 IV Architecture of CAS & Learn Object Storage & Retrieval in 02
CAS & AN Example case Study on CAS
9 V What is the data center infrastructure & To learn Challenges 02
information management and Life cycle
Total 32
248
1 Prepare journals based on practical performed in laboratory.
2 Develop co-relation of DBMS and storage management.
3 Plan any module of to be useful in real life application.
4 Multimedia presentation of module planned by students
outcomes.
1. Use online tutorials to guide students in searching information regarding Storage

Management
3. Show Flash/Video/Animation clippings for given Storage Management .
1. Information Storage and Somasundaram G., Alok 2edition , Wiley India,

Management Shrivastava 2012
249
2. Storage Networks Ulf Troppens, Rainer 1st Edition, Wiley India,

Explained Erkens and Wolfgang 2012.
Muller
3. The Complete Reference Robert Spalding 1st Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2011.
S.
No.
1. Computer System with latest configuration As per Comupter industry

2. Multimedia Projector As per Electronics industry

specification
1 https://www.cna-aiic.ca/.../nursing-information
2 ii.www.mikeownage.com/mike/.../Information%20Storage%20and%20Manageme
nt.pdf
3 https://education.emc.com/ismbook/

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Examine the storage

design based on given 0 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
application
2 Analyze different variants
of Raid and observe their 0 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
impact on performance
3 Recognize fiber channel
0 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
protocol stack, layers,
services and ISCI
250
4 Analyze and compare

different backup methods
and replication, 0 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Advantages of object
storage device, their key
features
5 Recognize steps for
business continuity 0 3 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0
planning for storage in an
enterprise.

No faculty members
2 Nilophar Masuldar Lecturer in Computer Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
251
6P504 GPA Data Warehousing and Mining
COURSE TITLE- DATA WAREHOUSING and MINING

COURSE CODE 6P406 /6T406

offered
Computer Engineering & Information Technology Fifth
1. RATIONALE
Data warehousing and Mining is an applied level course. This course aims to make use of
Data warehousing and mining techniques. After Learning this course students will improve the
employment potential in the information management sector.
2. COMPETENCY
Students will be able to:
“Apply mining tools to extract information from data warehouse.”
TEACHING AND EXAMNATION SCHEME

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(OR) (TW)
150
3 - 2 05 80 20 @25 25

3. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Identify the need Data Warehouse.

2. Use Data warehouse Components.
252
3. Build Data Warehouse by design consideration of Data Warehouse.

4. Apply data mining algorithms.
5. Apply classification techniques for knowledge discovery.
6. Demonstrate cluster analysis & types of data in cluster analysis

Unit - I 1a. Apply the concept of Data 1.1 Need of Data Warehousing
Data Warehouse Ware housing 1.2 Differences between Operational
Introduction 1b. Describe Architecture of Database Systems and Data
Data Warehouse Warehouses AND ALSO
Informational Database system
1.3 Data warehouse Definition and
Characteristics
1.4 Data Warehouse Architecture
Unit - II 2a Describe Data 2.1 Data Warehouse Database
Data warehousing warehouse Database 2.2 Sourcing, Acquisition, Cleanup, And
Components 2b Concepts of Sourcing Transformation tools
Acquisition, Cleanup,
2.3 Metadata
and Transformation
tools. 2.4 Data Marts
2c Explain Metadata, 2.5 Information Delivery System
DataMart
2d Explain Discuss
Information delivery
system
Unit - III 3a. Aspects of Design 3.1 Design Considerations
Building a Data consideration 3.1.1 Data Content
Warehouse 3b. Explain technical 3.1.2 Metadata
consideration 3.1.3 Nine decisions in the design of a
3c. Describe benefits of Data Data warehouse
Warehousing 3.2 Technical Considerations
3d. Describe Intraquery 3.2.1 Hardware Platforms
parallelism 3.2.2 Data warehouse and DBMS
specification
3.2.3 Communication Infrastructure
3.3 Benefits of Data Warehousing
3.3.1 Tangible Benefits
3.3.2 Intangible Benefits
253
Unit - IV 4a. Describe the aspect of 4.1 Data Cleaning

Data Processing data preprocessing 4.1.1 Missing Values
Explain distributed query 4.1.2 Noisy Data
processing 4.1.3 Data Cleaning as a Process
4b. Explain the concept of 4.2 Data Integration
Data Cleaning & 4.3 Entity Identification Problem
Integration 4.4 Redundancy and Correlation Analysis
4c. Explain redundancy and 4.5 Tuple Duplication
correlation Analysis 4.6 Data Value Conflict Detection and
4d. Express Data Value Resolution
conflict detection.
Unit - V 5a. Data generalization and 5.1 Concept Description, Data
Data Mining summarization. generalization and summarization
Algorithms 5b. Explain mining based characterization.
Association rules. 5.2 Mining Association Rules:
5c. Illustrate Apriori Association rule mining, Market basket
algorithm. Analysis, Association rule
5d. Definition of classification.
Classification and 5.3 The Apriori algorithm, Mining
Prediction, issues multilevel Association rules.Log based
regarding classification recovery
and prediction. 5.4 Classification and Prediction, Data
5e. Discuss Decision tree classification process and issues
Algorithm & Bayesian regarding classification and prediction.
Algorithm 5.5 Classification by decision tree
Induction, Bayesian Classification
Unit – VI 6a. Classification based on 6.1 Classification based on cluster.
Cluster Analysis cluster. 6.2 What is cluster analysis? Types of
6b. Discuss types of data in data in Cluster Analysis,
clustering Categorization of clustering methods.
6c. Describe knowledge 6.3 Introduction to knowledge discovery.
discovery. 6.4 Application of techniques of
6d. Application of Knowledge knowledge discovery in areas such as
discovery techniques. fraud detection, scientific data
analysis, and web mining.
254
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
1 Data warehouse introduction 10 4 4 6 14

2 Data warehouse components 08 4 4 4 12
3 Building a data warehouse 08 6 4 8 18
4 Data processing 08 4 4 4 12
5 Data mining algorithms 08 4 4 6 14
6 Cluster analysis 06 3 3 4 10
48 25 23 32 80
Sr.
No.
1 01 Introduction to data warehousing concepts 2
Preprocess and classify Customer dataset. 4

2 03
http://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/
Perform Preprocessing, Classification techniques on 4
3 03 Agriculture dataset usinh WEKA tool.
(http://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/)
Preprocess and classify Weather dataset. 4
4 06
http://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/
5 06 Perform Clustering technique on Agriculture dataset. 4
6 05 Problem solving using Market Basket Analysis 2
Classify the dataset using decision tree. 2

7 04
www.kdnuggets.com/datasets/
8 04 Apply XLMiner tool for classification technique 4
9 03 Apply rapid miner tool for Mining. 4
10 03 Classification based on cluster analysis 2
Total 32
255
a. Student should do as much practice as possible on related software to develop the

Mastery.
b. Students in groups should visit different business organization where data mining and
warehousing is done and should study the methods and software in use. Moreover each
group should study that for what purpose data mining is carried out and how mined data is
used. All groups should prepare reports on their study and present in class. These
presentations should generate group discussions.
8. Search the net and find out different data mining and warehousing techniques and
Software being used.

outcomes.

b. Q & A technique.
c. Observe students and monitor the performance of students in lab.

C. J. Date
Database Systems
Oracle Press
reference
Hardware : Desktop Computer P-IV processor or higher

Software : Microsoft 2003 /any higher version , Oracle, WEKA, XLMiner
256
b. WEKA: WEKA is an open source application that is freely available under the
GNU general public license agreement. Originally written in C the WEKA
application has been completely rewritten in Java and is compatible with
almost every computing platform. It is user friendly with a graphical interface
that allows for quick set up and operation.
WEKA is a computer program that was developed at the University of Waikato
in New Zealand for the purpose of identifying information from raw data
gathered from agricultural domains. WEKA supports many different standard
data mining tasks such as data preprocessing, classification, clustering,
regression, visualization and feature selection
c. http://dataminingtools.net
d. Data Mining Tutorial http://www.tutorialspoint.com/
257

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Describe the architecture - 3 - - - - - - - - 2 -
of Data Warehousing
and apply the concept of
Data Warehousing.
2 Demonstrate ability to - 3 - 2 - - - - - 2 - -
develop warehouse
source specifications
with cleanup and
Transformation tools.
3 Explain building - 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 -
components of Data
Warehouse and Design
consideration of Data
Warehouse.
4 Use various data - 2 2 2 - - - - - 1 1 -
mining algorithms
5 Apply various - 2 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 -
classification
techniques and use
innovative technique
for knowledge
discovery
6 Describe and 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
demonstrate cluster
analysis & types of
data in cluster analysis

No faculty members
1 Prachi P. Lecturer in Information Technology, Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad

Deshpande
258
6T407 GPA CLOUD COMPUTING
COURSE TITLE- CLOUD COMPUTING

COURSE CODE- 6T407/6P407

offered
Computer Engineering/Information Technology Sixth
1. RATIONALE
This course provides a comprehensive study of Cloud concepts and capabilities across the
various Cloud service models including Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS), Platform as a Service
(PaaS),Software as a Service (SaaS). It consists of topics like cloud service models, virtualization
and cloud infrastructure, and security and management of cloud.
2. COMPETENCY
The course content should be taught and implemented with the aim to develop the following
competencies.
1. To provide students with the fundamentals and essentials of Cloud Computing.

2. Recognize the importance of virtualization in distributed computing and how this has
enabled the development of Cloud Computing.

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE @ PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR/OR) (TW)
3 00 02 07 80 20 25 25 150

Legends : L-Lecture; T-Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice ; P- Practical; C-
Assessment, OR – Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal
259
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Identify the appropriate cloud services for a given application.

2. Assess the comparative advantages and disadvantages of Virtualization technology.
3. Analyze authentication, confidentiality and privacy issues in cloud computing.
4. Identify security implications in cloud computing.

UNIT– I 1.a Identify cloud computing 1.1Defining Cloud computing,
Introduction to and the characteristics.
Cloud 1.2Characteristics,
Computing 1.b Illustrate the components of
cloud computing 1.3 Benefits of cloud computing, Limitations of
cloud computing.
1.c compare deployment model
and service model 1.4 Grid Computing vs Cloud Computing
1.d compute the benefits of 1.5 Infrastructural components of cloud computing

cloud computing and limitations
of it. 1.6 deployment model: 1) public cloud
1.e Compare between Grid 2) private cloud

computing and cloud computing 3) hybrid cloud
4) community cloud
1.7 service model:
a) Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS),
b) Software as a Service (SaaS),
c) Platform as a Service (PaaS)
Unit II 2.a Illustrate the platforms, 2.1 Exploring cloud computing stack – Compos
Cloud virtual appliances, ability, Infrastructure, Platforms, Virtual Appliances,
architecture communication protocols used in Communication Protocols, Applications.
and Services cloud.
2.2 Explore characteristics,benefits and issues :
2.b Identify the following cloud
service : a. IaaS b.SaaS c.PaaS a) Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS),
b) Software as a Service (SaaS),
c) Platform as a Service (PaaS)
2.3 Introduction of cloud service Providers

use,benefits
260
and issues:
a) Amazon Web Services
b) Google AppEngine
c) Microsoft Azure
UNIT – III 3.a use the components clients 3.1 Cloud Computing Technologies: Virtualization,
Cloud security and networks and Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA), Grid
computing services provided as hardware Computing, Utility Computing.
technologies 3.2 Use of Virtualization technology, Load
and infrastructure in cloud
and Balancing and Virtualization,
Virtualization 3.b Illustrate Virtualization and 3.3 Virtualization benefits,
3.4 Hypervisors, porting application,
it’s benefits
3.5 Defining cloud capacity by defining baselines
and Metrics
3.d Use of Virtualization and
load balancing
3.e Use of Hypervisors in

virtualization also explain the
benefits of Virtualization.
UNIT – IV 4.1 Use the following 4.1. Cloud security, data security,
Cloud terms in cloud management:
Administration 4.2 Identity and presence protocol standards,
and Security 4. a cloud sercurity and data
4.3 Availability management in SaaS, IaaS, PaaS,
Management security Access Control, Security Vulnerability,
4.b Identify the availability 4.4 Patch and Configuration Management, Security
management in SaaS, IaaS, as a Service of cloud,
PaaS, Access Control,
4.5 Future of Security in Cloud computing.
Security Vulnerability.
4.6 Planning a Cloud Computing Based IT Strategy:
4.c Select the Future of
Security in Cloud Develop an IT strategy to deliver on strategic
computing. business objectives in the business strategy.
UNIT– V 5.a Illustrate the advantages 5.1 Introduction to Hadoop Distributed File System
HDFS and it’s and disadvantages and Google File System.
Architecture Distributed file system.
5.2 Architecture of HDFS,
5.b Select the functionalities
of Platform as a Service 5.3 Comparison with Traditional Technology with
with it’s advantages distributed file system
5.c Design the case study 5.4 What is Big Data?

to create and single node
261
cluster using Hadoop. 5.5 Human Generated Data and Machine Generated
Data
5.6 Where does Big Data come from
5.7 Examples of Big Data in the Real world
5.8 Challenges of Big Data
6.SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE FOR QUESTION PAPER DESIGN
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
I Introduction to Cloud 10 4 4 4 12
Computing
Cloud architecture and Services 12 4 8 8 20
II
III Cloud computing technologies 10 4 6 8 18
and Virtualization
IV Cloud Administration and 8 3 6 6 15
Security Management
V HDFS and it’s Architecture 8 3 6 6 15
Total 48 14 22 14 80


No. Hrs.
required
1. I Assignment on Grid Computing vs Cloud computing. 4
2. II Assignment on Software as a Service (SaaS), , Platform as a Service 4

(PaaS), Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS), Network as a Service (CaaS
3. III Create 5 machines on Google Apps and Web Services 6
262
4. IV Create 5 Virtual Machines using Vmware Workstation 4
5. V Write steps to configure and installation Hypervisors with KVM 4
6. IV Develop an dynamic web application and upload it on to the cloudbees. 4
7. V Develop private cloud using any other free cloud service providers like 6
clousim, IBM Bluemix Openshift.
Total 64
8.SUGGESTED STUDENT ACTIVITIES

i. Make a VMs or Multiple VMs
ii. Present the the installation of Hypervisors
9.SUGGESTED LEARNING RESOURCE
A) List of Books*

No.
1 Wiley India Pvt Ltd
Cloud Computing Bible Barrie Sosinsky
2
Cloud Computing – A Anthony Velte, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition
Practical Approach tobyVelte, Robert
Elsenpeter,
3 OpenNebula 3 Cloud Giovanni Toraldo Packt Publishing, 2012

Computing
4 Enterprise Cloud Computing Andy Mulholland, Jon Meghan Kiffer,2010
- A Strategy Guide for Pyke, Peter Finger
Business and Technology
Leaders
B. List of Major Equipment/ Instrument with Broad Specifications

i. Computer System with latest configuration OS-Windows 7 UBUNTU 14.04 DESKTOP
ii. Internet
iii. Open Source Software
vi. VMware Player
263
V. Eclipse latest version
C Additional Resources of CLOUD that can be used for conducting Practical as well as case studies
 http://www.amazon.com/tracks/web ,
10.POs and PSOs assignment and its strength of assignment with each CO of the Course
CO. Course Outcome PO P P P P P P P P P P PS No. of
NO. 1 O O O O O O O O O S O2 hours
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 O allocated in
1 1 curriculum
0
Introduction to Cloud 2 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12
CO1 Computing
Cloud architecture, Services and
CO2 Applications 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
20
Cloud Infrastructure and 0 2 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18

CO3 Virtualization
Exploring cloud services 0 1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15
CO4
Cloud Administration and 0 2 3 3 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 15
CO5 Security Management

No faculty members
1 P.B. Lahoti Head of the Department Computer Engineering Government

Polytechnic Aurangabad
2 S.M. Bankar Lecturer in Computer Engineering Government Polytechnic

Aurangabad
3 V.B.Kundlikar Lecturer in Information Technology G.P. Aurangabad
264
6S501 GPA Seminar (SMR)
COURSE TITLE- SEMINAR

COURSE CODE 6S501

offered
Computer Engineering / Information Technology Fifth
1. RATIONALE
Seminar is the important aspect of any curriculum. Here the students has unlimited scope to
integrate his knowledge and skills. This course is essential to understand the recent
developments and latest trends in the field. This will help the students to acquire the skill like
mining for information, analysis, communication, presentation skills etc. For effective
presentation student must have good communication skill. With a given time limit student
should be able to express his ideas and concepts, thoroughly in front of faculty members and
other students, student should be able satisfy the queries raised by them as well as student
should learn to take any feedback positively.
2. COMPETENCY

“Deliver presentation to expose to recent development in technologies, researches,
products, algorithms, protocols and so on”

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(OR) (TW)
75
00 - 02 02 00 00 #25 50
265
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Collect the information on selected topic.

2. Prepare the synopsis on the identified content.
3. Make use of internet / book / research paper to assimilate information
4. Deliver presentation on selected topic.
5. Prepare report on seminar topic.
Major Learning
domain )
Unit – I 1.1. Detailed Survey of any three seminar

topics which are a recent trend in the
Literature Survey field of information technology and
coputing technology.
1.2. Seminar topic should not be a part of

any course which student has already
studied or will study in final semester
of diploma. Also topic should not be
repeated in last three batches.
1.3. No two students are allowed to take

same topic. Also contents of seminar
of no two students should match more
than 30%.
Unit -II 2.1. Each student has to make synopsis of

three topic selected by student.
Topic selection
2.2. Submit this entire synopsis to the
seminar coordinator.
2.3. Finalize a topic from seminar

coordinator after the confirmation from
panel of faculty from dept.
266
3.1. Student should gather/collect all

information related to final topic either
Unit III: from internet, book or from any
Collection and research / journal paper.
Assimilation of 3.2. Assimilate the information so that
Information student gets to know that how they were
applied these concepts into existing
technology.
Unit IV: 4.1. Each student will prepare a seminar

presentation in the term making use of
Prepare and audio/visual aids for duration of 10-15
Deliver minutes and deliver it on the assigned
Presentation of date only. Every student is required to
Seminar give presentation independently.
4.2. All students must attend seminars and it

is expected that they should listen it
carefully and take part in questioning
actively.
4.3. A panel of faculty members along with

guide will assess the seminar internally
during the presentation. Faculty
members should ask questions.
Unit V: 5.1. Each student should prepare seminar

report containing at least 35 pages as
Preparing Seminar per the format prescribed by
Report department. Student should submit the
seminar report in the form of spiral
bound journal duly signed by the Guide,
Head of Department and Principal.
267
Unit Unit Title Teaching / Distribution of Theory Marks

No. Practical
Hours R U A Total
Marks
Level Level Level
I Literature Survey 06
II Topic selection 06
III Collection and Assimilation of 08 NOT APPLICABLE

Information
IV Presentation of Seminar 06
V Preparing Seminar Report 06
Sr.
No.
1 1 Literature Survey 06
2 2 Topic selection 08
3 2 Collection and Assimilation of Information 08
4 2 Presentation of Seminar 06
5 2 Preparing Seminar Report 04
Total 32
i) Aspects to be considered for report writing
 To study recent developments and technological advances in current technology.

 Develop communication skills.
 To enhance the presentation skills
 Seminar reports preparation.
268
II) SUGGESTED AREAS FOR THE SEMINAR:
AREA OF COMPUTER ENGINEERING / 1. Image Processing

2. Cloud Computing
3. Networking
5. Internet of Thing
6. Computer, Information, Web & Network
Security
7. Computer Vision
8. Machine Learning
9. Data Warehousing & Mining
10. Soft Computing
11. Artificial Intelligence
12. Parallel Computing
13. Web Mining
14. Semantic Analysis
15. Optimization Technique
16. Mobile Computing
outcomes.
i. Do literature survey and identify area of interest for seminar preparation.

ii. Visit the site if required.
iii. Search on internet for information gathering.
iv. Do comparative study of methods, identify case study etc
v. Prepare report of seminar as per above instructions.
vi. Prepare power point presentation of Seminar topic.
269
Seminar Report Format

1. Seminar report shall be in the print form on A-4 size white bond paper.
2. Typing shall be in Times New Roman with spacing of 1.5 using one side of paper.
3. Margins: Left = 37.5 mm Right, Top and Bottom = 25mm.
4. Front page: Titles - TNR 18 bold, other – TNR 14 bold. With Institute Logo.
5. Inner Pages: Titles –TNR – 14 Bold, other TNR 12.
6. Page Nos: Should appear on the right hand top corner of each page starting after index
page.
7. Tables to be preferable in the Text format only.
8. Sketches to be drawn on separate sheet / pages in black ink.
9. The Last content in the index to be of references. Acknowledgement to be added in the
report.
10. Binding: Spiral binding is preferred for the seminar report. The number of copies are to be
prepared by the student are 3 nos. ( Student + Guide + Department copy)
S.
No.
1. Computer Systems with minimum i-3

Desktop PC
and 1 GB RAM.
2. LCD Projector
1. http://www.seminarsonly.com/
2. http://a4academics.com/be-seminar-topics
3. http://www.seminarstopics.com/branch/latest-seminar-topics-for-cse-2017
270
4. http://www.collegelib.com/t-71-topics-for-computer-engineering-and-cse-technology-
seminars-listed-latest-topics.html

S Course Outcome POs PSOs

N
o
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Collect the information on -- 3 -- 3 -- -- -- --- -- -- -- 2

selected topic.
2 Prepare the synopsis on -- 1 -- --- -- -- -- --- --- -- -- 2

the identified content.
3 Make use of internet / --- -- 3 3 --- --- -- 1 -- -- 1 --
book / research paper to

assimilate information
4 Deliver presentation on -- 2 3 -- -- -- --- -- -- -- 2 2
selected topic.
5 Prepare report on seminar -- 3 -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 2 2

topic.

No faculty members
271
6G306 GPA Entrepreneurship Development
COURSE TITLE- ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT

COURSE CODE 6G306

offered
All Programmmes Sixth
1. RATIONALE
In the post liberalization era significant growth in industrial sector has led to creation of huge
opportunities in manufacturing and service sector. In such a scenario especially in Indian contest
it has led to innumerable opportunities for first generation entrepreneurs on a large scale.
Therefore it is expected that engineers need to be developed for manufacturing, service sector and
entrepreneurship development. This course, which represents Allied level of courses, aims at
imparting entrepreneurial skills amongst engineers of all disciplines.
2. COMPETENCY
“Design a project proposal for an enterprise”

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE @ PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR/OR) (TW)
50
2 - 2 4 -- -- -- 50

– Oral Examination, TW - Term Work, # External, @ Internal,~ Online examination.
272
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of studying this course students will be able to: -.
1 Apply business/enterprise principals and characteristics.

2 Design information and supporting system related to start a business.
3 Estimate and record financial requirements.
4 Develop detailed project report.
5 Use various software related to business.

Unit –I Basic 1a. Describe Entrepreneur. Basic Concepts of Entrepreneur

Concepts of 1b. Identify Risk
Use Creative skills 1.1. Concept, Classification &
Entrepreneur
1c. Describe Risk Situation. Characteristics of Entrepreneur.
1d. Generate Business
Idea Methods and techniques Creativity and Risk taking,
to generate Business.
Concept of Creativity & Qualities
1e. Plan for Transforming Ideas
in to opportunities. of Creative person. Risk
1f. Carryout of
SWOT Analysis. Situation, Types of risk & risk
takers.
1.2 Business Idea Methods and
techniques to generate
business idea.
1.3 Transforming Ideas in to

opportunities- transformation
involves Assessment of idea &
Feasibility of opportunity,
1.4 SWOT Analysis.
273
Unit– II 2a. Use Information data for 2.1Information Needed and Their
business. Sources. Information related to
Information 2b. Information related to support project, Information related to
And Support system.
support system, Information related
Systems 2c. Lay down the Procedures and
related to Information. to Procedures and formalities.
2d. Identify Govt. Support
2.2 Support Systems:
Systems related to EDP.
2e. Explore subsidies to  Small Scale Business
entrepreneur. Planning, Requirements.
 Govt. & Institutional
Agencies, Formalities
 Statutory Requirements and
Agencies.
Government Support and subsidies to
entrepreneur.
Unit– III 3a Undertake Market survey. Market Assessment

3b Use Marketing skills and
Market Survey. 3.1 Marketing -Concept and Importance
Assessment 3c Assess market for business 3.2 Market Identification, Survey Key
opportunities. components. (Market Segmentation)
3.3 Market Assessment.
Unit– IV 4a. Determine product cost. Business Finance & Accounts

4b. Analyze for breakeven of
Business business proposal. 4.1 Business Finance
Finance & 4c. Maintain Business finance
Accounts and accounts.  Cost of Project
 Sources of Finance
 Assessment of working capital
 Product costing
 Profitability
 Break Even Analysis
 Financial Ratios and
Significance
4.2 Business Account
Accounting Principles, Methodology
 Book Keeping
 Financial Statements
 Concept of Audit,
 Trial Balance
274
Balance Sheet
Unit - V 5a. Prepare Business proposal. Business Plan & Project Report
5b. Undertake project appraisal.
Business Plan 5c. Undertake cost benefit 5.1 Business plan steps involved from
& Project analysis. Cost benefits concept to commissioning
Report analysis. Activity Recourses, Time, Cost
5.2 Project Report
1) Meaning and Importance
2) Components of project
report/profile(Give list)
5.3 Project Appraisal
1) Meaning and definition
2) Technical, Economic feasibility
3) Cost benefit Analysis.
Unit – VI 6a. Manage resources. Enterprise Management And Modern

6b. Prepare plan for productivity. Trends
Enterprise 6c. Assure Quality.
Management 6d. Explore Govt facilities 6.1 Enterprise Management: -
And Modern (Industrial zones and SEZ.)
6e. Explore E-Commerce 1) Essential roles of Entrepreneur in
Trends
avenues for business. managing enterprise
2) Product Cycle: Concept And
Importance
3) Probable Causes Of Sickness
4) Quality Assurance, Importance of
Quality, Importance of testing
5) Industrial zones and SEZ.
6.2 E-Commerce, Concept and process.
6.3 Global Entrepreneur: role and

opportunities.
Unit – VII 7a.Use business related INTRODUCTION BUSSINESS

software’s.
INTRODUCTI 7b. Survey Software’s RELATED SOFTWARES
ON used in Mall , industries.
7c. Identify Software’s
275
BUSSINESS used For accounting. 7.1 Software’s used in Mall.
RELATED 7.2 Software’s used in Medical shops.

SOFTWARES
7.3 Software’s used in industrial stores
such as SAP, ERP.
7.4 Software’s used for accounting such

as FICO, FINNACLE

No. Hours
R U A Total
Marks
Level Level Level
I Basic Concepts of Entrepreneur. 04 NA NA NA NA
II Information And Support Systems 05 NA NA NA NA
III Market Assessment 05 NA NA NA NA
IV Business Finance & Accounts 05 NA NA NA NA
V Business Plan & Project Report 05 NA NA NA NA
VI Enterprise Management And Modern 04 NA NA NA NA

Trends
VII Introduction business related 04 NA NA NA NA

software’s

No. Hrs.
required
276
1 I Literature survey of Financial Banks for Industries– 04

MSFC/IDBI/MSSIDC/CIDBI/MSME/DIC/ ROLE OF
DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL BANKS etc.
2 II Administration of readymade tools like questionnaires, 04

opinionative, Interview schedule for product identification
purpose (decision making process)
3 III Development of “Business Ideas”. Take any product and develop 04
the business idea for it.
4 IV Visit to MCED/MITCON- going through the product related library. 04
5 VI Preparation of Preliminary / Detailed project report in the formats 04

recommended by MCED/MITCON
Prepare project report and study its feasibility.
6 VI At least one case study of successful entrepreneur. 04
7 --- Assess yourself-are you an entrepreneur? 04
Total 28
1. Prepare journals based on assignments.

2. Carry out Literature survey of Financial Banks for Industries.
3. Analyze the specifications, costs, quality and availability for various types of engineering
components and find the business opportunity for it.
4. Interact with supplier/trader and discuss about business opportunities available in market.
5. Designing software for requirements to start business or similar type of issues. .
6. preparing project report for any product to be manufactured.
7. Search online PPT’s, PDF’s, video’s on the design and software’s for business.
outcomes.
1. Group discussion among students.

2. Arrange visits to industries and show various industrial jobs.
277
3. Motivate students to use internet and collect name, addresses, catalogues, rates,
specifications of institutes and industries working in the area of business promotions.
4. Arrange expert lecture on various opportunities in business.
1 Entrepreneurship ---- NITTTR, Bhopal
Development
2 The Seven Business Crisis& V.G.Patel S.Chand and Co. New Delhi
How to Beat them
3 A handbook of New P.C.Jain ,Dhanpat Rai and Sons

Entrepreneurs
4 Entrepreneurship development E.Gorden, K. Charotar Publication House

Natrajan
5 New Initiatives in Gautam Jain, Tata Mc- Graw Hill

Entrepreneurship Debmuni Gupta
Education And training
6 Entrepreneurship Theory and J.S.Saini,B.S.Rathore Tata Mc- Graw Hill

Practice
7 Enterpreneurship Development A.K.Singh Laxmi Publications

and management
8 The Beer mat Entrepreneur South on D F Pearson Education limited
Computers for Practical’s with internet facility
1. Software’s used in Mall.
2. Software’s used in Medical shops.
3. Software’s used in industrial stores such as SAP, ERP.
4. Software’s used for accounting such as FICO, FINNACLE.
278
i. http://www. product-list. php

ii. http://www.SAP.com/products/faro-software
iii. http://www.ERP.com
iv. http://www.fico.com
v. http://finnacle.com
vi. Visit www.ediindia.org.
vii. http://www.project reports.com

CO. Course Outcome P P P P P P P P P P P No. of

NO. O O O O O O O O O S S hours
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 O O allocated
1 2 in
curriculu
m
CO 1 Apply business/enterprise principals 3 3 - - - - 2 - 3 - 2 6

and characteristics.
CO 2 Design information and supporting 3 3 - - - - 3 - 3 - - 8
system related to start a business.
CO 3 Estimate and record financial 3 3 - - - - 3 - 3 - 2 6
requirements.
CO 4 Develop detailed project report. 3 3 - - - - - - 3 2 - 6
CO 5 Use various software related to - - - - - -

3 3 3 3 - 6
business.

No
1 Prof. A. W. Nemade Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering, Govt.
Polytechnic,Aurangabad
279
6P501 GPA COMPUTER SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS
COURSE TITLE- COMPUTER SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS (CSCL)

COURSE CODE 6P501

Computer Engineering Sixth
1. RATIONALE
Computer security diversified course intend to address security in computer system design. This course
will introduce fundamentals of computer and network security, Cyber laws. Students should able to use
and acquire skills and preventions methods for computer security in future.
2. COMPETENCY
The course content should be taught and implemented with the aim to develop different types of skills
so that students are able to acquire following competency:
“Use security measures for Computer and Network system.”

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(PR) (TW)
- 2 06 80 20 #25 25 150
4

4. COURSE OUTCOMES
280
 Classify the risks faced by Computer Systems and the nature of common Information
hazards.
 Identify the potential threats to confidentiality, integrity and availability of Computer

Systems.
 Apply security principles to secure Operating Systems and applications.
 Recognize the system related security.
 Apply IT act and cyber law.
 Use the web security techniques.

Unit I 1. Explain security terms. 1.1 Definition of Computer Security, Need for
Introduction to 2. Describe the risk associated with security, Security basics: Confidentiality,
computer security security. Integrity, Availability, Accountability,
and security 3. Identify the different attacks. Non-repetition. Example of Security,
trends. Challenges for security, Model for
Security.
1.2 Risk and Threat Analysis: Assets,
Vulnerability, Threats, Risks, Counter
measures. 1.3 Threat to Security: Viruses
and Worms, Intruders, Insiders, Criminal
organizations, Terrorists, Information warfare
Avenues of attack, steps in attack 1.4
Security attacks: Active and Passive attacks,
Denial of service, backdoors and trapdoors,
sniffing, spoofing, man in the middle, replay,
TCP/IP Hacking, encryption attacks. 1.5
Malware: Viruses, Logic bombs.
Unit II 1. State the role of people in 2.1 User name and password, Managing
Identification, security. passwords, choosing password.
Authentication 2. Classify the access control. 2.2 Role of people in Security:
and Operational 3. Explain biometrics features used 2.2.1 Password selection,
Security in security. 2.2.2 Piggybacking,
2.2.3Shoulder surfing,
281
2.2.4 Dumpster diving,

2.2.5 Installing unauthorized
software/hardware, Access by Nonemployees,
2.3 Security awareness, Individual User
responsibilities
2.4 Access controls: Definition, principle,
policies: DAC, MAC, RBAC.
2.5 Biometrics: finger prints, hand prints, Retina,
patterns, voice patterns, signature and writing
patterns, keystrokes
Unit III 1. Explain the cryptographic 3.1 Introduction: Cryptography,
Cryptography techniques. Cryptanalysis, And Cryptology, Substitution
2. Apply various cryptographic techniques: Caesar’s cipher, mono-alphabetic
techniques. and polyalphabetic, one-time pad.
3.2 Transposition techniques – Rail fence
technique, simple columnar, Steganography.
3.3 Hashing – concept
3.4 Symmetric and asymmetric cryptography:
Introduction to Symmetric encryption, DES
(Data encryption Standard) algorithm,
Asymmetric key cryptography: Digital
Signature.
Unit IV 1. Explain the need of firewalls. 4.1 Firewalls: Need for Firewall, limitations,
System security 2. Describe the virtual private and characteristics. Types of Firewall:
and Intrusion networks. Hardware, Software, Packet filter, Proxy
Detection 3. Study email security standards. Server, Hybrid, Application gateways, circuit
4. Explain IP security architecture. level gateway, Implementing Firewall.
4.2 Virtual Private Network work, Kerberos
– concept, security topologies: security
zones, DMZ, Internet, Intranet, and VLAN.
4.3 Intrusion Detection: Intrusion detection
systems (IDS), host based IDS, network
based IDS, Honey pots.
4.4 Email security: Email security standards:
Working principle of SMTP, PEM, PGP,
S/MIME.
4.5 IP security: overview, architecture, IPSec
Configuration, IPSec Security.
Unit V 1. Describe the knowledge about 5.1 Introduction to Deleted File Recovery
Act and Cyber law data recovery. Formatted Partition Recovery, Data Recovery
2.Explain hacking Tools, Data Recovery Procedures and Ethics.
3.Define cracking 5.2 Introduction to Cyber Crimes –
4. State the bug. Hacking, Cracking, Viruses, Virus Attacks,
Pornography, Software Piracy, Intellectual
property, Legal System of Information
Technology, Mail Bombs, Bug Exploits,
282
Cyber Crime Investigation

5.3 Introduction Cyber Laws- Introduction
to IT act 2000 and IT act 2008, Introduction
to the cyber laws.
Unit VI 1. Explain Web Security 6.1 Web Security Considerations.1 Web
Application and 2. Apply Application level security security threats.2 Web traffic security
Web Security on web browser approaches.
3.Describe the SSL 6.2 Secure Socket Layer and Transport Layer
4. Explain active directory Security.
6.2.1. Overview of SSL Protocol Stack
( diagram and explanation only)
6.3 HTTPS
6.3.1 Connection initiation.
6.3.2 Connection closure.
6.4 Basic Concept of Secure Electronic
Transactions
6.5 SSL versus SET
6.6 D Secure Protocol
Application hardening, application patches,
web servers, active directory.
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
I Introduction to computer 14 4 6 6 16
security and security trends.
Identification, Authentication 14 4 4 6 14
II
and Operational Security
III Cryptography 12 3 5 6 14
System security and Intrusion 10 3 5 6 14

IV
Detection
V IT Act and Cyber law 8 3 4 5 12
VI Application and Web Security 6 3 3 4 10
Total 48 26 32 22 80
283
Sr.
No.
1 I Prepare Case study security provided with windows operating 02
system(User authentication)
2 II Recovery the password of windows machines using password 04
recover utility (John the ripper) or any other utility
3 IV Tracing the path of an website/ web server using tracert utility 04
4 III Install open source Latest version of Cryptool software and

Encrypt and decrypt the message using Simple Transposition 04
– Permutation( Cryptool)
5 III Encrypt and decrypt the message using Caesar Cipher With 04
Variable Key( Cryptool)
6 III Encrypt and decrypt the message using 3 X 3 Hill Cipher( 02
Cryptool)
7 V Create Digital Signature document using Cryptool 04
8 IV Installation and working of Open source Firewall –Free 04

BSD/iptables Firewall
9 V Prepare Case study application related security 02
10 VI Prepare Case study web related security 02
Total 32
1. Students will prepare file for the above mentioned Practical

2. Prepare presentation and deliver seminar on various topics covered like cryptography, system
security, and web security.
3. Students are expected to develop minimum one program of particular topic as an example to
exhibit real life application.
.
284
1. Cryptography and
Atul Kahate Tata McGraw Hill
Network Security
2.
Computer Security William Stallings, Pearson Education

Principles and Practices Lawrie Brown
3. Computer Security Dieter Gollman Wiley india education
S.
No.
1. Desk top computer system, laptops Latest configuration.
2. Cryptool Latest Version
1 .http://www.pgpi.org/doc/pgpintro
2 http://www.emailtrackerpro.com
3 http://www.kmint21.com
285

CO. Course Outcome P P P P P P P P P P P P No. of

hours
NO. O O O O O O O O O O S S allocated in
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 O O curriculum
0 1 2
Classify the risks faced by Computer 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 14
CO1 Systems and the nature of common
Information hazards.
Identify the potential threats to 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 14

CO2 confidentiality, integrity and
availability of Computer Systems.
Apply security principles to secure 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 12

CO3 Operating Systems and applications.
Recognize the system related 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 10

CO4 security.
Apply IT act and cyber law. 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 8

CO5
Use the web security techniques 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 6
CO6

No faculty members
1 R.S.Sindge Lecturer in Information Technology, Govt. Polytechnic,Latur
286
6S502 GPA Project (PRJ)
COURSE TITLE- PROJECT

COURSE CODE 6S502
offered
Computer Engineering / Information Technology Sixth
1. RATIONALE
One of the basic aim of “Project “ is to develop the ability of “learning to Learn “ on his own
and work in team. Project course provides opportunities for students to keep pace with future
changes in technology and in the acquisition of knowledge and skills as and when needed. The
course of the “Project” is designed with an aim to all these requirements of the students which
will include planning of the Programme, which must be completed within the time allocated.
The Project should never have a single solution and process of arriving at a particular solution,
the student must be required to make number of decisions after study information as he has
gathered from experiments, surveys, analysis etc.
The programme aims at developing in the student, knowledge and skills to match the current
and projected needs of industry/ user systems, social awareness and professional attitudes. In
relation to the course and topics to be taught, the student will have to constantly update
himself and keep pace with the changing technologies and the current and projected needs of
user systems.
2. COMPETENCY

“Apply the knowledge of various courses to solve real life problems of society and to
develop team work, leadership and entrepreneurship skills to make students
professionally competent”

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(OR) (TW)
150
00 - 04 04 00 00 #50 100
287

4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Conduct literature survey for project selection.

2. Design problem statement according the need of Project.
3. Implement the project using modules
4. Test the project as per the requirement.
5. Write report in prescribed formats.
Major Learning
domain )
Unit – I 1.1. Detailed Survey of any three Project
Information topics which are a recent trend in the
Gathering and field of information technology and
Literature Survey. computing technology and Selection of
Project Option and Framing the
Problem to solve as a Project for the
group of 3 to 4 students.
Option A: Industry Sponsored Project
Option B: Application Project
Option C: Study Based Project
1.2. Project must be based on knowledge
acquired within three years of
Diploma. Students must be aware with
languages, packages hardware, he/ she
is using in his/her project.
Unit -II 2.1. This is Second phase in which
Project Design students will actually start collecting
detail information about their project.
288
That is project selection formalities must

be completed before registering for
project course.
1. Group must visit concern persons in
the field to collect the system
requirement. A practical design and
development is to be achieved.
2. They must adopt standard procedures,
rules, regulation used in the real system
and no imaginary model should be
developed.
3. Group can collect information about
any other package, software currently
under development on same subject or
already developed and group should
study what facilities the available
software provide and what are its
drawbacks.
4. If any such software is implemented /
installed at some industry students must
visit and collect on site information.
5. Taking into consideration all
requirements, design total system in top
down fashion.
6. Design must be modular and there
must be clear distribution of task among
group members.
3.1 In Third Phase students are expected to
Unit III: utilize their time for actual coding,
Project testing, of project.
Development 1. Independent module development is
necessary.
2. Enough time must be provided in
time-table for project development
3. There must be continuous assessment
of project development.
4. Prototype model may be developed
and tested.
5. Taking into consideration
shortcoming and suggestions final
Software/Hardware should be
289
developed by the end of sixth semester

Unit IV: 4.1. Testing of problem statement using
Project Testing generated test data (using
mathematical models, Function testing
principles) selection and appropriate
use of testing tools, testing of UML
diagram’s reliability. (recommended
submission date:- two weeks before
term end)
Unit V: 5.1. Each group should prepare project
Project Report report containing at least 35 pages as
per the format prescribed by
department. Student should submit the
Project report in the form of hard bound
journal duly signed by the Guide, Head
of Department and Principal.
5.2. Project Report Must Include:
1. Title page of the project
2. Acknowledgement Page
3. Certificate page of college (certificate
must be included for a project if it is a
sponsored project form industry or
organization)
4. Abstract of the project (One Page)
5. Introduction of Project (two to three
pages)
6. Feasibility analysis of Project (as per
point no. 4 in Project selection).
7. Scope of the project
8. Project design.
9. Algorithms.
10. DFDs /E-R Diagrams/Flowchart,
wherever applicable.
11. User manual
12. Limitations/Future development.
13. Costing.
14. Bibliography.
15. Project source code with entire set
of accessories such as database, drivers
etc. in form of CD.
290
16. Data sheets of only uncommon,

(main Integrated Circuits) Main I/C e.g.
Speech synthesiser IC and not of
common I/C like 8085. There is no need
of any explanation of common I/C and
their interfacing.
Unit Unit Title Teaching / Distribution of Theory Marks

No. Practical
Hours R U A Total
Marks
Level Level Level
I Information Gathering and Literature 08

Survey.
II Project Design 12
III Project Implementation 30 NOT APPLICABLE
IV Testing 06
V Project Report 08
Sr.
No.
1 1 Information Gathering and Literature Survey. 08
2 2 Project Design 12
3 3 Project Implementation 30
4 4 Testing 06
5 5 Project Report 08
Total 64

291
 Form the group of 4/5 student for a project activity.

 Allot the guide (faculty) for each group.
 Decide the topic of project
 Conduct survey/experimentation
 Report writing and presentation
I) SUGGESTED AREAS FOR THE SEMINAR:

2. Cloud Computing
3. Networking
Security
7. Computer Vision
8. Machine Learning
10. Soft Computing
13. Semantic Web Mining
16. Recent Technology / Latest Trends in
technology
 The project topic/ title should not repeated by group.

 Guide should be Senior or experienced faculty
 The project topic should selected such that, it should complete in a semester.
292
Seminar Report Format

1. Seminar report shall be in the print form on A-4 size white bond paper.
page.
report.
10. Binding: Spiral binding is preferred for the seminar report. The number of copies are to be
prepared by the student are 3 nos. ( Student + Guide + Department copy)
S.
No.

Desktop PC
and 1 GB RAM.
2. LCD Projector

1. http://www.opensource.org
2. http://www.linux.org/lessons
3. http://www.php.net

293

N
o
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Conduct literature survey - 3 - - - - - 3 2 - 3 -

for project selection.
2 Design problem statement - 2 - - - - - 3 2 - 3 -

according the need of
Project.
3 Implement the project - 3 2 3 2 - - 3

using modules.
4 Test the project as per the - - - - - 2 3 2 - - 3

requirement.
5 Write report in prescribed - 2 - - - - 3 2 - - 3

formats.

No faculty members
294
6S504 GPA Advanced Java Prog
COURSE TITLE- ADVANCED JAVA PROGRAMMING (AJP)

COURSE CODE 6S504
Diploma Programme in which this course is Semester in which offered

offered
Computer Engineering and Information SIXTH SEMESTER
Technology
1. RATIONALE
Advanced Java Programming is diversified level course which provides skills

for developing powerful GUI based friendly user interface, server side programming with
database. It is used to develop dynamic web site and client server application.
2. COMPETENCY STATEMENT (S)

This course will be able to
"Develop network and web based software projects."

(In Hours) (L+T+P) Theory Practical Marks Total Marks
Marks
03 00 04 07 80 20 # 25 25
150
Duration of the Examination (Hrs) 3 1 2 -
Legends: L-Lecture; T – Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice; P - Practical; C –
Credit, ESE - End Semester Examination; PT - Progressive Test; PA - Progressive
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
I. Design and develop powerful GUI using AWT and swing.
II. Develop dynamic application using event handling.
III. Create Server side programming using servlet.
IV. Design and develop application for data transfer using .net package
295
V. Develop dynamic web page or web site using jsp.


UNIT-I 1a Create different AWT 1.1 Window: Frame, panel,
AWT window and apply container, canvas. Layout
and
appropriate layouts to it. Managers
Swing
1b Design frame using AWT 1.2 AWT Components: Buttons,
controls using different Check Boxes, Checkbox Group,
components. Choice Controls, Labels, Lists,
1c Create frame with menu scroll Bars, Text Field, and Text
bar, menu, Dialog and file Area.
dialog Boxes. 1.3 Menu Bars and Menu Dialog
1d Design an application Boxes File Dialog.
using swing classes. 1.4 Swing classes such as JApplet,
1e Select best package for JFrame, All Component classes.
designing GUI
application.
UNIT-II 2a Use event handling 2.1 Event handling mechanism,
Event
mechanism for designing Delegation event model
Handling
iterative GUI. 2.2 Event listener’s interfaces and
2b Select appropriate listener different event classes.
for a component. 2.3 Event handling for each
2c Apply event handling for component.
GUI designed using swing 2.4 Event handling in swing class
classes.
UNIT-III 3a Identify various methods of 3.1 Basics Socket overview,
Networking
server and client socket. client/server, reserved sockets,
3b Select classes and proxy servers, internet
interfaces to develop client addressing.
and server socket program. 3.2 Java & the .net package. The
296
3c Use methods to identify IP networking classes & interfaces.

address of a machine. 3.3 Internet addresses Factory
3d create TCP client and TCP methods, instance method.
server 3.4 URL, Format, URL connection.
3e Develop program for 3.5 Creating TCP Client, Creating
processing request from TCP Server, Reading and
client. Writing from TCP Sockets.
3f Develop program using Accepting and Processing
datagram packets. request from TCP Client.
3.6 Data grams, Data gram packets,
Data gram server
UNIT-IV 4a Develop simple server side 4.1 Life cycle of Servlet.
Servlet
page using servlet 4.2 Servlet API, javax.servlet
4b Design servlet program to package ( All interfaces and
read data from html page classes).
and write data to html 4.3 Simple Servlet program using
using http servlet class. generic servlet class.
4c Develop servlet program to 4.4 javax.servlet.http package (All
store and retrieve data into interfaces and classes)
database. 4.5 Reading and writing data in
Servlet using http servlet class.
4.6 Database connectivity in
servlet.
UNIT-V 5a Select appropriate 5.1. Introduction to JSP, need of JSP.
Introductio
web Server page Comparison between ASP &
n to
JSP language. JSP.
5b Develop JSP pages for 5.2. JSP Architecture, Different tags
given application. of JSP, How run JSP page.
5c Use session 5.3. Simple JSP program, passing
management in JSP. data to JSP page through HTML
5d Use exception page.
297
handling in JSP page 5.4. Scripting in JSP, Session

designing. handling, Handling exception in
5e Design a JSP page to JSP, Database connectivity in
connect to database. JSP.
6. SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH HOURS AND MARKS (Theory )
Unit Title Of Unit Teaching Distribution Of Theory Marks

No. Hours R U A TOTAL
level Level Level
1 AWT and 14 07 06 12 25
Swing
2 Event Handling 10 03 06 06 15
3 Networking 08 04 04 04 12
4 Servlet 08 04 04 04 12
5 Introduction to 08 04 06 06 16
JSP
Total 48 22 26 32 80
7. SUGGESTED LIST OF PRACTICALS/Exercises
Sr.No. Unit Practical/Exercises App. Hours

No. Required
1 1 Create Window using frame class 04
of awt/swing
2 Create Applet window using swing
class
3 Create GUI application using all 04
controls of AWT
4 Create GUI application using all 04
controls of swing classes
5 Apply Gridlayout and Border 04
Layout for given GUI application
6 Create application with menubar 04
and display dialog box
7 2 Create GUI application using event 04
handling
8 3 Read and write data from TCP 04
sockets
9 Accept and process request from 04
TCP client
10 4 Create any registration /application 04
298
form using servlet

11 Store and retrieve data into the 04
database through servlet
12 5 Create simple Jsp program to pass 04
data from html to JSP page.
13 Create application to manage 04
session in JSP & also handle
exception occurred in page.
14 Create application for database 04
connectivity in JSP.
15 Develop a mini project for given 08
application
Total 64
8. SUGGESTED LIST OF STUDENT ACTIVITIES

1. Survey on currently used JDK and Java IDE.
2. Installation of JDKS and Java IDE
3. Intallation local server Apache Tomcat.
4. Design creative GUI window.
5. Develop a GUI window for online notice board.
6. Create LAN chatting program.
7. Design progrm to exchang data using datagram packets
8. Create Server side database management system.
9. Design simple website using JSP
10. Design website for institute using JSP and databse connectivity
outcomes.
b. Q & A technique.
c. Demonstration
d. Seminars
Sr. Author Title Publisher

No.
01 Patrick Complete reference for java Tata McGraw Hill
Naughton,
Herbert Schildt
299
02 E. Programming with java BPB

Balaguruswami.
03 Keyur Shah Java2 Programming Tata McGraw Hill
04 John R.Hubbard Programming with Java Tata McGraw Hill
05 Patrick Complete reference for JSP Tata McGraw Hill

Naughton,
Herbert Schildt
S. No. Name of equipment/Software Brief specification

2 JDKs or IDEs jdk1.7 or higher version, NetBeans
, Eclipse
a. Java Applets
http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/deployment/applet/index.html
b. Introduction to GUI Programming
http://math.hws.edu/javanotes/c6/index.html
c. Creating a GUI using AWT
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/awt/
d. Creating GUI using Java Swing
https://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/uiswing/
e. JDBC Database Access
https://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/jdbc/
https://www.tutorialspoint.com/jdbc/index.htm
https://www.tutorialspoint.com/jdbc/jdbc_tutorial.pdf
f. Servlet Technologies
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/index-jsp-135475.html
g. Java Server Pages
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/javaee/jsp/index.html

300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
Design and
CO
develop powerful
1
- - 3 3 - - - - - 3 - -
GUI using AWT
and swing
Develop dynamic
CO
application using event - 2 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 -
2
handling.
Create Server side
CO
programming using - 1 3 1 - - - - - 1 1 -
3
servlet.
Design and develop
CO application for data
4 transfer using .net
- 1 2 1 - - - - - 2 1 -
package
Develop dynamic web
CO page or web site using - 1 2 1 - - - - - 2 1 1
5 JSP.

No
2 Mrs P.P.Deshapande Lecturer In Information Technology
3 Mr.J.P.Joshi Lecturer In Information Technology

301
6S505 GPA Software Testing
COURSE TITLE- SOFTWARE TESTING

COURSE CODE 6S505

offered
Computer Engineering & Information Technology Sixth
1. RATIONALE
Software testing is diversified level course, helps in testing the software application or
product against user requirements for the assurance of bug free software. It aims to plan and
write good test coverage according to its specifications. This course includes characteristics
of tester, qualities of software and types of testing.
2. COMPETENCY
“Create and execute automated software test plans and test cases to uncover errors for assuring the
quality of the software”

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
PA
(TW)
150
3 - 2 5 80 20 #25 25

4. COURSE OUTCOMES
302
1. Identify the qualities of software tester.

2. Select testing specifications for quality assurance.
3. Apply Black Box testing and its types.
4. Apply White Box testing and its types
5. Identify testing types.
6. Design the test plan for given application.

Unit - I 1a. Concept of bug, its cost 1.1 What is a bug? Why do bugs occur?
Fundamentals of 1b. Role of Software tester Cost of Bugs.
Testing 1c. Qualities of software 1.2 Role of a Software Tester.
tester 1.3 Qualities of Software Tester
1.4 Software Project staff.
Unit - II 2a Describe software 2.1 Testing Axioms
The Realities of testing terms 2.2 Software Testing terms and define
Software Testing & 2b Concept of testing and Precision & Accuracy, Verification &
quality assurance
Examining the Validation
2c Specification of Black
specification. box & White box 2.3 Quality & Reliability
testing 2.4 Testing & Quality Assurance.
2d High level reviews 2.5 Examining the Specification of
Black Box & White box
Testing, Static & Dynamic Testing
2.6 Performing High Level & low level
review of the specification of test
technology.
Unit - III 3a. Explain black box testing 3.1 Concept of dynamic black box testing
Black Box Testing 3b. Types of black box testing 3.2 Test-to-pass and Test-to-fail
3c. Data testing 3.3 Equivalence partitioning
3.4 Data testing: Boundary conditions,
Sub-boundary condition, default.,
empty, wrong, incorrect & garbage
data
Unit - IV 4a. Explain white box testing 4.1 Concept of White box testing
White Box Testing 4b. Types of white box testing 4.2 Formal reviews: Peer reviews,
4c. Explain coding standards Walkthroughs, Inspections
and guidelines 4.3 Coding standards and guidelines
4d. Explain generic code 4.4 Generic code review checklist
review
Unit - V 5a. Various testing levels 5.1 Testing levels: Unit/Component
303
Testing levels & 5b. Types of software testing Testing, Module Testing, Integration
types Testing, System Testing, Acceptance
Testing
5.2 Types of Testing: Smoke Testing,
Interface Testing, Usability Testing,
Alpha Testing, Beta Testing, Stress
Testing, Security Testing, Acceptance
Testing
Unit VI. 6a. Benefits of automation & 6.1 The benefits of Automation & Tools
tools 6.2 List of Testing tools
Automated Testing , 6b. List of Testing tools 6.3 Test Tools: Viewers and Monitors
Test Tools and Test 6c. Writing test cases Programmed Macros, Stubs, and
Cases Writing 6d. Overview of test case Stress & Load Tools.
planning 6.4 Software Test Automation: Macro
Recording & Playback, Programmed
Macros, Fully Programmable,
Automated testing tools
6.5 Writing Test Cases: The goals of
Test Case Planning, Test Case
Planning overview, Test Design, Test
Cases. Test Procedures.
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
1 Fundamentals of Testing 08 4 5 4 13
The Realities of Software Testing
2 08 4 5 4 13
& Examining the specification.
3 Black Box Testing 08 4 4 5 13
4 White Box Testing 10 4 4 5 13
5 Testing Levels & Types 08 4 5 6 15
Automated Testing , Test Tools and
6 Test Cases Writing 06 4 4 5 13
48 24 27 29 80
304
Sr.
No.
1 01 Introduction to Software Testing 2
2 03 Implement black box data testing for given form 2
3 06 Introduction to Software Testing Tools 2
4 06 Write test case to login a specific web page. 2
Write test case to update 10 records into given table of excel 4
5 06
file.
Write test cases to select the number of students who have 2
6 06
scored more than 60 in any one subject ( or all subjects )
Write test cases for total number of objects present / available 2
7 06
on the page
Write and test cases to get the number of list items in a list / 4
8 06
combo box
Write test cases to check number of items present on a 4
9 06
desktop
Write test cases for any application e.g. Railway reservation 2
10 06
System, etc
11 06 Write test cases to demonstrate use of control statements 2
12 06 Write test cases to demonstrate use of loop statements 2

Implement automation testing using winrunner for any 2
13 06
windows application
Total 32
a. Internet Survey of various testing tools.
b. Test case and test plan management
c. Bug reporting and management
305
d. Presentations on advanced topics in software testing. Topics include: mutation

testing, database testing, performance/load testing, and security testing, and
automated test generation tools.
outcomes.

b. Q & A technique.
c. Designing test cases
d. Guiding students for writing test plans.
f. Assign mini projects
1. Software Testing Ron Patton SAMS Tech Media
2. Software Testing Ron Patton Pearson 2nd Edition
3 Software Testing: Srinivasan Desikan, Pearson Education

Principles & Practicals Gopalswamy Ramesh

Software : Microsoft 2003 /any higher version , Winrunner, Test Director
a. http://seleniumhq.org/
b. http://sourceforge.net/projects/sahi/
c. http://testng.org/doc/index.html
306

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Identify the qualities of - - - - - - - - - -

software tester. - 3
2 Select testing - - - - - - -
specifications for - 3 2 2 2
quality assurance.
3 Apply Black Box testing - 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 - -
and its types.
4 Apply White Box - - - - - - -
testing and its types. - 3 - 3 3
5 Identify testing types. - 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - -
6 Design the test plan for - 1 1 1 - - - - - 1 - 1

given application.

No faculty members
1 Prachi P. Lecturer in Information Technology,

Deshpande
Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad
307
6T502/6P502 GPA Adv DB Management Systems
COURSE TITLE- ADVANCED DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

COURSE CODE 6P502

offered
Computer Engineering & Information Technology Sixth
1. RATIONALE
Advanced database management system is a diversified level course aims at designing of

database for business, scientific and engineering application. At the end of this course the
students will be able to develop simple and advanced PL/SQL code blocks also able to design
relational database for industrial and educational projects.
2. COMPETENCY
Students will be able to:
“Design a relational database system with appropriate functionality to process the data and
with constraints to maintain data integrity and avoid data redundancy.
Execute Advance SQL queries related to transaction processing.”


Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(OR) (TW)
150
3 - 2 05 80 20 #25 25

4. COURSE OUTCOMES

308
1. Design object oriented Data Model.

2. Types of transactions and implementation of Atomicity and durability.
3. Design of parallel database systems.
4. Design distributed transaction model.
5. Methods of recovery systems.

Unit - I 1a. New Applications of 1.1 New database application
Object Oriented database system 1.2 The object oriented data model
Database 1b. Design object oriented 1.2.1 object structure
data model 1.2.2 object classes
1c. Explain object oriented 1.2.3 Inheritance
languages 1.2.4 Object identity
1.2.5 Object containment
1.3 Object oriented languages
1.4 Persistent programming languages
1.5 The ODMG C++ object definition
language
Unit - II 2a Describe transaction 2.1 Transaction concepts
Transactions concepts 2.2 Transaction state
2b States of transaction 2.3 Implementation of atomicity &
2c Explain concurrent
durability
execution of transaction
2d Explain Serializability 2.4 Concurrent execution
and recoverability 2.5 Serializability
2.6 Recoverability
Unit - III 3a. Overview of parallel 3.1 Introduction

Parallel Database database 3.2 I/O parallelism
3b. Explain I/O parallelism 3.3 Interquery parallelism
3c. Describe Interquery 3.4 Intraquery parallelism
parallelism 3.5 Intraoperation parallelism
3d. Describe Intraquery 3.6 Interopeartion parallelism
parallelism 3.7 Design of parallel system
3e. Describe Intraoperation
parallelism
309
3f. Describe Interoperation

parallelism
3g. Design parallel system
Unit - IV 4a. Overview of distributed 4.1 Distributed data storage
Distributed data storage 4.2 Distributed query processing
Database 4b. Explain distributed query 4.3 Distributed transaction model
processing 4.4 Commit protocols
4c. Describe distributed 4.5 Coordinator selection
transaction model 4.6 Concurrency control
4d. Explain concurrency 4.7 Deadlock handling
control 4.8 Multidatabase systems
4e. Concept of deadlock
handling
4f. Explain Multidatabase
systems
Unit - V 5a. Overview of recovery 5.1 Failure classification
Recovery System systems 5.2 Storage structure
5b. Explain log based 5.3 Recovery & Atomicity
recovery 5.4 Log based recovery
5c. Describe shadow paging 5.5 Shadow paging
5d. Describe advanced 5.6 Recovery with concurrent transactions
recovery technique 5.7 Advanced recovery technique
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
1 Object oriented database 12 8 4 8 20

2 Transactions 12 8 4 10 22
3 Parallel database 10 4 4 4 12
4 Distributed database 08 4 4 6 14
5 Recovery system 06 4 4 4 12
Total 48 28 20 32 80
310
Sr.
No.
Implementation of Object Oriented database – Extended entity 2
1 01
relationship
Implementation of parallel database 4
2 03
3 03 Implementation of parallel join and parallel sort 4
4 06 Implementation of triggers and assertion for bank database. 2
5 06 Construction of knowledge database 4
6 05 Study and working of WEKA tool 2
7 04 Query processing – Implementation of efficient query 4
optimizer
8 04 Designing XML schema for company database. 2
9 03 Implement Distributed database for bookstore. 4
10 03 Deadlock detection algorithm for distributed database using 4
wait for graph.
Total 32
a. Creating object oriented database

b. Design a parallel database model for any real time database system.
c. Discuss Advanced recovery techniques
9. Mini project: Create any distributed database system

outcomes.

b. Q & A technique.
c. Designing real time object oriented data model.
d. Guiding students for designing real time parallel database system.
e. Observe students and monitor the performance of students.
f. Activity based learning.
311
g. Assign mini projects.

C. J. Date
Database Systems
Oracle Press
reference

Software : Microsoft 2003 /any higher version , Oracle, SQL Server,MySQl

b. SQL Basic Concepts: http://www.w3schools.com/sql/
c. SQL Tutorial : http://beginner-sql-tutorial.com/sql.htm
d. DBMS:http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=106106093
312

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Design object oriented - - - - - - -
Data Model. - 3 3 3 2
2 Types of transactions - - - - - - - -
and implementation of - 3 3 3
Atomicity and
durability.
3 Design of parallel - - - - - - - -
- 3 2 3
database systems.
4 Design distributed - - - - - - -
transaction model. - 3 3 2 1
5 Methods of recovery - - - - - - - - -
systems. - 3 3

No faculty members
1 Prachi P. Lecturer in Information Technology, Govt. Polytechnic,

Deshpande Aurangabad
313
6T503/6P503 GPA Geographical Information System
COURSE TITLE: GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM (GIS)
COURSE CODE: 6P503
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SIXTHSEMESTER
1. RATIONALE
Geographic Information System (GIS) is applied level course deals with the analysis and
management of geographic information. This course offers an introduction to methods of
managing and processing geographic information. Emphasis will be placed on the nature of
geographic information, data models and structures for geographic information, geographic data
input, data manipulation and data storage, spatial analytic and modeling techniques, and error
analysis.
“Analyze and process geographic information”

L T P C ESE PT ESE OR
(TW)
150
03 00 02 05 80 20 25 #25
Legends: L-Lecture; T – Tutorial/Teacher Guided Theory Practice; P -Practical; C – Credit, ESE-
examination.
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
I. Identify components and operation of geographic information system.
II. Apply transformation on geographic data.
III. Use of different data models and structures for geographic information
IV. Demonstrate GIS processing and visualization of GIS data.
V. Use of software to handle geographic data, data manipulation and data storage
314
VI. Apply GIS technology for given area

UNIT-I 1a Demonstrate 1.1 Introduction, Definition of
Introduction understanding and GIS, Evolution of GIS,

to GIS competency of GIS components of GIS,
theory. 1.2 Geographically referenced data,
1b Fundamental Geographic, projected and planer

knowledge of coordinate system
coordinate system. 1.3 GIS operation, Future of GIS
1c Geographic data’s
components.
Unit - II 2a Recognizing and 2.1 Spatial & Non-spatial Data, Data
Data Input identifying spatial information, data type, data sources,
and Geometric and non-spatial data. characteristics of spatial and non-spatial
transformation data
2b Competency of 2.2 existing GIS data, Metadata, Conversion
conversion of GIS of existing data, Creating new data
data Geometric transformation
UNIT-3 3a Models of GIS data 3.1 Models of GIS, Geographical Data
Geographic Models, Map as a Model
3b Demonstrate
Data understanding and 3.2 Spatial Referencing System
competency 3.3 Map Projections, Commonly Used Map
Management Geographic
and Models projection Projections, Types of map, Grid system
3.4 Cartographic Symbolization
3c Recognizing and
identifying Raster 3.5 Conceptual Models, Raster
and Vector data and Vector data models.
model
UNIT-4 4a Competency of GIS 4.1 Raster based GIS data processing;
data processing Vector based GIS data processing
GIS Data 4.2 Visualization of geographic
Processing, 4b Demonstrate information,
visualization of
Analysis and geographic data. 4.3 principles of cartographic design in GIS
315
Visualization 4c Analysis of Vector/

Raster data 4.4 Vector data analysis, Raster data
analysis
UNIT-5 5a Understanding of 5.1 GIS software, GIS open source
GIS Software software
Data
5.2 GIS Architecture and functionality
Processing 5b Understanding of 5.3 Spatial data infrastructure (SDI)
GIS Spatial data 5.4 Spatial data capture and
System infrastructure representation, spatial data
presentation and storage spatial query
and analysis
5.5 GIS and data management system.
UNIT-6 6a Understanding of
GIS uses and
Applications of
application 6.1 Changes in Technology related to
GIS and GIS, Trends in GIS, GIS users
6.2 Urban and Municipal Applications,
Remote
Other Applications
Sensing 6.3 Remote Sensing - Basic Principles.
Fundamentals

No. Hours Marks
R U A Total
I Introduction to GIS 06 04 04 00 08
II Data Input and Geometric 08 04 08 04 16

transformation
III Geographic Data Management 10 08 08 04 20
and Models
IV GIS Data Processing, Analysis 10 04 08 04 16
and Visualization
V Data Processing System 08 04 04 04 12
VI Applications of GIS and 06 04 04 00 08

Remote Sensing Fundamentals:
Total 48 20 26 34 80

316

Hrs.
1 1 Import data to generate coordinate system. 02
2 1 Create topology to Generate data (points, line, polygons). 02

3 2 Perform Geo-referencing and image registration 02
4 2 Fetch GIS data by Querying 02
5 3 Explore GIS software features, Import/ Export data in open 02

source GIS software
6 3 Perform shape and coverage file, import of data, feature class, 02
geodatabase, data frames, displaying qualitative/quantitative
features, labelling features in ArcGIS
7 4 Perform Geo-referencing activities- Coordinating system, 04
datum conversion, map projection, storing and viewing
projection information in ArcGIS.
8 4 Perform activities on Vector data 04
1. creating new features, 2. Editing functions,
3. digitization, 4. errors and creation of topology
9 5 Perform analysis on Spatial data 04
1. Query by location/ attribute, 2. Buffer, overlay analysis,
3. Interpolation methods.
10 5 Perform operation on Non-Spatial data 04
1. table manipulation, 2. table relation, 3. creation of graphs and
reports.
11 6 Perform Map design and map composition 04
Total 32

1. Explore various open source GIS software
2. Three definitions of GIS taken from books, journals, and/or the World Wide Web.
Each definition should include the source
3. Read the “History of GIS”, prepare a one-page summary
4. Comparing Projections: Advantages and Disadvantages
5. Organization of an event to promote use bicycle in maintenance of physical self
317

These are sample strategies, which a teacher can use to facilitate the attainment of
courseoutcomes.
b. Question& Answer technique.
c. Demonstration
d. Seminars

1 Kang-Tsung Chang Introduction to Geographic Tata
Information Systems Mcgraw Hill
2 Burrough and R. A. Principles of geographical Oxford

Mcdonnel information systems” University Press.
3 Otto Huisman And Principles of geographical ITC
Rolf A. de information systems”An
introductory textbook
4 C.P.Lo, Albert K. W. Concept and techniques of PHI, Second
Geographic Information Systems Edition, 2007
S.
No.
1 GIS open source software GIS software

1. http://www.ncgia.ucsb.edu/giscc/
318

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
Understanding of 2 1 - - - - - - - - - -
CO1 geographic
information
Learn methods of 2 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO2 managing and
processing geographic
information.
Use of different data 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO3 models and structures
for geographic
information
Demonstrate the - 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO4 ability of geographic
data input, data
manipulation and data
storage
Spatial analytic and - 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1
CO5 modelling techniques,
and error analysis
Learn application of 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO6 GIS

No
1 Mr P. B. Lahoti Lecturer InComputer Engineering
2 Mr. P. S. Hiwale Lecturer In Computer Engineering
Member Secretory(PBOS) (Chairman PBOS)
319
6P504 GPA OBJECT ORIENTED TECH USING (UML)
COURSE TITLE OBJECT ORIENTED TECHNOLOGY USING UNIFIED

MODELING DESIGN (UML)
COURSE CODE 6P504

Computer Engineering Forth
1. RATIONALE
Object Oriented Technology is a diversified level course intends to create confidence in students
of Computer Engineering for an Object oriented approach to software development. It is based on
modeling objects from the real world and then using the model to build a language independent
design. This subject will be useful for student to understand concepts of object Oriented
Programming Systems & to model these concepts using UML for any application.
2. COMPETENCY
The course content should be taught and implemented with the aim to develop different types of skills
so that students are able to acquire following competency:
" Design the Software development models using UML"

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(OR) (TW)
- 2 05 80 20 25# 25 150
3
320

4. COURSE OUTCOMES
 Recognize and Interpret the importance of Object Oriented concepts
 Prepare an Object Model for a given Problem statement
 Demonstrate and Select required design tools.
 Design the concepts of Class diagram, Object diagram, Interaction diagram, State
chart Diagram, Use case Diagram, Sequence Diagram for any give system
 Design UML Behavioural Modelling diagrams for any given system

Unit – I 1a. Describe various types of
Introduction to Modeling techniques
Modeling 1b. Explain Four principles of 1.1 Brief overview of OMT model by
Modeling Rambaugh
1.2 Booch methodology, Use case driven
approach (OOSE) by Jacobson
1.3 Overview of CRC card method by
Cunningham
1.4 Importance of Modeling, Four
principles of Modeling
Unit– II 2a. Concepts of Object Classes 2.1 Objects and Classes,Object
Object Modelling Diagram,Attributes
2b. Explain Generalization, 2.2 Operation,Methods
Inheritance, Aggregation, 2.3 Links, Associations, Advanced Concepts
Association 2.4 Multiplicity Link Attributes, Association
as a class, Aggregation
2.5 Generalization & Inheritance, Group
Constructs
2.6 Aggregation Vs Association and
Generalization
321
2.7 Recurssive Aggregation, Propagation of

Operation
2.8 Abstract classes, Multiple Inheritance,
Metadata
Unit– III 3a. Describe UML 3.1 Overview of UML
Overview of 3b. Explain Conceptual Model of
UML UML 3.2 Scope of UML
3c. Discuss architectural Meta
Model 3.3 Conceptual Model Of UML
3d. Explain Unified Software
3.4 Architectural Meta Model
Development Life Cycle
3.5 Unified Software Development Life Cycle
3.6 Introduction to UML Diagram
Unit– IV 4a. Draw Class diagrams 4.1 Class Diagram & Advanced Class
Structural Diagram
Modelling & Use 4b. Dram Advanced class diagram 4.2 Advanced Classes and Relations
Case 4.3 Interfaces, Types & Roles
4c. Explain Packages, Instances 4.4 Packages, Instances, Object Diagram
4.5 Use Case Diagram
4d. Draw Object diagram
4e. Draw Use case Diagram
Unit– V 5a Explain and Draw Interaction 5.1 Interaction Diagram 5.1.1 Sequence Diagram
UML diagram & its type
5.1.2 Collaboration Diagram
Behavioural
Modelling 5b Explain and Draw State Chart
5.2 State Chart Diagram
Diagram
5.3 Activity Diagram
5c Explain and Draw Activity
Diagram 5.4 Component Diagram
5d Explain and Draw Component 5.5 Deployment Diagram

Diagram
5d Explain and Draw Deployment

Diagram
322
Unit Teaching
Title Of Unit R U A
No Hours TOTAL
level Level Level
I Introduction to Modeling 06 2 4 4 10
II Object Modeling 08 2 4 8 14
III Overview of UML 08 2 4 8 14
Structural Modeling & Use

IV 14 4 6 12 24
Case
V UML Behavioural Modelling 12 4 6 10 20
Total 48 14 24 42 80
1. I Introduction to Object Oriented Technology. 02
2. I Gather design requirements for any particular system.(System 04

should be chosen by students and next carried out for rest
practices)
3. II Introduction to UML tools and select any one tool to design 02
diagrams.
4. II Design total schema of chosen system 04
5. II Draw Object diagram Using tool like EdrawMAx 02
6. II Draw Class diagram & Advanced Class Diagram Using tool 04

like EdrawMAx
323
7. II Draw Use Case diagram Using tool like EdrawMAx 02
8. III Draw Sequence diagram Using tool like EdrawMAx 02
9. III Draw Collaboration diagram Using tool like EdrawMAx 02
10. III Draw State Chart diagram Using tool like EdrawMAx 02
11. IV Draw Activity diagram Using tool like EdrawMAx 02
12 IV Draw Component diagram Using tool like EdrawMAx 02
13 VI Draw Deployment diagram Using tool like EdrawMAx 02
Total 32
i. Prepare power point presentation for different UML diagrams their terms and concepts.
ii. Practice to draw various UML diagrams for various systems.
iii.Prepare charts of symbols of UML Tools
outcomes.
i.Demonstrate practical thoroughly before the students perform.

ii.Assign different types of Micro-projects
iii.Guide students in preparing Micro-projects.
S.
No.
1. Object Oriented Rambaugh Blaha PHI

Modeling & Design
324
2. The UML User Guide Booch, Jacobson, Addison Weley

Rambaugh
3. Practical OOD with Mark Paiestly PHI

UML
4. UML in Shell Sinon Alhain PHI
Sr.NO. Name of the Equipment Specification

1. Computer System with latest configuration
and memory
2. Multimedia Projector
a. www.nptel.com
b. www.uml.org/
c. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/
d. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OkC7HKtiZC0
Software’s:
i. EDraw max
ii. StarUML
iii. UMLet

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 01 02
0
1 Recognize and Interpret

the importance of Object 0 3 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0
Oriented concepts
325
2 Prepare an Object Model

for a given Problem 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
statement
3 Demonstrate and Select

0 1 0 2 0 0 0 1 1 2 0 0
required design tools.
4 Describe And design the

concepts of Class diagram,
Object diagram,
Interaction diagram, State
0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 3 0 0 0
chart Diagram, Use case
Diagram, Sequence
Diagram for any give
system
5 Describe And design UML

Behavioural Modelling
0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 3 3 0 0
diagrams for any give
system

No faculty members
1 Ms.Prajakta.S Lecturer in Computer Engineering, Govt. Polytechnic,Aurangabad

Sadafule
326
6S503 GPA Vocational Training (VT)
COURSE TITLE- (IMPLANT)VOCATIONAL TRAINING(VT)

COURSE CODE 6S503

offered
Computer Engineering / Information Technology Sixth
1. RATIONALE
Computer Engineering & Information Technology technician program is mainly integrated

with practical experiences. A software developer & tester are responsible gathering
requirement, planning, designing, coding, testing & deploying the software in various areas
of software industry. While working in the industry a technician is employed for planning,
preparation, supervision, and maintaining quality of sofrware/ web sites/ networking.. In
plant training program will help in enhancing the knowledge and skills of the software
developer & tester.
2. COMPETENCY

“Establish or relate theoretical knowledge with practical site situations to enhance
career and professional skills”

Teaching Scheme
Credits
(Hours/ Credits)
ESE PA
L T P C ESE PT
(OR) (TW)
100
00 - 04 04 00 00 @50 50
327
4. COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Identify the area like development, h/w maintenance, networking in industry.

2. Identify the problem statement and process to resolve the problem
3. Select appropriate tools/software.
4. Maintain daily dairy to note the observations at work place on daily basis.
5. Prepare a detailed report based on the learning experiences during vocational training
Following are the general guidelines for implementation of Vocational training
Final year students of Computer Engineering & Information Technology program are
expected to work individually for vocational training. Every student shall work parallel with
a regular employed person of the permitted industry as a trainee in an industry for at least
one week as decided by the department authorities under the guidance of faculty members.
(Preferable, to be undertaken during previous semester break i.e at the end of V Semester
exam for 4 weeks duration).
Further vocational Training work is to be continued weekly and shall be the part of time
table for completion of different activities in the further semester as per the curriculum.
Finally, the student shall prepare the report of his vocational training under the guidance of
the teaching staff members ( Maximum 35 pages ) which may consists of requirement, flow
diagrams, process/steps, s/w & h/w requirements, test cases (if any), logs to be maintained
for maintenance, simple designs, processes, applications, managements, costing aspects.
Student should deliver a seminar on his experiences during in plant training.
Preferable Period : Vocational Training is to be undertaken during previous semester break

i.e in vacation after Fifth Semester examination or in vacation before start of Sixth semester
for 4 weeks duration)
328
S. No. Unit No. Practical Exercises Approx. Hrs. required
(Outcomes in Psychomotor Domain)
Term work
1 A 1. Identify the industry. 32* Hrs- Min )

Semester Break Activity.
2. Take concerns and depute the student 32 Hours in sixth semester.
along with faculty members.
3. Maintain the record of all visits and work

done by student during training on daily basis
2. B- I Review of literature survey and Analysis of 08

data collected during training.
3 B-II Preparing of rough draft along with collected 08

information, facts & findings.
4 B-III Group discussion in presence of guide Give 08

presentation - ppts / models / charts /
drawings etc.
5 B-IV Prepare Final report with all attachments. 08

(Spiral Binding of the vocational training
work and term work completion.)
Total Hours. 32* + 32 = 64 hrs
I. Aspects to be considered for Vocational training / report writing of it.
 To solve the minor industrial problems.

 Develop the Entrepreneurial skills.
 Develop ability to work in a team.
 To enhance the presentation skills
 Project reports preparations & cost analysis,
 To be familiar with financial sources.
II. SUGGESTED AREAS FOR THE SEMINAR:
329
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 2. Cloud Computing

3. Networking
Security
7. Computer Vision
8. Machine Learning
10. Soft Computing
13. Semantic Web Mining
16. Recent Technology / Latest Trends in
tecnology
1 Consider Local / Institute problem or problem related to society for providing technical
solution.
2 Visit the site.
3 Take permission of concerned authority.
4 Follow Instructions.
5 Write daily dairy regularly at site.
6 Prepare sketches on dairy / on plain pages.
7 Collect drawings and leaflets.
8 Group discussions.
9 Prepare report.
330
10 Prepare power point presentation for final assessment of vocational training
Vocational Training Report Format

1. Vocational Training report shall be in the print form on A-4 size white bond paper.
page.
report.
Binding: Spiral binding is preferred for the seminar report. The number of copies are to be
prepared by the student are 3 nos. (Student + Guide + Department copy)
S.
No.

Desktop PC
and 1 GB RAM.
2. LCD Projector
331
A) DAILY DAIRY FORMAT
GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC, AURANGABAD

Civil Engineering Department
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VOCATIONAL TRAINING DAILY DAIRY
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------
Period of Vocational training ( 4 Weeks ) : From : to:
Address of Industry / Site:----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DAY NO : Date:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OBSERVATIONS OF THE DAY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Signature of Student Signature of Engineer In-charge
332
Signature of Guide Signature of Head of Dept.


No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 01 02
1 Identify the area like -- 3 -- 3 -- -- -- --- -- -- -- 2

development, h/w
maintenance,
networking in industry.
2 Identify the problem -- 1 -- --- -- -- -- --- --- -- -- 2
statement and process
to resolve the problem
3 Select appropriate --- -- 3 3 --- --- -- 1 -- -- 1
tools/software.
4 Maintain daily dairy to -- 3 -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 2 2
note the observations at
work place on daily
basis.
5 Prepare a detailed -- 3 3 --- -- --- --- --- -- -- -- 2
report based on the
learning experiences
during vocational
training

No faculty members
2 V B Kundlikar Lecturer in Information Technology
333
334

Co Curriculum

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Co Curriculum

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Co Curriculum

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C

Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad, is one of the oldest institute in Maharashtra was

Government Polytechnic, Aurangabad has expanded quantitatively from an intake of 180

“The destiny of our country is being shaped in our classrooms”.

contributes in the development of competent

professionals and entrepreneurs on the platform of

technology based systems blended learning through

highly qualified & trained staff”.

professionals, technicians & skilled human resources

through world class curriculum, student centric

academic systems, team of committed, trained

faculty & staff contributing to the students

successful employment & entrepreneurship with a

spirit of patriotism and concern for environment".

Computer Science & Engineering to cultivate

"digital artifacts" for society.

software required for industry and business.

 Developing skills resembling problem solving,

interpersonal skill, high order thinking skill and

logical reasoning for entrepreneurship and

 Developing values and ethics for lifelong

learning in the system environment.

Therefore, this Diploma in Computer Engineering programme envisages in

The programme will develop the competency required to assemble computer

S. No. Type of industries/ Capacity (Designation) in which employed

i) Computer Hardware H/W maintenance Engineer

ii) Computer Services Customer support Engineer, Supervisor

iii) Consultancy services Providing services to customer, organizations

iv) Software Development S/W Testing/Trainee/Customer Support

Programmer, Database Administrator

v) Electronics and communication Trainee Technician

vi) Desktop Support technician Network Analyst

vii) System Network administrator Network Administrator

viii) Self-Taught Computer H/W maintenance, assemble

IX Technical Support Analyst Trainee Engineers

X Web developer Web Application developer

COMPETENCIES REQUIRED BY COMPUTER ENGINEERING TECHNICIAN:

 Use and operate computers for data processing and communication.

CURRICULUM DESIGN & DEVELOPMENT

Taking into account the knowledge, skills/competencies, attitudes etc. required to be

While designing the curriculum emphasis is given on following points.

 New/emerging technologies being used in the world of work.

Describing roles/ functions of a technician

 Installation, inspection, production & control

Designing content of each curriculum area

 Implementation strategies for each subject were identified.

 Learning resources for students were prescribed such as

After conferring academic autonomy to Government Polytechnics during

Therefore Curriculum needs to be outcome-based where competencies /

National Board of Accreditation (NBA) has been practicing outcome based

i. Vision, mission and programme educational objectives

Philosophy for Sixth Revision of Curriculum adopted at Government Polytechnic

Approach to Curriculum Design and Development for Sixth Revision of

POLICIES OF GOVT/AICTE/ VISION &

PEOs, POs, & PSOs -

CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT APPROACH

Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)

Programme Outcomes (POs)

MAPPING OF MISSION AND PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES

PEO Statement M1 M2 M3 Justification